- Signs of the Times for Fri, 29 Dec 2006 -



Sections on today's Signs Page:



Signs Editorials


Editorial: Gerald Ford Should Have Listened to Tim McGraw

Cenk Uygur
29 Dec 06

While a lot of us were on vacation, the Grim Reaper got to work. It was a good week for death. First it was James Brown and Gerald Ford. Soon a man who knows a thing or two about death will join them, Saddam Hussein.

Every life needs an exit strategy. For James Brown it was a horse drawn carriage pulling into The Apollo.
Perfect. The man lived large and he died large. It's an exit plan that the Pentagon would have called "Go Strong."

Saddam on the other hand will be redeploying his forces - into Hades. The guy is still giving lectures about how we should "become an example of love, forgiveness and brotherly coexistence." Come on. For audacious hypocrisy, it's hard to get a better value than Saddam.

On the other end of the spectrum, we have Gerald Ford. A pleasant man. An uninteresting man. His exit strategy was more of a phased withdrawal.

The schmaltzy Tim McGraw song urges everyone to "live like you were dyin'." In Saddam's case, he really put that slogan to the test, but not in the way McGraw imagined. James Brown was the epitome of Carpe Diem. Did the man have any boring days?

Gerald Ford on the other hand seemed like he didn't have one interesting day in the last thirty years. Some would argue that he was wise to not meddle in politics again and to guard his reputation. To that I would answer - what reputation?

Here's the five things everyone says about Gerald Ford before they completely run out of things to say:

1. He was the only person to serve as vice-president and president without being elected (you don't say?! who isn't bored to death of this fact?).

2. He was portrayed as a bumbling, stumbling president by Chevy Chase on Saturday Night Live (you don't say?! I can't wait to hear this fact again when Chevy Chase dies).

3. Did you know he was a star football player in his youth (ooohh, now that's an exciting fact - you know you've led a dull life when they have to start talking about the varsity letters you got seventy years ago)?

4. He pardoned Nixon (this is the only relevant thing he actually did).

5. He moved Dick Cheney and Don Rumsfeld into significant positions of power in his administration (and this fact unfortunately outweighs his varsity letters, and combined with the Nixon pardon makes his life accomplishments a net negative - I know it's very wrong to speak ill of the dead, even if they've been dead for thirty years. I am a bad man.)

Here's the reason for my slight bitterness toward President Ford - apparently, he told Woodward that he thought Bush was making a "big mistake" by going into Iraq, but that Woodward shouldn't tell anybody until Ford died.

That's awful, and frankly, stupid. If I were a bit more brazen, I might even say that it lacks courage. But he is dead, so I'll leave it at stupid.

My God man, the Almighty didn't give you a life so you can sit on your rear end and wait to say things when you're dead. Just say it. Live a little.

Yes, it may break the tradition of ex-presidents not talking about the policies of current presidents. So what? Who cares? Soon you'll be dead and no one will give a damn about any tradition. Soon they'll be busy talking about how many varsity letters you got when you were eighteen because you didn't really do anything while you were alive, except accidentally become president.

Besides which, who cares what people say when you're dead - you're already dead. If Ford had said something while he were alive, he might have had a small effect. I know that nothing was going to stop Cheney from going to war with Iraq. As Ford himself agreed, Cheney had the "fever."

But it might have helped if reasonable people all stood up at the same time and voiced their objections. If Colin Powell, Tony Blair, Gerald Ford and George H.W. Bush all said how foolhardy the Iraq War was in unison perhaps the country would have heard them. Even if they had just said it a whole two years after the war started, it still could have helped to get us on the right track before we wound up in the mess we're in now.

Except Blair chose the role of the inexplicable lapdog. Powell chose the role of the wounded but foolishly loyal soldier. George H. W. Bush chose the role of the doting father who put the feelings of his dimwitted son ahead of what he knew was right for the country. And Gerald Ford sat around waiting to die.

Actually, I'm more bitter that the man wasted his life away being a good sport after his presidency. Do something man! You're not an average schlep. You're an ex-President.

Do you know how many different interesting things he could have done with the power that comes from that title? He didn't have to save the world, but he could have at least tried to do something slightly relevant - at least to him. Go skydiving or Rocky Mountain climbing, as McGraw would say.

I know I'm way too hokey. My favorite movie is "Dead Poet's Society." I still believe in Carpe Diem. And I know I'm being way too harsh and judgmental of the pleasant and affable Gerald Ford. But I consider it an insult to life to not live.

When I get to the point where I think I'm starting to head downhill, I'm going to really let it go (as opposed to the calm person you see before you now). I'm going to do crazy things and not give a damn what society thinks. People can judge me when I'm dead, but I'm going to try to get the most out of this life while I'm still here. And from my point of view, Gerald Ford committed the unpardonable sin of not living while he was alive.

I'm sure I am overgeneralizing, and maybe the guy just liked to drink ice tea on his front porch, but it seems like he's been falling down the same stairs on for the last thirty years. I wish he would have gotten up and done something.

ORIGINAL

Comment on this Editorial


Editorial: And divided we laugh: the year in humor

PAUL LEWIS
The Boston Globe
December 29, 2006

FROM THE RISE of Stephen Colbert to the fall of Michael Richards, from the use of racial stereotypes in campaign ads to the recycling of botched jokes on YouTube, 2006 was a year in which provocative humor driven by hardball politics and new media convulsed America.

In 2005, the last of George W. Bush's 9/11 Teflon washed off in the waters of Katrina and the blood of Iraq. This year, as the White House mantra "stay the course" joined such mocked and discarded expressions as "mission accomplished" and "heckuva job," the president remained the most-ridiculed man in the country.

With so much anger animating our politics, the jokes Americans told and how they were received revealed a country cracking up in two ways: On the one hand, we were frequently and, at times, uproariously amused; on the other, laughter often rang out from opposite sides of our cultural fault lines.

These jokes had real consequences; by contributing to a public perception of haplessness and indirection at the White House, they helped bring down conservative leaders who were once thought invulnerable.

Humor writers everywhere were handed the gift of the year when Vice President Dick "Deadeye" Cheney shot Texas attorney Harry Whittington while quail hunting in Texas in February. Meanwhile, for jumping with both feet onto the heaping pile of ruined hypocrites, Representative Mark Foley and the Rev. Ted Haggard became the target of both serious scorn and comic harassment after being caught up in gay sex scandals.

Not all of the year's humor was political, of course. For the hard work they put into amusing the public, let's raise a New Year's Eve glass to Lindsay Lohan, Britney Spears, Kevin Federline, Ashlee Simpson, Paris Hilton, Tom Cruise, Katie Holmes, Pamela Anderson, Kid Rock, and Tara (Miss USA) Conner. Yet beyond the comparatively toothless and generally predictable celebrity putdowns, American humor reflected broader disaffection with the course of events in the country and in the world. Notable in this regard was the work of Stephen Colbert, veteran of "The Daily Show with Jon Stewart," who launched his own program, "The Colbert Report," in October 2005.

Appearing in what In These Times editor Jessica Clark calls "full conservative drag," Colbert exaggerates what he sees as biased far-right reporting. If, for instance, Fox News's Bill O'Reilly devotes endless hours to a concocted "War on Christmas," Colbert features a cartoon in which Santa is shot out of his sled by a World War I fighter plane (presumably piloted by secular liberals) and then rescued by Jesus, who catches him in his own aircraft.

Colbert's most controversial performance came on April 29, when he appeared as the host of the annual White House Correspondent's Dinner. Staying in character, he mocked Bush with excessive praise for his gut-based decision-making. About the president's sinking approval rating, Colbert quipped, "We know that polls are just a collection of statistics that reflect what people are thinking in 'reality.' And reality has a well-known liberal bias."

This routine failed to amuse the president, the first lady, and many members of the press (whom Colbert also mocked) -- not because it was witless but because it hit too close to home.

By spinning off current events, Colbert's show joined the already crowded field of fake-news humor. From the left, while Jon Stewart provided irony-laced stories about politics to fans who relied on him for their news fix, whitehouse.org blasted away with phony news releases and headlines like "President Bush Berates New York Times for Revealing the Super-Duper-Classified Military Secret that Our Troops in Iraq are Sitting Ducks." From the right, scrappleface.com, which boasts about presenting the "news fairly unbalanced," featured such stories as "Iran May Stop Nuke-Making in Exchange for ICBMs" and "Democrats to Boost Minimum Wage, Minimum Service."

Regardless of its target, fake news reminds us that all reporting is less objective than it seems, a matter of "truthiness" (to use Colbert's word of the year) rather than truth.

To the extent that voters noticed and reacted to this distinction, they punished Republicans. As R. J. Crane, the editor of topplebush.com, sees it, by the time the midterm elections rolled around, "the relentless ridicule" of mainstream comics, anti-Bush Web sites, and partisan cartoonists had helped push a "critical mass" of opinion against the decider-in-chief.

To be sure, Bush wasn't the only one in the pillory. Other politicians earned public ridicule when their jokes backfired. Just before Election Day, Senator John Kerry tried to tell a joke about how Bush's stupidity got the United States trapped in the Iraq War. Instead, he ended up suggesting that the American military is populated by academic underperformers. Whoops!

Meanwhile, in front of an all-white audience in Breaks, Va., Senator George Allen, the incumbent Republican favored to win reelection, used an obscure racial slur -- macaca -- to refer to an American college student of Indian descent who was shooting video for Allen's Democratic opponent. Though the remark sent titters through the supportive crowd, when the footage ran repeatedly on TV and YouTube, a wider audience saw arrogance and intolerance in the murky images. Allen, who until recently was considered a decent prospect for the Republican presidential nomination, ended up losing his seat.

Attempts at ethnic humor are always dicey. Still, Sacha Baron Cohen's movie "Borat," which opened just before Election Day, proved to be a hit both in the United States and abroad. It struck particular chords here. No doubt Borat, the character, embodies the spirit of every ethnic joke ever told anywhere by being a dirty, uncouth, and incompetent foreigner and, perhaps, also by being foolish in a nonthreatening way. It was easy to laugh at a country in which being the "fourth-best prostitute" counts as an achievement.

And yet Borat has far more to say about America than about Kazakhstan as a land of fools. For, as he travels west in search of "cultural learnings," Borat encounters Americans all too willing to join him in expressing repugnantly homophobic, misogynist, racist, and anti-Semitic views. A pied piper of bias, Cohen used feigned hate speech both to call forth the inner bigot in his marks and to challenge our vaunted sense of national superiority. Cohen's American fans know that the real joke is on us, and presumably agree with his implicit criticism of US culture. In this regard, "Borat" is part of the trend toward marketing comedy to groups defined by their shared values. Such marketing has promoted niche satire on the left and right. But at the same time, technology has made it virtually impossible to control one's audience -- a crucial reason why jokes (and attempted jokes) proved so explosive this year. With camcorders and cellphones recording everywhere, and with YouTube recycling gaffes, public speakers (like Borat's interlocutors) could no longer count on being able to share their edgy kidding with just their supporters. Even Rush Limbaugh, who has addressed a large audience of "ditto-headed" fans for decades, was caught by his own webcam mocking Parkinson's sufferer Michael J. Fox.

Over and over again in cyberspace, Limbaugh, Kerry, Allen, and Bush -- along with Michael Richards, the comic whose bizarre racial diatribe was captured on camera -- reenacted moments of weakness or folly they surely wished to erase.

Yet while partisans on all sides of our national divides used humor as a cudgel, most of us were far less serious about the jokes we shared. Though talk radio thrives on what we might call "rage-icule" and the Internet hosts whole galaxies of hostile satire, for the most part we laughed to relax, connect, and, above all, enjoy ourselves. Most of the time when we asked "Have you heard the one about . . . " we were just taking a moment to step back from the troubles of a demanding and dangerous world.

Paul Lewis, a professor of English at Boston College, is the author of "Cracking Up: American Humor in a Time of Conflict."

ORIGINAL
© Copyright 2006 Globe Newspaper Company.
Comment on this Editorial


Editorial: Gerald Ford Dead at 93: President Bush Mourns Loss of Innovative Bestower of Felony-Erasing Pardons

whitehouse.org
27 Dec 06

THE PRESIDENT: Today, I am deeply saddened by the loss of Gerald R. Ford, 38th President of the United States.

(Sniffs.)

The American people will always admire President Ford for his duty, his personal character, his masterful practice of the physical comedy arts, and his lifelong battle with terminal cancer of the personality. I personally mourn Gerry's passing, if for no other reason than it's lonely at the bottom of history's barrel.

Naw, naw. I'm just kidding around. Don't feel sorry for me, no. Shhhhhh! We're here to get all weepy over a ninety-three year old man who keeled over. I mean, ninety-three. That's what they do, those ninety-three year old men: they die. Babies poop in diapers. Etcetera, etcetera. I mean, I'm all busted up. Gerry was a great dude, a little stiff, but he filled out a pair of golf pants real nice and Aunt Betty sure could mix a mean Dilaudid & Percocet gimlet. So, like, I'm bummed that he kicked off. Blahblahblah. At least it'll keep Iraq off the papers for a couple days.

Shit. Where was I... ?

Oh. President Ford. He was a brave man who served his country through a tumultuous and delicate period in American history. You know, if you think about it, ol' Gerry and I have a lot in common. For instance, in both 1974 and 2000, we were both technically elected to the Presidency. And our administrations are both packed to the rafters with holdovers from Richard Nixon's ethically immaculate staff and cabinet. Also: President Ford valued naps, and so do I.

He was a man forced by fate - and in my case Wall Street, Jesus, and Saudi Arabia - into the most important office in the land. He met the challenge of leading so many by listening to so few by sort of lowering his eyelids...like... so... and going somewhere... happy. Like... so. Hey, look! It's Moses wrestling cavemen!

I'm back.

As you know, the Middle East of the mid-seventies was a war-torn wasteland where Arabs and Israelis brutally fought each other, and terrorism flourished. Not that much different than today. The only difference, of course, is that we went and stuck our dick in it. So it was simpler then. Unlike now, when it's complex. Real complex. Evil and good and ancient inter-tribal power dynamics and international geopolitical consequences. But Rummy and Dick were there back then, when it was all fucked up, so they knew what they were doing. I mean, we knew what we were doing. Are doing. Um.

I remember back in 1980, when Uncle Ronnie had given my poppy a humiliating thumpin' in the primary, and was considering asking former President Ford to be his running mate. Even though he'd only been POTUS for like two years, Gerry was so freakin' deluded about his own appeal, he insisted that any Reagan/Ford ticket would result in a "Co-Presidency." Fortunately for me, my daddy was perfectly happy to be the Dutch's unquestioning lapdog, fetching coffee and attending funerals for eight years so that some day, OUR family could become an omnipotent legacy that gets to commit even more felonies in office than Tricky Dicky and the Gipper combined! (Thumbs up)

Of course, Gerry Ford's true legacy lies in his innovative and unprecedented use of the Presidential pardon to grant a "Get Out of Jail Free" card to recently-former Presidents in imminent danger of getting their prostates massaged by big, hairy cellmates named Rocko. Why do you think I chose Gerry's own Chief of Staff, Dick Cheney, to be my Vice President? I mean, I may not be the sharpest spork in the door, but I got instincts enough to cover my ass, you know? (Laughs.)

Hear that, Pelosi? Hear that, Hillary and Harry Reid? I hope so. And next week, when you're crying crocodile tears over Ford's crusty corpse, slowly putrefying in the Capitol rotunda, just remember: it's not worth even trying to impeach me - because if you do, me and Dick will just pull a Gerry, and be laughing all the way to our cushy three decade retirements playing thousands and thousands of rounds of golf, while all the other LOSER ex-Presidents waste their time helping the world's poor, AIDS-infested, tsunami-drenched TRASH. (Laughs.)

Thank you, and may God Bless Post-Ford America.

SOURCE

Comment on this Editorial


Editorial: A Bad Year for US Empire

Washington, Dec 28 (Prensa Latina)
Jim Lobe
IPS

For those who believed that the precise and overwhelming demonstration of US military power in Afghanistan and Iraq would "shock and awe" the rest of the world, 2006 was not a good year, said Jim Lobe, staff writer of IPS.

Not only has Washington become ever more bogged down -- at the current rate of nearly three billion dollars and 20 soldiers' lives a week -- in an increasingly fragmented and violent Iraq whose de facto civil war threatens to draw in its neighbours, but a resurgent Taliban has exposed the fragility of what gains have been made in Afghanistan since the U.S.-led military campaign ousted the group five years ago.

In neighbouring Pakistan, the U.S.-backed government of President Pervez Musharraf has withdrawn its forces from tribal areas along the Afghan border, effectively handing control of the region to pro-Taliban forces believed to be sheltering al Qaeda.

In Lebanon, a pro-western government, the product of last year's US-backed "Cedar Revolution", finds itself under siege from a Syrian- and Iranian-backed Hezbollah which appears to have emerged from last summer's war with Israel stronger and more confident than ever.

Meanwhile, North Korea ended its longstanding moratorium on testing its ballistic missiles on the Fourth of July, thus making its own rather defiant contribution to the fireworks traditionally associated with Washington's Independence Day celebrations. Apparently dissatisfied with Washington's appreciation, Pyongyang conducted its first nuclear test four months later.

Similarly, Iran, the other surviving member of Bush's "Axis of Evil", announced last April that it successfully enriched uranium and subsequently shrugged off US and European demands that it freeze its programme, even as it hosted a succession of leaders from the US-backed government in Baghdad and offered Washington help in stabilising Iraq provided that it dropped its "arrogant" attitude.

An increasingly assertive and energy-rich Russia has also become noticeably more defiant over the past year, challenging with growing success Washington's post-9 11 military encroachment in the Caucasus and Central Asia and effectively reversing two of the three US-backed "colour revolutions" -- in Ukraine and Kyrgyzstan -- in its near abroad.

The looming succession battle in Turkmenistan, whose natural gas endowments and strategic perch next to both Iran and Afghanistan make it a very desirable piece of real estate, will likely intensify this latest version of "Great Game".

By collaborating with China in both the UN Security Council and the Shanghai Cooperation Organisation (SCO), Moscow has also challenged the unipolarists' notion that Washington's overwhelming global military dominance would not provoke the creation of countervailing coalitions designed to contain its power.

Even in Africa, defying the U.S. came at little cost. Sudan, accused by Bush himself for two years of committing genocide in Darfur, manoeuvred Washington into backing a clearly unworkable peace accord and then, when it fell apart, not only rejected repeated US demands to permit deployment of a UN peacekeeping force to the region, but also helped spread the conflict into neighbouring Chad and Central African Republic.

In nearby Somalia, meanwhile, covert US support for a coalition of warlords, who had kept the country in a permanent state of insecurity for more than a decade, backfired big-time last summer when an Islamic militia that Washington accuses of being linked to al Qaeda chased them out of the country.

As the year ends, the US is effectively backing Ethiopia's deployment of thousands of troops in support of the disintegrating interim government in Baidoa, permitting the Islamists' to rally nationalist opinion for a war that analysts fear could burst beyond Somalia's borders.

In Latin America, Washington averted the worst -- the victory of leftwing presidential candidate Andres Manuel Lopez Obrador in Mexican elections last summer.

Nonetheless, clumsy US efforts to influence elections over the past year in Bolivia and Nicaragua proved counter-productive, as candidates backed by Venezuelan President Hugo Chavez, who appears to delight in nothing more than provoking Bush, won in both countries, as well as in Ecuador.

Coupled with Chavez' own sweeping victory earlier this month, the year's elections results in Latin America appear to have confirmed a left-wing populist and anti-US trend -- the so-called "pink tide" -- which, along with the recent disclosures regarding ties between right-wing paramilitaries and the government of Colombian President Alvaro Uribe, poses serious threats to Washington's multi-billion-dollar anti-drug effort in the Andes.

Elections elsewhere also proved disappointing to Washington's unipolar ambitions, none more so than last January's victory, despite last-minute efforts by Washington bolster the Fatah, of Hamas in the Palestinian territories.

Not only did the election set back prospects for resuming a credible Israeli-Palestinian peace process, but Bush's reaction -- to isolate rather than engage the winner, and, more recently, to actively seek in its ouster -- made clear that Washington's "freedom agenda" for the Middle East was largely rhetorical, except when aimed against hostile states like Syria or Iran.

Indeed, Hamas' victory and the growing strength and popularity of Islamist parties throughout the Arab world brought to a screeching halt U.S. pressure on friendly authoritarian governments, notably Sunni-led Saudi Arabia, Egypt, and Jordan, to implement democratic reform. Meanwhile, the administration has tried to rope them into an alliance with Israel against what Jordan's King Abdullah has referred to as the ascendant "Shia Crescent" of Iran, Syria and Hezbollah.

Of course, the most important revolt against the Bush administration's Washington's globocop aspirations took place here at home last month when voters handed Democrats control of both houses of Congress in mid-term elections in which Iraq and foreign policy, by virtually all accounts, played the decisive role.

While the warhawks predictably claimed that the results reflected more the public's lack of confidence in the way Bush had carried out policy than on the policy itself, a battery of polls in both the run-up to the election and immediately afterward found that that a large majority of citizens believe the administration's belligerent unilateralism had made the United States -- as well as the rest of the world -- less, rather than more, safe.

Nearly eight in 10 respondents in one survey sponsored by the influential Council on Foreign Relations and designed by legendary pollster Daniel Yankelovich said they thought the world saw the U.S. as "arrogant", and nearly 90 percent said such negative perceptions threaten national security.

"It's not just a matter of (wanting to be) well-loved or nice," said Yankelovich.

Whether the implications of these findings, as well as the elections results -- not to mention the foreign policy balance sheet of 2006 -- will be absorbed by Bush and his senior policy-makers in 2007, however, remains very much in doubt.

The post-election departure of two arch-unilateralists, former Pentagon chief Donald Rumsfeld and UN Amb. John Bolton, notwithstanding, nothing fires up the imperial impulse more than multiplying acts of defiance.

Original
Comment on this Editorial


Editorial: Lawyer Ends Up Dead After Taking On Rove

December 27th 2006
Kurt Nimmo

It's fishy as hell.

Paul Sanford, a prominent Aptos, California, attorney, who accused Karl Rove of treason in the Plame outing case, took a leap from the Embassy Suites Hotel in Monterey Bay on Christmas Eve. Police describe it as "probable" suicide, even though it appears Sanford was not depressed.

"Friends and associates expressed disbelief at the news of Sanford's death and that it was ruled a suicide, saying Sanford seemed happy and had made many plans for this week and in coming months. [Business associate and friend Shawn Mills] said he and Sanford recently decided to open a shared law office to serve Monterey and Santa Cruz counties, something Sanford was looking forward to doing," reports the Monterey Herald. "Mills said he had spoken to Sanford's wife, Paula, and that she also was in shock. He said Sanford, a father of two, was a devoted family man." Sanford "would never have intentionally put his family through that trauma. Something's not right, it doesn't make sense."

On July 25, 2005, in the James S. Brady Briefing Room at the White House, Sanford asked then press secretary Scott McClellan about Karl Rove, accused at the time by Joseph Wilson, the husband of Valerie Plame, of outing his wife as a CIA employee in retaliation for Wilson's op-ed published in the New York Times. Wilson criticized the citation of bogus yellowcake documents used as flimsy justification for invading Iraq and murdering more than 650,000 Iraqis.

McClellan was flummoxed by Sanford's question:

McClellan: Go ahead.

Sanford: Yes, thank you. There has been a lot of speculation concerning the meaning of the underlying statute and the grand jury investigation concerning Mr. Rove. The question is, have the legal counsel to the White House or White House staff reviewed the statute in sufficient specificity to determine whether a violation of that statute would, in effect, constitute treason?

McClellan: I think that in terms of decisions regarding the investigation, those are matters for those overseeing the investigation to decide.

Special counsel, Patrick Fitzgerald, decided not to charge Rove in the case, even though the former Donald Segretti dirty trickster understudy raised enough suspicion to warrant being called before a grand jury five times. Neocon Lewis "Scooter" Libby was charged with obstruction of justice, perjury, and making false statements to the FBI. A few weeks later, on July 13, 2006, Joseph and Valerie Wilson filed a civil suit against Cheney, Libby, Rove, and other unnamed senior White House officials, for their alleged roles in the public disclosure of her classified CIA employment.

In addition, Sanford was "a champion of the downtrodden, he represented homeless people in Santa Cruz, and fought for free speech," according to Mills. As well, he hosted a radio talk show at KOMY, an Air America affiliate, although he was not associated with the bankrupt network. Sanford and Mills also hosted the "Paul and Shawn Show" on Saturdays at the Seaside, California, radio station KRXA.

Of course, there is no evidence Paul Sanford was pushed from "at least nine floors" above the large ventilation grate where he met his fate. As well, there is no evidence he committed suicide, or did he fit the profile of a suicide. However, there is plenty of evidence Sanford was a thorn in the side of the neocons, committing the ultimate sin of accusing one particularly nasty top drawer neocon, Karl Rove, of treason.
Comment on this Editorial



Mid-East Muddle


3 Million Muslims Begin Annual Hajj

ASSOCIATED PRESS
December 28, 2006

This year's hajj takes place amid increasing worries across the Islamic world -- over the bloodshed in Iraq, violence in the Palestinian territories and a new war in Somalia.

Amid those crises, tensions have increased between the two main sects of Islam, Sunni and Shia, whose members come together in the five days of hajj rituals centered around Mecca, birthplace of Islam's Prophet Muhammad.
MOUNT ARAFAT, Saudi Arabia (AP) -- In his tent in the desert outside the holy city of Mecca, Suleiman Ibrahim still couldn't believe his luck. His wife, sitting nearby, broke down in tears of joy Thursday as he recounted the day they learned they would perform Islam's hajj pilgrimage.

''The whole family started singing and congratulating me,'' said Ibrahim, a furniture maker from the southern Egyptian city of Sohag who was one of tens of thousands of Egyptians picked in a government lottery to make the pilgrimage.

''Hamdiya cried then, too,'' the 45-year-old said, nodding to his wife.

Ibrahim was among nearly 3 million Muslims from around the world who massed in tent cities on the outskirts of Mecca on Thursday for the start of the annual hajj. For many, it is a once in a lifetime chance to cleanse their sins in one of the most important rites of Islam.

This year's hajj takes place amid increasing worries across the Islamic world -- over the bloodshed in Iraq, violence in the Palestinian territories and a new war in Somalia.

Amid those crises, tensions have increased between the two main sects of Islam, Sunni and Shia, whose members come together in the five days of hajj rituals centered around Mecca, birthplace of Islam's Prophet Muhammad.

''We will not allow sectarian tensions from any party during the hajj season,'' Saudi Arabia's interior minister, Prince Nayef bin Abdulaziz, told reporters ahead of the rituals.

The Islamic affairs minister, Sheik Salih bin Abdulaziz, stressed that point Thursday, telling pilgrims: ''The pilgrimage is not a place for raising political banners ... or slogans that divide Muslims, whom God has ordered to be unified.''

But for most pilgrims the top concern was faith, not politics.

On Thursday morning, hundreds of thousands opened their pilgrimage in Mecca by circling Islam's holiest site, the Kaaba, the black cubic stone that Muslims face when they perform their daily prayers.

''For us it is a vacation away from work and daily life to renew yourself spiritually,'' said Ahmed Karkoutly, an American physician from Brownsville, Texas. ''You feel you are part of a universe fulfilling God's will. It's a cosmic motion, orbiting the Kaaba.''

Pilgrims filled the streets surrounding the Kaaba, some prostrating in prayer, others browsing outdoor markets to buy perfumes, fabrics, prayer beads and other souvenirs. In gleaming malls overlooking the Kaaba, pilgrims visited stores like the Body Shop or lined up at the Cinnabon.

The crowds then streamed into the tent cities set up outside town, wearing seamless white robes symbolizing the equality of mankind under God and chanting, ''Labbeik, allahum, labbeik'' -- Arabic for ''I am here, Lord.''

The heartier ones walked, carrying food, water and luggage. Others packed into buses and minibuses, some riding on the roof alongside baggage, as vehicles jammed highways in the hajj's annual epic of traffic control.

Most pilgrims went to Mina, a region in a desert valley 8 miles from Mecca. Ibrahim and tens of thousands of others went directly to Mount Arafat, where all pilgrims will gather Friday for the first major ritual of the pilgrimage.

Much of the day was spent settling into tents, with people from each Muslim country getting their own section of the sprawling temporary city.

''I've been hoping my whole life to be able to make this journey. Four times I didn't make the lottery, but this time God smiled on me,'' Ibrahim said, sitting on a foam mattress among suitcases.

In his tent, three fellow Egyptians debated the proper way to perform the complicated rituals. ''Ask Sheik Hassan, he'll know,'' one of them said, and another quickly called the cleric traveling with their group on his mobile phone.

Some pilgrims climbed a hill on the edge of the tent city to pray at the top. Indonesian women helped each other clamber up the rocks. A Syrian woman wept as she held up her hands, praying for an ill relative. A crowd of Libyans chanted: ''We have sinned, Lord. You are our heart, keep us from sin.''

Saudi authorities estimate nearly 3 million pilgrims are attending this year's hajj. More than 1.6 million come from abroad. The rest are Saudis or foreigners who live in the kingdom.

More than 30,000 police and other security officers fanned out around the holy sites to help smooth pedestrian traffic in hopes of avoiding the deadly stampedes that have marred previous pilgrimages.

A stampede last year killed more than 360 people at Mina during a ritual symbolizing the stoning of the devil. The rush began when some pilgrims stumbled over luggage.

Saudi Arabia spent more than $1 billion over the past year to renovate the stoning site, where the crowds hurl stones at three stone walls symbolizing the devil.

After last year's stampede, the huge platform on which pilgrims stood to throw rocks was torn down and replaced by one with more exit and entrance ramps. In the coming years, the complex will be expanded to offer multiple levels for the stoning.

On Friday, pilgrims will spend the day and night in prayer and meditation at Mount Arafat, the site where Muhammad gave his final sermon in 632. They then return to Mina for the stoning ritual.



Comment on this Article


Holocaust Deniers and the Iraq Study Group

By Mazin Qumsiyeh
PalestineChronicle.com
20 Dec 06

The horrors of what happened in Europe as a result of 19th century nationalism fed the ethnocentric nationalism known as Zionism, and was used to justify the ethnic cleansing and destruction of Palestinian society.

As a Palestinian-American, I am appalled that many people meeting in Teheran claim to support Palestine while denying or trying to minimize Jewish suffering. Few at the conference articulated that the Holocaust did happen, was horrendous, and it needn't be denied in order to support Palestinian human rights or to oppose Zionism (throughout I refer to political Zionism not cultural Zionism).

This is not surprising, considering that Zionists constantly and intentionally conflate Zionism with Judaism. This is accomplished in many ways, using Jewish symbols for Israel, choosing a national anthem that speaks of Jewish yearning (even though 20% of the population is not Jewish), emphasizing Israel as a Jewish state, speaking of "the Jewish people" as united in support of Israel, even though most Jews are not Zionists, and countless other ways.

But to me the most dangerous Zionist myth that contributes to anti-Jewish ranting in Teheran and beyond is that political Zionism is the defender and protector of Jews against a hostile (gentile) world. The truth is otherwise, and is now well documented in declassified archives, in Zionist archives, in letters and books, and it is rather "inconvenient" (to put it mildly) to political Zionists.

In 'Mein Kampf', the only Jews admired were the Zionists. Hitler called it a "great movement out of Vienna" that helped him dispel the doubts he had as to whether Judaism simply represented another religion or was a nationality (and thus did not belong in Europe). After the 1935 Nazi racial laws were introduced, the Zionist Federation of Germany was the only Jewish group allowed to function, with offices open in Berlin until 1942. This is not surprising, considering that they (ZFG) wrote to the new Nazi regime that "Zionism believes that a rebirth of national life, such as is occurring in German life through adhesion to Christian and national values, must also take place in the Jewish national group".

Edwin Black's book "The Transfer Agreement: The Dramatic Story of the Pact Between the Third Reich and Jewish Palestine" is an eye opener on the tragic practical results of this convergence of these two segregationist ideologies. In the US, a powerful Zionist lobby scuttled efforts to bring Jewish refugees from WWII; this is documented in books by Jewish leaders and intellectuals like Alfred Lilienthal and Morris Ernst.

The future first Israeli Prime Minister, David Ben-Gurion, rejected plans to save Jewish children, telling a meeting of Labor Zionist leaders on 7 Dec. 1938: "If I knew that it would be possible to save all the children in Germany by bringing them over to England, and only half of them by transporting them to Eretz Yisrael, then I would opt for the second alternative. For we must weigh not only the life of these children, but also the history of the People of Israel." Iraqi Jew (and ex-Zionist) Naiem Giladi exposed this and other of Ben Gurion's scandals in a book by that title. (e.g. Zionist underground forces bombed Jewish targets in Baghdad to achieve Zionist objectives of driving Jews to Israel).

Sigmund Freud wrote a letter rejecting putting his name in support of the Zionist project on psychological grounds: "Whoever wants to influence the masses must give them something rousing and inflammatory and my sober judgment of Zionism does not permit this... It would have seemed more sensible to me to establish a Jewish homeland on a less historically-burdened land. But I know that such a rational viewpoint would never have gained the enthusiasm of the masses and the financial support of the wealthy. I concede with sorrow that the baseless fanaticism of our people is in part to be blamed for the awakening of Arab distrust."

In a letter published December 1948 in NY Times by Alfred Einstein and 26 other leading American Jews we read: "The discrepancies between the bold claims now being made by Begin and his party, and their record of past performance in Palestine bear the imprint of no ordinary political party. This is the unmistakable stamp of a Fascist party for whom terrorism (against Jews, Arabs, and British alike), and misrepresentation are means, and a "Leader State" is the goal." Begin went on to become Israeli Prime Minister and his party morphed into the Likud, and its allies in the US became the neoconservatives who pushed for the war on Iraq.

The horrors of what happened in Europe as a result of 19th century nationalism fed the ethnocentric nationalism known as Zionism, and was used to justify the ethnic cleansing and destruction of Palestinian society. It is now destabilizing Western Asia and encouraging other narrow chauvinistic ideologies (e.g. Bin Laden's Pan-Islamic nationalism mirroring Zionism by claiming to represent members of a particular religion wherever they live).

The Iraq study group report recognized the centrality of the Israel/Palestine question to the spiraling mayhem and loss of US credibility, but failed to suggest the only change that would make a difference: a shift in US foreign policy goals and strategy to promote human rights and International law. The latter four words are ironically missing from both the "Road Map to Peace in the Middle East" and the "Report of the Iraq Study Group."

-Qumsiyeh is author of "Sharing the Land of Canaan: Human Rights and the Israeli/Palestinian Struggle". He served on the faculties of Duke and Yale Universities.

References/Books


Edwin Black, The Transfer Agreement: The Dramatic Story of the Pact Between the Third Reich and Jewish Palestine (New York : Carroll & Graf, 2001).

Lenni Brenner, 51 Documents: Zionist Collaboration with the Nazis (Barricade
Books, 2002)

Lenni Brenner, The Iron Wall: Zionist Revisionism from Jabotinsky to Shamir (London: Zed Books, 1984).

Marc H. Ellis, Israel and Palestine: Out of the Ashes, (London: Pluto Press, 2003).

Naeim Giladi , Ben Gurion's Scandals (Flushing: Glilit Pub. Co., 1995).

Alfred M. Lilienthal, What Price Israel (IPS Reprint edition, 1969)

Tom Segev with Haim Watzman (Translator) The Seventh Million: The Israelis and the Holocaust, (New York: Owl Books, 2000).

Rabbi Moshe Shonfeld, The Holocaust Victims Accuse, Neturei Karta, USA, New York, 1977.

Other


Freud's Letter to Dr. Chaim Koffler Keren HaYassod, Vienna: 26 February 1930; posted at the Freud Institute in UK website: www.freud.org.uk./arab-israeli.html.

June 21, 1933 memo from The Zionist Federation of Germany, reprinted in Brenner, 51 Documents, p. 43.

Translated from German by Dr. D. S. Blondheim, Federation of American Zionists, 1916, Essential Texts of Zionism; Jewish Virtual Library
www.us-israel.org/jsource/Zionism/pinsker.html

Adolf Hitler, Mein Kampf, Reissue edition (Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 1998), p. 56.



Comment on this Article


Feds apologize for strip-search of Muslim woman stopped at Tampa airport

Associated Press
December 28 2006

TAMPA -- The Homeland Security Department apologized to a Muslim woman who was detained at Tampa International Airport in April and strip searched at a county jail.

Safana Jawad, 45, a Spanish citizen who was born in Iraq, was detained on April 11 because of a suspected tie to a suspicious person, authorities said. Jawad was taken to jail, strip searched and held for two days before being deported to England.

Jawad filed a complaint and the agency apologized on Dec. 8.

"On behalf of the Department of Homeland Security, I offer you my sincere apology for having to undergo a strip search,'' wrote Timothy J. Keefer, acting chief counsel for the department's Office for Civil Rights and Civil Liberties.
The agency declined to release the name of the suspicious person they associated with Jawad.

Department spokeswoman Joanna Gonzalez said it is standard practice to send a response letter to someone who complains. She said the agency does not track the number of apologies it issues. A Pinellas County jail internal investigation cleared deputies of wrongdoing.

"We followed the same protocol with her as with any inmate,'' Sgt. Jim Bordner said.

Jawad was traveling to Clearwater to visit her 16-year-old son, who lived with her ex-husband, Ahmad Maki Kubba. Kubba, an Iraqi exile and American citizen for 27 years, was praised last year by Gov. Jeb. Bush for organizing a group to vote in Iraq's election.

Kubba said his ex-wife's detention prompted his son to move to Spain.

"I lost my son because of what happened,'' Kubba said. "My son wanted to be in the U.S. Navy, and he speaks both English and Arabic. He would have been just what they are looking for. What they did to Jawad was unfair and is hurting America.''




Comment on this Article


200 trailers placed in West Bank outposts since June

13:31 29/12/2006
By Amos Harel, Haaretz Correspondent and The Associated Press

Settlers are continuing to place mobile homes and trailers in West Bank outposts and settlements, without legal permits. Civil Administration reports show that since the start of the second Lebanon war in July, some 200 mobile homes have been placed. This is a substantial increase over the few dozen trailers placed in the first half of the year.

Both the Israel Defefense Forces' office in charge of the West Bank and the settlement watchdog group Peace Now disputed the claims.

Civil Administration spokesman Shlomo Dror said "there were attempts to transfer trailers, but except for one or two we managed to stop it."
Dror Etkes, who monitors settlement activity for Peace Now, said he was "surprised" by the report, and wasn't aware of any large
movement of trailers over the past six months.

"This doesn't match what I know about what's been going on in the West Bank in recent months," Etkes said.

Despite declarations by Prime Minister Ehud Olmert and Defense Minister Amir Peretz, there has been apparently no progress toward dismantling outposts.

Since the beginning of the month, nearly 90 trailers were placed illegally in the West Bank. A Defense Ministry aerial survey found new mobile homes in illegal outposts such as Givat Assaf, near Beit El, and Amona, near Ofra. Some of the new mobile homes were also placed in veteran settlements.

The Yesha Council of settlements says the number is lower than the 200 stated by the Civil Administration and that most of the buildings spotted in the latest aerial survey were simply never identified before.

The red tape and foot dragging in dismantling outposts is creating a legal tangle as demolition orders expire, which will further delay the eventual resumption of evacuation procedures.

Construction celebration

Peretz was accorded an extraordinary honor on Thursday when The New York Times devoted a front-page headline to his activities. The newspaper drew attention to Peretz' authorization to populate the abandoned outpost Maskiot in the Jordan Valley, and construct 30 new houses there for Gush Katif evacuees. The NYT expressed restrained astonishment at the move, which came just a few days after Olmert promised a gesture to the Palestinians. The paper noted this would be the first Jewish settlement to be built in the territories in the past 10 years, and that it comes with the authorization of a minister considered a political dove.

These flaws are also manifested in Israel's commitment to ease conditions for the Palestinians and in the government's approach to violations of the Gaza truce. The defense minister is finding it difficult to leave his mark on the system he heads. He is being manipulated by the army, which is not showing him much respect in return.

Immediately upon taking up his position this May, the defense minister said taking down the illegal outposts would be a central issue during his term. On his first visit to the Central Command, he promised to deal firmly with outpost inhabitants who attacked their Palestinian neighbors. In other declarations that month, he committed himself to re-examining the construction policy in the territories and ordered preparations for the first outpost evacuations. In June, the Nahal Brigade trained to evacuate settlers from Havat Maon. The abduction of Gilad Shalit at the end of June and the outbreak of the Lebanon war two weeks later shelved the plans and took the outposts off the agenda. Ever since the end of the war, there has been a building celebration in the West Bank. Civil Administration reports have been piling up on the minister's desk: The 10 mobile homes placed in June rose to about 50 in October and 90 this past month.

Comment: Coincidence? We think not.


Ostensibly, the Israel Defense Forces are preparing for an evacuation. From time to time Peretz's bureau issues soothing releases to the left, stating the minister is determined to take down outposts. However, even Peretz knows this is no longer expected to happen. The prime minister told the Italian media two weeks ago that the political situation does not currently enable the evacuation of outposts.

The army has yet to present the minister with evacuation plans. When Peretz expresses a desire for progress, the IDF responds that conditions are not yet ripe. The excuses change: the scars of the war in the north, then the olive harvest and finally Hanukkah and Christmas.

Peretz, hoping to avoid a forced evacuation, tried to establish a secret channel with the settler leadership. Yesha heads Bentzi Lieberman, Pinhas Wallerstein and Ze'ev Hever showed up for some non-committal conversations at the Defense Ministry, but meanwhile the settlers leaked news of the channel's existence. Meanwhile, Peretz's bureau discovered late that the prime minister has a channel of his own with the Yesha Council. MK Otniel Schneller (Kadima), himself a settler, discussed an arrangement with Yesha heads whereby 26 outposts would become part of nearby settlements.

Wallerstein and Hever come to the Defense Ministry, gossip a bit with the officials, gather information about the army's intentions for them and refuse to commit to anything. The real negotiations are going on in Schneller's channel. Peretz's associates don't have the slightest clue about these negotiations, and Olmert's bureau is denying any connection.

Easements any minute

The defense establishment zigzagged this week regarding easing conditions in the territories. The "Peretz plan" for easements is in fact the Spiegel plan, and was formulated by a former aide to the defense minister, Brigadier general (Res.) Baruch Spiegel. The original document is dated November 29, 2005.

The plan calls for the dismantling of 49 dirt barriers, among them a few permanent roadblocks. It was translated into English and won enthusiasm from the American administration. Then, GOC Central Command Yair Naveh convinced Chief of Staff Dan Halutz to block it. As an alternative, Naveh proposed creating a separate road system for Palestinian traffic in the West Bank. The price is in dispute. Naveh is talking about approximately NIS 40 million. Defense Ministry sources are convinced his plan would cost at least NIS 150 million, making it unfeasible.

In the meantime, Peretz has replaced Shaul Mofaz as defense minister, and the whole matter has been neglected. In recent months, Peretz's political aide Hagai Alon - who replaces Spiegel as "assistant for matters concerning the Palestinian fabric of life" next week - has been trying to breathe life into the barrier plan. The army refused to cooperate, and even refused to send officers to meetings on the issue. Then, in the wake of the meeting between Olmert and Palestinian Authority Chairman Mahmoud Abbas, the urgent need for gestures cropped up, and the dust was shaken off the Spiegel plan.

Deputy Defense Minister Ephraim Sneh helped persuade Peretz to adopt the plan. Over the course of several meetings this Monday, Peretz accepted the plan, then accepted Naveh's reservations, and in the end, after a stormy discussion with Sneh, returned to his assistants' position. On Tuesday Olmert agreed with Peretz. The army was given a week to submit reservations. If there is no interference from the weather - or a suicide bomber - the barriers will begin disappearing next week. It is still but a drop in the bucket.

Yair Naveh, who this week determinedly and persuasively opposed Sneh, is a key figure in this story. The GOC is the father of the "separation" system, through which Palestinian movement in the West Bank has been severely limited over the past two years. In effect, Israel has cut off almost all movement between the northern, central and southern West Bank and between Samaria and the Jordan Valley. The move stemmed from an operational constraint: The IDF was having difficulty dealing with the Islamic Jihad network in Jenin and Tul Karm, which was sending suicide bombers across the Green Line.

In this context, the general provided the settlers with dozens of roads nearly devoid of Palestinian traffic. Taken along with about 600 barricades and dirt barriers scattered throughout the West Bank, very often without coordination among the various brigade sectors, insufferable restrictions on Palestinian civilians resulted. But Naveh says his primary and main responsibility is preventing the murder of Jews. Given the general consternation over the failure in Lebanon, the IDF perceives the Central Command as the only contractor of success. The terror threat in its sector is "contained" - that is to say, usually blocked before it reaches Tel Aviv - the system is functioning well, and it spares the chief of staff superfluous headaches.

The bottom line: As always, the field dictates the policy. Barricades may be taken down, but a new warning will quickly bring them back, and only the inhabitants of nearby Palestinian villages will know. The sergeants commanding the barriers, the brigade commanders and the major generals are more influential than any deputy minister or assistant sitting in Tel Aviv.



Comment on this Article


7 Qassam rockets land in open areas in west Negev; no injuries

By Mijal Grinberg, Haaretz Correspondent and Haaretz Service

Palestinian militants in the Gaza Strip on Friday fired Seven Qassam rocket at the western Negev, all of which landed in open fields. There were no injuries or damages reported in the incidents.

Three rockets were fired at Israel on Thursday, two of which landed in an open field south of Ashkelon. A third rocket landed in an open area near the western Negev town of Sderot. There were no injuries or damages in any of the attacks.
President Moshe Katsav met with victims of Qassam attacks and Gush Katif evacuees on a visit to Ashkelon on Thursday. He also toured the strategic facilities in the city which have come under rocket attacks in recent days.

The president also met with the family of Sderot resident Adir Bassad, 14, who was critically wounded in a rocket attack on the city on Tuesday. The teen's mother said her son's condition had improved and that he had begun speaking again Thursday.

Prime Minister Ehud Olmert gave the Israel Defense Forces permission on Wednesday to attack rocket-launching cells in the Gaza Strip as long as they are identified shortly before the launching, but the Prime Minister's Office said the Israeli commitment to the cease-fire in Gaza still stands.

His decision to authorize only pinpoint operations while generally upholding a policy of restraint raised ire among senior IDF officers Thursday who argued that that the only effective way to curb rocket attacks was to send forces into the northern Gaza Strip.



Comment on this Article


Flashback: Killing children is no longer a big deal

Gideon Levy
17/10/2006

More than 30 Palestinian children were killed in the first two weeks of Operation Days of Penitence in the Gaza Strip. It's no wonder that many people term such wholesale killing of children "terror." Whereas in the overall count of all the victims of the intifada the ratio is three Palestinians killed for every Israeli killed, when it comes to children the ratio is 5:1. According to B'Tselem, the human rights organization, even before the current operation in Gaza, 557 Palestinian minors (below the age of 18) were killed, compared to 110 Israeli minors.

Palestinian human rights groups speak of even higher numbers: 598 Palestinian children killed (up to age 17), according to the Palestinian Human Rights Monitoring Group, and 828 killed (up to age 18) according to the Red Crescent. Take note of the ages, too. According to B'Tselem, whose data are updated until about a month ago, 42 of the children who have been killed were 10; 20 were seven; and eight were two years old when they died. The youngest victims are 13 newborn infants who died at checkpoints during birth.
With horrific statistics like this, the question of who is a terrorist should have long since become very burdensome for every Israeli. Yet it is not on the public agenda. Child killers are always the Palestinians, the soldiers always only defend us and themselves, and the hell with the statistics.

The plain fact, which must be stated clearly, is that the blood of hundreds of Palestinian children is on our hands.
No tortuous explanation by the IDF Spokesman's Office or by the military correspondents about the dangers posed to soldiers by the children, and no dubious excuse by the public relations people in the Foreign Ministry about how the Palestinians are making use of children will change that fact. An army that kills so many children is an army with no restraints, an army that has lost its moral code.

As MK Ahmed Tibi (Hadash) said, in a particularly emotional speech in the Knesset, it is no longer possible to claim that all these children were killed by mistake. An army doesn't make more than 500 day-to-day mistakes of identity. No, this is not a mistake but the disastrous result of a policy driven mainly by an appallingly light trigger finger and by the dehumanization of the Palestinians. Shooting at everything that moves, including children, has become normative behavior. Even the momentary mini-furor that erupted over the "confirming of the killing" of a 13-year-old girl, Iman Alhamas, did not revolve around the true question. The scandal should have been generated by the very act of the killing itself, not only by what followed.

Iman was not the only one. Mohammed Aaraj was eating a sandwich in front of his house, the last house before the cemetery of the Balata refugee camp, in Nablus, when a soldier shot him to death at fairly close range. He was six at the time of his death. Kristen Saada was in her parents' car, on the way home from a family visit, when soldiers sprayed the car with bullets. She was 12 at the time of her death. The brothers Jamil and Ahmed Abu Aziz were riding their bicycles in full daylight, on their way to buy sweets, when they sustained a direct hit from a shell fired by an Israeli tank crew. Jamil was 13, Ahmed six, at the time of their deaths.

Muatez Amudi and Subah Subah were killed by a soldier who was standing in the village square in Burkin and fired every which way in the wake of stone-throwing. Radir Mohammed from Khan Yunis refugee camp was in a school classroom when soldiers shot her to death. She was 12 when she died. All of them were innocent of wrongdoing and were killed by soldiers acting in our name.

At least in some of these cases it was clear to the soldiers that they were shooting at children, but that didn't stop them.
Palestinian children have no refuge: mortal danger lurks for them in their homes, in their schools and on their streets. Not one of the hundreds of children who have been killed deserved to die, and the responsibility for their killing cannot remain anonymous. Thus the message is conveyed to the soldiers: it's no tragedy to kill children and none of you is guilty.

Death is, of course, the most acute danger that confronts a Palestinian child, but it is not the only one. According to data of the Palestinian Ministry of Education, 3,409 schoolchildren have been wounded in the intifada, some of them crippled for life. The childhood of tens of thousands of Palestinian youngsters is being lived from one trauma to the next, from horror to horror. Their homes are demolished, their parents are humiliated in front of their eyes, soldiers storm into their homes brutally in the middle of the night, tanks open fire on their classrooms. And they don't have a psychological service. Have you ever heard of a Palestinian child who is a "victim of anxiety"?

The public indifference that accompanies this pageant of unrelieved suffering makes all Israelis accomplices to a crime. Even parents, who understand what anxiety for a child's fate means, turn away and don't want to hear about the anxiety harbored by the parent on the other side of the fence. Who would have believed that Israeli soldiers would kill hundreds of children and that the majority of Israelis would remain silent? Even the Palestinian children have become part of the dehumanization campaign: killing hundreds of them is no longer a big deal.



Comment on this Article


Foreign Minister's meeting with Fatah leaders angers Olmert

By Aluf Benn, Haaretz Correspondent
09:18 29/12/2006

Prime Minister Ehud Olmert reacted angrily Thursday to reports about Foreign Minister Tzipi Livni's diplomatic initiative and her meetings with Palestinian leaders.

Livni met Fatah leaders Yasser Abed Rabbo and Salam Fayyad earlier this week and outlined her plan to negotiate with moderate Palestinians and shape the future of the peace process. She advocates an Israeli pullout from the West Bank east of the separation fence and the establishment of a Palestinian state - which would also be the solution to the Palestinian refugee problem - in the evacuated area.

Livni did not brief Olmert about her meeting with the Palestinians, and it is not clear whether he heard about it from intelligence sources.
But despite his anger, Olmert decided not to confront Livni, so as to avoid a crisis in their relations like the one that erupted between himself and Defense Minister Amir Peretz after the latter's telephone conversation with Palestinian Authority Chairman Mahmoud Abbas.

Olmert's aides said that Livni had met unimportant figures.

Livni said that she believes it is her duty to examine ideas about the peace process with Palestinian and other Arab leaders, in order to know "what there is to talk about."

She refrained from broaching the Jerusalem issue or suggesting discussions on a final-status arrangement.



Comment on this Article


Fatah Lebanon chief: Hezbollah curbed our attacks on Israel

08:28 29/12/2006By Avi Issacharoff, Haaretz Correspondent, Haaretz Service and The Associated Press

Fatah secretary general in Lebanon Sultan Abu al-Einin said Thursday that four attempted attacks by the group near the Israeli border have been curbed by Hezbollah.

In an interview with the Nazareth-based newspaper Kul al-Arab, al-Einin said that in some of the incidents Hezbollah operatives detained the Palestinian militants sent to carry out the attacks and handed them over the Lebanese law-enforcement authorities.

United States Senator Arlen Specter said Thursday that Syrian President Bashar Assad denied accusations he is supporting Hamas and Hezbollah.
Spector told Channel 10 TV that Assad made the comments during their meeting in Damascus on Tuesday.

According to Specter, the Syrian president said: "If I know of one Syrian who is transferring weapons to Hezbollah - I will make sure to stop it."

When the senator asked Assad if he would be willing to exert his influence over the militant groups in the context of a peace agreement with Israel, the Syrian president responded that he would.

Specter and Assad also discussed peace negotiations with Israel. The senator said Assad asked to convey a message from him to Prime Minister Ehud Olmert, asking him to tell the prime minister that "Syria is interested in peace negotiations with Israel."

But when pressed about whether there Assad had set any preconditions for the talks, Specter said "it got to be a little fuzzy." He said Israel would have to judge whether the offer was serious.

The Prime Minister's Office denied the senator conveyed a message from Assad, saying that Specter only presented his notes from the meeting with the Syrian president.

Roughly one and a half weeks ago, the Arabic-language satellite TV station "Al Arabiya" reported that Assad had sent a similar message to Olmert through German mediators.

According to the report, Assad promised to prevent the Damascus-based Hamas leadership from conveying instructions to Hamas leaders in the territories and prevent arms transfers to Hezbollah through Syria, in exchange for the renewal of peace talks.

While both Assad and Olmert denied the reports, this time it is the messenger himself who is confirming the message was conveyed.

Olmert said Thursday that he is open to "any murmur of peace" from Israel's neighbors.

In a speech to graduates of the air force pilot's course at a base in southern Israel, Olmert indicated he is softening his opposition. "The state of Israel is open to any murmur of peace from our neighbors and across our borders," he said.

"If our enemies genuinely want peace, they will find in us a fair partner, determined to establish relations of peace, friendship and reciprocity," he added.

Olmert's spokeswoman Miri Eisin, however, played down the comments. "He has constantly said that if we see anything different, a glimpse of change, then that would be interesting and could make a difference," she said.

However, Syria continues to support Israel's staunchest enemies - including Hamas and Islamic Jihad, as well as Hezbollah guerrillas in Lebanon, she added



Comment on this Article


Israel Won't Free Palestinian Prisoners

By AMY TEIBEL
Associated Press
29 Dec 06

JERUSALEM - Israel has rebuffed Palestinian President Mahmoud Abbas' request to free Palestinian prisoners ahead of a major Muslim holiday, insisting that Palestinian militants first agree to release a captured Israeli soldier.

The decision was at odds with recent overtures by Prime Minister Ehud Olmert to bolster the moderate Abbas in the eyes of the Palestinian people, who voted the militantly anti-Israel Hamas group into power nearly one year ago.
Separately, the Yediot Ahronot newspaper reported that Olmert was prepared to hold back-channel talks on a blueprint for a final peace deal, as Abbas has proposed. Olmert spokeswoman Miri Eisin had no comment on the report.

The estimated 8,000 Palestinian prisoners held in Israeli jails enjoy iconic status in Palestinian society, and Israel usually frees a small number at Muslim holiday time in a goodwill gesture. Last week, at their first official meeting, Abbas asked Olmert to do the same before the Eid al-Adha holiday, which begins on Saturday.

Olmert said he would consider it, Abbas aide Saeb Erekat said, but just hours before the Muslim holiday and the Jewish Sabbath were to begin, no release had been announced. "Right now, it's not on the agenda,'' so long as Cpl. Gilad Shalit remains in captivity, Eisin said.

Erekat interpreted Olmert's reluctance to mean he was unwilling to risk the wrath of Israeli public opinion by releasing Palestinian prisoners without assuring Hamas-linked militants would free Shalit, seized in a June 25 cross-border raid.

"It's unfortunate,'' Erekat said of the decision, adding that it would hurt Abbas' standing.

Olmert has said repeatedly since Shalit's capture that he would not free Palestinians before the soldier was released.

One of the Hamas-linked groups holding Shalit said Thursday that progress has been made toward a prisoner exchange, and media reports cited Prime Minister Ismail Haniyeh of Hamas as saying the soldier would be released soon. But neither said when a swap might take place, and such claims of progress have been made in the past.

In their landmark meeting on Saturday, Olmert agreed to ease restrictions on Palestinian travel in the West Bank and to release $100 million in frozen funds to the Palestinian Authority - moves that prompted outcries among hard-liners in Israel. Releasing prisoners before Shalit was freed would likely have angered Olmert's opponents even further.

"I think that a gesture that in normal times is accepted at holiday time must not happen today because it would be misinterpreted,'' Israeli Cabinet minister Zeev Boim told Israel Radio.

Shalit's father, Noam, who has been critical of the Israeli government's conduct regarding his son, said he advocated a pre-holiday release of Palestinian prisoners.

"I thought it might generate some positive momentum toward a final deal to free Gilad and other prisoners,'' he told Israel Radio.

In a letter in Arabic that appeared Friday in an East Jerusalem newspaper, Al-Quds, Shalit's parents assured their son they were doing everything to win his release and appealed to his captors to treat him well.

With regard to the peace talks, Yediot said Olmert had no intention of abandoning the internationally backed "road map'' peace plan that Israel and the Palestinians agreed to in June 2003. The plan, which calls for the establishment of a Palestinian state alongside Israel, stalled shortly after it was presented.

In Egypt on Wednesday, Abbas said he'd like the two sides to start closed-door talks on some of their most intractable disputes, including final borders, the status of Jerusalem and the fate of Palestinian refugees. He said he proposed such backdoor negotiations to Olmert at their weekend meeting, and that the Israeli leader promised to consider the suggestion.

Abbas did not spell out why he sought backdoor talks. But as one of the architects of the 1993 Oslo peace accord between Israel and the Palestinians, negotiated secretly, he is known to champion quiet, informal diplomacy.

Palestinian militants, meanwhile, fired eight rockets at Israel on Friday, the highest number in a single day since a Nov. 26 truce went into effect. On Wednesday, Olmert ordered the military to attack rocket squads, abandoning the policy of restraint it had adopted since the cease-fire.

So far, Israel, which waged a five-month campaign against rocket squads before the truce took hold, has not carried out any attacks.



Comment on this Article


Killing of Palestinians triples

29/12/2006
Al-Jazeerah

From January to December 2006, the Israeli military killed 655 Palestinians in the West Bank and Gaza, according to the Israeli human rights group B'Tselem - a huge rise on last year.

The defining moment was the kidnapping of an Israeli soldier, Gilad Shalit, on June 26, after which the number of Palestinian civilians killed increased greatly.

Sarit Michaeli, communications director of B'Tselem, said: "Following the kidnapping of Corporal Shalit, Israel staged several operations inside Gaza where Israeli forces killed 405 Palestinians over six months."

Over the same period, violations against Israeli civilians dropped considerably
One issue relating to the rise in the number of Palestinians killed has been the increased Israeli military activity against Qassam rockets fired from the Palestinian territories.

"Of the number of Palestinians killed during 2006, over half weren't participating in any hostile activity at all," Michaeli said.

"The number of Palestinian deaths, in total, went up by over three times."

Israeli rocket fire

"Most Palestinians were killed during military operations, of which Israeli military fire, attempting to hit Qassam rocket launchers in the territories, ends up killing civilians," Michaeli said.

Production of Qassam rockets began in September 2001, after the outbreak of the al-Aqsa intifada.

Michaeli also said: "There have been a couple of concrete cases where Israel attempted to assassinate Palestinian leaders, but ended up killing civilians.

"When a rocket hits an area, civilians naturally rush in to help the victims of the first missile, but end up dead from the second missile strike."

Disproportionate force

In the West bank, B'Tselem documents that many Palestinians have been killed by disproportionate force.

"Where Israeli soldiers are saying they're undertaking targeted killings, they are actually using lethal force against non-combatants," Michaeli said.

Israeli offensives increased in June [EPA]
"Israeli soldiers have killed people that present no danger to them. A 28-year-old labourer in the West Bank was shot dead while working his trade, for example.

"In Nablus, a group of children were throwing stones at Israeli tanks, and a group of soldiers shot directly at them. These are not primarily combat situations."

Attacks against non-combatants represent a clear contravention of international humanitarian law, he said.

Decline in Israeli deaths

The number of Israeli civilians killed by Palestinians so far this year was 17. Last year the number was 41

"This has more than halved for a number of reasons," Michaeli said.

Factors included "disengagement from Gaza in August, the evacuation of settlers, the separation barrier, and the fact that that Israelis have developed a greater capacity for thwarting suicide attacks", he said.

Air strike phenomenon

A new phenomenon in Gaza this year was the demolition of homes from the air. About 80 homes were demolished using this method.

Israel demolished 292 houses during military operations in the territories, 279 of which were in the Gaza Strip. These were home to 1,769 people.

"Of the number of Palestinians killed during 2006, over half weren't participating in any hostile activity at all"

"Israel tries to justify these attacks by saying that these houses are military targets," Michaeli said. "That there are weapons there, or attacks being planned there.

"But concrete evidence isn't given due to fears of compromising intelligence."

As of last month, Israel held 9,075 Palestinians, including 345 minors, in custody. Of these, 738 (22 minors) were held in administrative detention without trial and without knowing the charges against them.



Comment on this Article


U.S. forces release Iranian diplomats in Iraq

Reuters
29 Dec 06

TEHRAN (Reuters) - Two Iranian diplomats detained in Iraq last week by U.S. forces have been released, the official Iranian news agency IRNA reported on Friday.

U.S. officials had said the diplomats were seized in raids directed at Iranians suspected of planning attacks on Iraqi security forces. Iran's foreign ministry saidd on Monday that the diplomats had been invited by the Iraqi government.

IRNA reported that the two Iranian diplomats were handed to the Iranian embassy in Baghdad on Friday morning.
"The American forces admitted, despite their initial denial, they had detained Iranian diplomats and pressure from the Iraqi government for their release fortunately bore result," IRNA quoted Hassan Kazemi-Qomi, Iran's ambassador to Baghdad, as saying.

The State Department said last week that "a small number" of Iranian diplomats were among those initially detained in the raids, but that they were turned over to Iraqi authorities and released.

A U.S. official had said that the arrest validated U.S. assertions about "Iranian meddling" in Iraq.

U.S. officials have long accused Iran of interfering in Iraq's affairs. Iran denies this, saying Iraq's security is in line with Iran's interests.

© Reuters 2006. All Rights Reserved.



Comment on this Article


Iran defense industry unharmed by sanctions: minister

Reuters
29 Dec 06

TEHRAN (Reuters) - Defense Minister Mostafa Mohammad Najjar on Friday dismissed U.N. sanctions imposed on Iran as "psychological warfare" and suggested they would not affect Iran's missile production capability.

The U.N. Security Council banned Iran from importing or exporting sensitive nuclear materials and technology as well as ballistic missile delivery systems in a move aimed at stopping it from nuclear enrichment activities that can be used in nuclear weapons.

"We see these sanctions as a psychological warfare that will have no effect on the output of Iran's defense industries," Najjar said in an interview with state television.
"We produce several items of defense industries in various fields. They are all indigenous and need no (assistance from) abroad," he added.

Najjar did not specifically refer to missile production, but said anything that the Iranian armed forces needed can be made in the Islamic Republic.

Iran, which denies Western charges that it wants to build nuclear weapons, has pledged to continue its nuclear work despite the sanctions.

Iran has missiles with a range of up to 2,000 km (1,250 miles) in its arsenal, putting arch-foe Israel within range. Iranian officials have also said its weapons can hit the whole Gulf region, an area where the United States, its main enemy, has military units.

© Reuters 2006. All Rights Reserved.



Comment on this Article


Super Size Fire and Ice


Ice Mass Snaps Free From Canada's Arctic

By ROB GILLIES
Associated Press
29 Dec 06

A giant ice shelf the size of 11,000 football fields has snapped free from Canada's Arctic, scientists said. The mass of ice broke clear 16 months ago from the coast of Ellesmere Island, about 497 miles south of the North Pole, but no one was present to see it in Canada's remote north. Scientists using satellite images later noticed that it became a newly formed ice island in just an hour and left a trail of icy boulders floating in its wake.

Warwick Vincent of Laval University, who studies Arctic conditions, traveled to the newly formed ice island and could not believe what he saw.

"This is a dramatic and disturbing event. It shows that we are loosing remarkable features of the Canadian North that have been in place for many thousands of years. We are crossing climate thresholds, and these may signal the onset of accelerated change ahead," Vincent said Thursday.

In 10 years of working in the region he has never seen such a dramatic loss of sea ice, he said.

The collapse was so powerful that earthquake monitors 155 miles away picked up tremors from it.
The Ayles Ice Shelf, roughly 41 square miles in area, was one of six major ice shelves remaining in Canada's Arctic.

Scientists say it is the largest event of its kind in Canada in 30 years and point their fingers at climate change as a major contributing factor.

"It is consistent with climate change," Vincent said, adding that the remaining ice shelves are 90 percent smaller than when they were first discovered in 1906.

"We aren't able to connect all of the dots ... but unusually warm temperatures definitely played a major role."

Laurie Weir, who monitors ice conditions for the Canadian Ice Service, was poring over satellite images in 2005 when she noticed that the shelf had split and separated.

Weir notified Luke Copland, head of the new global ice lab at the University of Ottawa, who initiated an effort to find out what happened.

Using U.S. and Canadian satellite images, as well as data from seismic monitors, Copland discovered that the ice shelf collapsed in the early afternoon of Aug. 13, 2005.

"What surprised us was how quickly it happened," Copland said. "It's pretty alarming. Even 10 years ago scientists assumed that when global warming changes occur that it would happen gradually so that perhaps we expected these ice shelves just to melt away quite slowly, but the big surprise is that for one they are going, but secondly that when they do go, they just go suddenly, it's all at once, in a span of an hour."

Adobe PDF Dec-Feb
Within days, the floating ice shelf had drifted a few miles offshore. It traveled west for 31 miles until it finally froze into the sea ice in the early winter.

The Canadian ice shelves are packed with ancient ice that dates back over 3000 years. They float on the sea but are connected to land.

Derek Mueller, a polar researcher with Vincent's team, said the ice shelves get weaker and weaker as the temperature rises. He visited Ellesmere's Ward Hunt Ice Shelf in 2002 and noticed it had cracked in half.

"We're losing our ice shelves and this a feature of the landscape that is in danger of disappearing altogether from Canada," Mueller said. "In the global perspective Antarctica has many ice shelves bigger than this one, but then there is the idea that these are indicators of climate change."

The spring thaw may bring another concern as the warming temperatures could release the ice shelf from its Arctic grip. Prevailing winds could then send the ice island southwards, deep into the Beaufort Sea.

"Over the next few years this ice island could drift into populated shipping routes," Weir said. "There's significant oil and gas development in this region as well, so we'll have to keep monitoring its location over the next few years."


© 2006 The Associated Press. All rights reserved.



Comment on this Article


Waning El Nino offers hope of break in Australian drought

Associated Press
29 Dec 06

Australia's worst drought in a century could be about to break, following signs the El Nino weather pattern, blamed for record low rainfall levels, has peaked, a government scientist said Friday.

Michael Coughlan, head of the Australian Bureau of Meteorology's National Climate Centre, said he was cautiously optimistic of a better chance of autumn rain after scientific data suggested weather patterns were returning to normal.

"We will see some sort of a break in the autumn period," he told the Australian Broadcasting Corporation.
During an El Nino pattern the Tasman Sea, between Australia and New Zealand, cools so easterly winds carry less moisture than normal, meaning lower rainfall across Australia's East coast, the area worst hit by the current "Big Dry".

Signs of a reprieve included changing sub-surface temperatures in the Pacific, and trade winds strengthening to near-normal values over the past month, the Bureau of Meteorology said.

In addition, the Southern Oscillation Index, which is markedly negative during an El Nino pattern, had moved back towards postive territory, it said.

Poor rainfall has drastically reduced Australia's agricultural output, and left dams in many of the nation's cities dangerously depleted.

"Now whether or not it's a big enough break to recharge those very empty water storages, that remains to be seen," Coughlan said.

He said it would probably take until March for a definitive picture to emerge, and cautioned that after the last El Nino ended in 2003, rainfall was still lower than normal.

The new data backs up a similar prediction made in recent weeks by commercial meteorological prediction service Weatherzone, which foresaw an end to the El Nino-driven drought.

Weatherzone's Matt Pearce said the El Nino effect -- which resulted in the third-lowest rainfall on record nationwide for the August to November period -- had its greatest influence on Australia's weather during spring, with a decreasing impact in summer.

"Therefore, we expect rainfall to gradually return to more normal levels over the next few months."

Even so, temperatures would likely remain well above average across most of Australia through summer and into early autumn, Pearce said.

He said El Nino conditions had also been the major factor behind the bushfires that ravaged at least 850,000 hectares (2.13 million acres) across Australia before cooler Chistmas weather granted exhausted firefighters relief.



Comment on this Article


How to Super-Size a Volcanic Eruption

By Jeanna Bryner
LiveScience
22 December 2006

SAN FRANCISCO-Super eruptions that blast loads of ash sky high can change the climate. Now scientists are finding that the relationship could go both ways with the climate having an impact on huge volcanic eruptions.

A bone-dry climate, which occurs in periods between ice ages, could make conditions just right for building up enough underground magma to fuel a giant volcanic eruption, said Allen Glazner of the University of North Carolina in Chapel Hill. He presented this idea here last week at a meeting of the American Geophysical Union.
Human civilization has never experienced such a catastrophic eruption, which could blanket the state of Texas with soot two feet deep, for about 74,000 years. That's when Mount Toba in Indonesia blew its top making history as the largest eruption in the last 2 million years.

Even still, with the potential to devastate Earth, colossal-size eruptions are front and center for researchers who want to find ways of predicting the when, where and how big of such blasts.

Making magma


Beneath the ground, a large enough store of magma must build up to fuel the eruptions.

"It's all got to be underneath the ground in one place so that when you tap that magma chamber it all comes out at once or at least in a relatively short period of time, days to weeks," said Jake Lowenstern, U.S. Geologic Survey's chief scientist of the Yellowstone Volcano Observatory.

Glazner suggested that if more magma gets pumped up from below a volcano than exits at the surface, a super eruption could result. One way to change this balance is to turn up the heat, which can occur, he said, during inter-glacial periods when precipitation decreases.

"If you have a system where you're pumping heat in at the bottom and you're cooling if off the top, at the same time you never make a big magma body," Glazner told LiveScience. When conditions dry out the cooling effect of water gets turned off. Without cooling, super-size magma chambers can build and ultimately fuel an eruption.

Past blasts

Looking over the history of giant eruptions, Glazner did find that many occurred during inter-glacial periods and in areas with dry climates. He hopes to complete a detailed analysis of the geologic record of eruptions to bolster this theory.

Lowenstern said that Glazner's idea is interesting, but it shouldn't be used to look at any individual volcano.

"So when I look at what Allen was talking about you're really looking at the effect of one particular factor out of many and how it may be important in the overall behavior of global volcanic systems," Lowenstern said.

Time scales

The trouble with studying super-size eruptions is they don't happen often. "We've been studying for 30 or 40 years something that is active on hundreds of thousands of years of time scale," Lowenstern said.

"It's kind of like if you were trying to take somebody's pulse and you only left the stethoscope on for a tenth of a second. You might not even get one heartbeat," he added.

Still researchers are monitoring active and inactive volcanoes to answer their questions. For instance, they would like to know the size of the underground magma chamber, but imaging techniques are still to crude to show such detail.

"We want to understand what causes those kinds of eruptions, how to recognize when one is coming. And I'm just interested in this idea that the atmosphere and the climate can affect what happens with the style of eruptions," Glazner said.



Comment on this Article


Head-banging Chinese snakes can predict earthquakes days in advance, say scientists

By Clifford Coonan in Beijing
29 December 2006

As Asia's telecom systems slowly recovered from the earthquakes that hit Taiwan this week, Chinese scientists said they had developed a new way of forecasting tremors - by observing the tendency of snakes to launch themselves headlong into walls.
"Of all the creatures on the Earth, snakes are perhaps the most sensitive to earthquakes," Jiang Weisong, director of the earthquake bureau in Nanning, in southern Guangxi province, told The China Daily. Serpents can sense a coming earthquake from 120km (75 miles) away, up to five days before it happens. They respond by behaving extremely erratically. "When an earthquake is about to occur, snakes will move out of their nests, even in the cold of winter. If the earthquake is a big one, the snakes will even smash into walls while trying to escape," he said.

The earthquake bureau in Nanning, a city particularly prone to earthquakes, has developed a system that monitors snakes' natural behaviour using hi-tech equipment. Experts at the bureau observe snakes at local snake farms using video cameras linked to a broadband internet connection running 24 hours per day.

China is frequently struck by earthquakes, with most hitting remote rural areas, but big cities have also been hit. In 1976, the city of Tangshan was devastated by an earthquake and some 250,000 people died.

Nanning is one of 12 Chinese cities monitored by hi-tech equipment. It also has 143 animal monitoring units. "By installing cameras over the snake nests, we have improved our ability to forecast earthquakes. The system could be extended to other parts of the country to make our earthquake forecasts more precise," said Mr Jiang.

It's not just snakes - dogs and chickens also behave abnormally when an earthquake is about to happen.

Two people were killed and 42 injured on Tuesday when three buildings collapsed in earthquakes that shook southern Taiwan. Even if the hypersensitive animals had caught the earthquakes in time, there was little they could do about the damage done to miles of fibre-optic cable laid in areas of seismic activity around the region. Most internet access in China was still down following the quakes - indeed, this report from Beijing is being written from a handheld computer. The tremors exposed the frailties of the whole system of cables laid deep under water in Asia, which has formed the lifeblood for the region's economic boom.

Mr Jiang has written a letter to the central government seeking funds to build more snake-monitoring stations. "Local farmers have welcomed the cameras and broadband," said Mr Jiang. "They can access information on the internet, such as techniques for raising snakes and demand for snakes in the market."

As well as their ability to predict earthquakes, snakes are also valued in China for their uses in traditional medicine. They are also popular in soup.



Comment on this Article


Earthquake in Asia, Spam Plummets

Dec 28, 2006
John Levine

An earthquake on Tuesday near Taiwan caused widespread disruption to telephone and Internet networks. The quake affected an area of the sea bottom with a lot of undersea cables that broke, and since there is only a limited number of cable repair ships, it will take at least weeks to fish them up and splice them.
China and Korea were heavily affected, with most of their connectivity to the rest of the world cut off. Not surprisingly, this meant that the rest of the world got a lot less spam, too. Neither country is the haven for overt spammers that it used to be, but both have large broadband networks with vast numbers of virus controlled zombie computers. One large network in North America saw their mail from Korea drop by 90% and from China by 99%. Since the mail sent from those countries to the US is typically 99% spam and 1% legitimate mail, the earthquake's effect on e-mail was, to a first approximation, to get rid of a lot of spam. Brett Glass, a journalist who runs a small rural ISP in Wyoming, noted that if the affected countries dealt more effectively with their spam, they might not well have needed all of the capacity they'd lost.

China and Korea are not alone in sending 99% spam; I see many countries in Europe, South America, and elsewhere in Asia that are just as bad. It would be nice if this were a wakeup call to networks to deal with parasitic usage, but I'm not holding my breath.



Comment on this Article


Arctic ice shelf collapse poses risk: expert

Last Updated: Thursday, December 28, 2006 | 6:39 PM ET
CBC News

An ancient ice shelf the size of 11,000 football fields that broke off Ellesmere Island could be dangerous when it starts to drift in the spring, a scientist says.

The collapse of the ice island's northern coast represents the largest breakup of its kind in the Canadian Arctic in 30 years, the head of a new global ice lab at the University of Ottawa said on Thursday.
Luke Copland, an assistant professor at the school's department of geography, said scientists are surprised at the speed of the collapse of the Ayles ice shelf, about 800 kilometres south of the North Pole. It took less than an hour.

He said the new island formed by the 66-square-kilometre fragment, which could be up to 4,500 years old, could present a serious risk to oil platforms in its drift path in the spring.

At the longest and widest spans, the remains of the Ayles shelf are about 15 kilometres long and five kilometres wide. The fragment is between 30 and 40 metres thick.

Copland learned of the break after an official with the federal government's Canadian Ice Service noticed the change on satellite images and passed it on to him to determine what happened, according to a report by CanWest News Service.

In June, Copland received nearly $206,000 in grant funding from the Canada Foundation for Innovation to create the Laboratory for Cryospheric Research, which will monitor the state of glaciers, climate change and study ice in all of its forms.

Warwick Vincent of Laval University in Quebec City, who travelled to the new segment, said in 10 years of working in the Arctic, he had never seen such a dramatic collapse.

"It's like a cruise missile has come down and hit the ice shelf," he told CanWest News Service. Vincent is a professor at the university's biology department, where he does ecological research.

The collapse of the Ayles shelf - one of six that still existed in Canada - occurred 16 months ago, on Aug. 13, 2005, but because it is so remote, no one saw it.

Scientists have been combining seismic and satellite data to determine what happened and are now releasing details of the collapse.

The researchers suspect climate change may have played a role in the collapse but said they cannot definitively say it is a result of global warming.



Comment on this Article


Scramble To Repair Telecom Lines Across Asia After Taiwan Quake

by Susan Stumme
Hong Kong (AFP)
Dec 28, 2006

Millions of people across Asia suffered a second straight day without a full Internet service Thursday as telecoms operators raced to counter gloomy predictions of weeks without web access. Repair boats headed to the waters between Hong Kong and Taiwan so that engineers could assess how to fix underwater fibre-optic cables damaged in an earthquake off Taiwan on Tuesday.

Although stock markets in the region functioned normally, access to overseas websites remained patchy, as did dialling telephone numbers across southeast Asia and in the United States.
"Our system is gradually recovering," leading Japanese provider NTT Communications said, explaining that it had re-routed much of its data transmission away from the troubled Taiwan route.

"However, for certain customers it will take a longer time for full restoration, as it may require a complete reinstallation of cables."

The 7.1-magnitude earthquake that hit late Tuesday sparked widespread communications disruption Wednesday in Taiwan, China, Hong Kong, Japan, Singapore, South Korea and elsewhere. Knock-on problems occurred as far away as Australia.

Millions of people dependent on the Internet for news, stock prices and e-mail were reminded of life before the World Wide Web.

Telecommunications operators in Taiwan and Hong Kong warned that completely solving the problem could take three weeks.

Taiwan's largest phone company, Chunghwa Telecom, has contracted three boats from Britain, Japan and Singapore to take workers to the zone early next week, said deputy general manager Lin Jen-hon.

Lin said seven or eight troublespots needed attention, adding that efforts would be made to divert Internet links with the support of foreign service providers until the ruptured cables could be repaired.

Chunghwa put losses since Tuesday's quake, which killed two people on the island, at 150 million Taiwan dollars (4.6 million US).

Hong Kong's telecommunications authority said five maintenance ships had been sent out to repair the cables, which handle about 90 percent of capacity in the area.

International landline calling and roaming mobile services in the southern Chinese territory were returning to normal Thursday, but the authority said full repairs could take up to a week.

China Telecom, the country's largest fixed-line carrier, said six undersea cables were cut off 15 kilometers from the south of Taiwan, causing severe Internet congestion on the mainland.

China's Ministry of Information Industry, its Internet regulator, and major telecom operators have started emergency action to overcome the difficulties, Xinhua news agency said.

Global banking giant HSBC said Thursday its internet service had been affected and it was working to restore service to customers via alternative connections.

Indonesia called on people to limit their Internet use to give priority to aid workers after floods killed more than 100 and forced 400,000 to flee their homes.

"There are many NGOs in disaster areas such as in Aceh who are depending so much on the Internet for their communications. They are the ones feeling the most impact," telecommunications director general Gatot Dewobroto said.

In Vietnam, operators urged Internet users to ease congestion by refraining from downloading music or large data files from local websites unaffected by the quake-related damage.

In Thailand, Jirachai Srichon, from CAT Telecom, Thailand's communications authority, said 50 percent of Internet connections in the kingdom had been recovered.

"Connection, however, has remained slow, especially when traffic is huge," the senior executive vice president told reporters.

South Korea's information and communications ministry said 98 exclusive business lines -- 80 run by Korean Telecom and 18 by LG Dacom -- remained out of action Thursday, but other Internet and telephone services were normal.

"Just the services have got back to normal. The cables still remain damaged," Hong Seong-Yong, a ministry official handling the problem, told AFP.

Service across most of Australia had been restored on Thursday.



Comment on this Article


UN International Year Of Deserts Ends With Stark Warnings

AFP
17 Dec 06

The UN International Year of Deserts and Desertification ended on Sunday with stark warnings from experts about the expansion of uninhabitable zones and an increase in climate-driven migration. Desertification -- the expansion of desert areas, caused by growing populations and climate changes -- is one of the most important global issues, UN Under Secretary-General Hans Van Ginkel said at the start of a three-day conference in the Algerian capital.

"It has become more and more evident that desertification is one of the most important global challenges, destabilising societies the world over," said Van Ginkel, who is also rector of the United Nations University (UNU), a partner in the event involving around 200 experts from 25 countries.
Algerian President Abdelaziz Bouteflika, host of the conference, said that desertification "affects a third of the surface of our planet, more than the surface of China, Canada and Brazil combined," and is a threat to world peace.

Bouteflika called in a speech opening the event for a concerted, global effort, saying it was "more urgent that ever" to put into practice measures agreed at the 1992 Earth Summit in Rio de Janeiro to tackle desertification and preserve non-renewable resources.

Around 2 billion people live in areas threatened by desertification.

The implications for human migration are huge, with estimates today showing that migrants uprooted primarily by environmental factors now exceed the number of political refugees, according to a UNU statement.

Desertification has been on the world agenda for 50 years but efforts to arrest the problem have been chronically under-funded, and the situation is getting demonstrably worse every year, the organization said. It is still not known precisely how fast the process is unfolding, much less how best to address it.

One of those in attendance was Professor Rattan Lal of Ohio State University, who said poor developing-country households must switch to clean cooking fuels instead of burning crop residue and animal dung.

This will stop the loss of valuable sources of nutrients needed to forestall desertification and world hunger, Lal said.

By modestly improving soil quality in developing countries, an extra 20 to 30 million tonnes of food per year could be produced -- enough to feed the number of people being added to their populations annually -- at a cost of less than two billion dollars (1.5 billion euros) per year.

Karl Harmsen, director of UNU's Ghana-based Institute for Natural Resources in Africa, noted estimates that Africa may be able to feed just 25 percent of its population by 2025 if the decline in soil conditions continues on the continent.

Source: Agence France-Presse



Comment on this Article


Christmas counters find fewer birds going south

By David Rattigan
Boston Globe
December 28, 2006

They are rare birds, these amateur ornithologists. Their activity is part walk in the woods, part collection, part academic study, and a large part an appreciation of beauty....

This year, local birders have seen a new trend in the data that has led to some unsettling conclusions. It is a common discussion in birding circles about the correlation between a changing bird population in Massachusetts and the disturbing ecological trend known as global warming.
"I saw an owl when I was 10," said Tom Young, 38, who grew up in Essex and coordinates the Newburyport portion of the annual Christmas Bird Count, which concludes Sunday. Like many others birders, he said, he can recall the "crystallizing moment" that drew him to a lifelong hobby.

This year, local birders have seen a new trend in the data that has led to some unsettling conclusions. It is a common discussion in birding circles about the correlation between a changing bird population in Massachusetts and the disturbing ecological trend known as global warming.

As the earth has warmed over the past few decades, according to most climatologists, birders are finding fewer migratory species from the northernmost regions, and more and more species of birds that -- 30 years ago -- would never venture this far north in December.

"Global warming is one of these things that, in many minds, is still somewhat controversial," said Wayne Petersen, co-author of "Birds of Massachusetts" and director of the Massachusetts Important Bird Areas program for the Massachusetts Audubon Society. He's also the longtime regional editor for the Christmas Bird Count in New England, compiling the figures sent in from local counts.

"Having said that, and the fact that it increasingly seems there is overwhelming evidence to suggest it's real, the Christmas Bird Count is one way to get a hint of that."

The best example, he said, is the trend of more and more species of birds -- many of which are highly migratory -- showing up on the Christmas bird count.

"The implication is that they're staying later, or not migrating as early in the fall, or wintering farther north then they ever did," said Petersen, who offered as an example the sighting of three hummingbirds recorded in the first few days of the count this year.

"That's unprecedented," he said.

Warblers are another species being seen in greater numbers. That's a species that frequently winters in the tropics, but is showing up on the Christmas Bird Count.

"There have been a variety of other species of this sort, that if you go over the last five or 10 years or so there's an increasing trend of a lot of these species appearing in December that were never here before" at that time of year, Petersen said. "They're usually gone by October or November at the latest."

In 2002, Ivan Valiela, a professor at the Boston University Marine Program in Woods Hole, coauthored (with student Jennifer Bowen ) an academic paper that tracked the trends from Christmas bird counts and matched them with recorded temperatures.

"What has been happening in the last few decades is that there's a higher and higher proportion of species that, in previous decades, used to be fairly south in the winter and now manage to survive -- do well, even -- in our winters, at this latitude," he said.

In constructing the study, Valiela and Bowen reviewed Christmas bird counts in Massachusetts, which run back to the early 1930s.

"It's really quite a remarkable data set, of places where excellent bird identifiers have had the chance to collect information in the same areas, in basically the same fashion, for decades," he said. "We can also collect data on the temperatures, and what seems to be happening is that as there's this gradual warming, there's also a gradual movement of species northward.

"You can go species by species and see the pattern," Valiela said. "Gradually, these species with southern affinities have been moving northward." And species with northern affinities are moving farther northward.

On Tuesday, approximately 35 volunteers were to fan out in a 15-mile circle, observing birds and gathering data, for the Newburyport bird count. Last week, many of the same volunteers participated in similar counts on Cape Ann and in the Andover-Boxford area.

The participants look forward to their day (or days) taking part in the bird count for a variety of reasons. Some like to go out in teams, Young noted, and most are fueled by the possibility of an unusual find that they can share with appreciative birders at the end of the day.

"It gives you an excuse to be out all day long, and every bird counts because every bird needs to be counted that day," said Jim Berry of Ipswich, 63, who participated in both the Cape Ann and Newburyport counts.

Berry explained that common birds are frequently not given much attention during normal birding.

But because he's collecting comprehensive data, "you have to pay more attention, and need to be more intense," he said.

The Christmas Bird Count, a citizen-scientist project sponsored by the National Audubon Society Inc., dates back 107 years.

© Copyright 2006 Globe Newspaper Company.



Comment on this Article


Denver Gets Blitzed by Another Snowstorm

By CHASE SQUIRES
Associated Press
29 Dec 06

The second major snow storm in a week pounded Colorado on Friday, burying the foothills under another 2 feet of snow, shutting down highways and forcing the cancellation of hundreds of flights at the Denver airport.

The storm stretched across the Rocky Mountains into the western Plains, where the National Weather Service warned that the gusting wind could whip up blinding whiteouts.
Colorado Gov. Bill Owens again declared a statewide disaster, putting the National Guard on standby as areas west of Denver got 28 inches of snow Thursday and early Friday. In the city, more than a foot of snow had fallen by morning and another foot was expected.

United Airlines and Frontier Airlines, the largest carriers at Denver International Airport, both canceled 322 flights through Friday morning but were hopeful that they could soon get back on schedule.

"Right now, we're planning to operate a full schedule starting at noon," United spokeswoman Robin Urbanski said early Friday.

While last week's blizzard dumped nearly 2 feet of snow in about 24 hours, making it impossible for airport and highway plows to keep up, snow from the new storm was expected to stretch over about three days.

The metro area's light rail trains, buses and public transit all planned to run on their regular schedules Friday. Maintenance crews covered Denver streets with deicer, but offices still closed early and residents stocked up on groceries.

Interstate 25, the main north-south highway through the state, was closed about 60 miles north of Denver, and Greyhound canceled all trips out of Denver on Friday and more cancelations could follow.

With memories fresh of the 4,700 stranded holiday travelers and backed up flights around the country last week, New Year's travelers jammed the airport Thursday trying to get out of Colorado while they still could.

Managers at the nation's fifth-busiest airport drew up snowplowing plans, and airlines urged ticket-holders to get early flights or wait until after the storm.

Chris Malmay of San Diego hoped to spend a long holiday with family in Colorado, but because of the first storm, he couldn't reach Denver until Christmas Eve. On Thursday, his flight back to California was canceled because of the second storm.

"It's been crazy," Malmay said as he waited to board a plane Friday. "I'm saying, 'Please let me go back where it's sunny. You won't get snowed in, I promise.'"

The airport and airlines called in extra workers, and security lines moved relatively quickly. But long lines formed at ticket counters as travelers tried to adjust their plans.

The Frontier line snaked across the cavernous terminal, weaving behind the lines of ticket counters on the other side of the building.

Frontier waived its usual change fee to encourage passengers to catch earlier flights. "Let's try and get as many people out ahead of the storm as we can," Frontier spokesman Joe Hodas said.

After running out of bedding for stranded passengers during the first storm, airport managers lined up cots and blankets and urged food vendors to ensure they had plenty of supplies on hand.

In New Mexico, Interstate 40 remained closed Friday morning from Albuquerque to Santa Rosa, with numerous crashes were reported after a storm swept through.

Residents of Cheyenne, Wyo., also braced for another snowstorm. Heavy snow began falling around dusk, and forecasters said up to a foot was expected.

In California, a powerful winter storm left tens of thousands of people without power as winds gusted to near-hurricane force. Forecasters warned of dangerous winds, with gusts over 70 mph, through Friday morning in the valleys and mountain passes.



Comment on this Article


Health Matters


Most Americans Want Public Policies to Prevent Obesity

By Steven Reinberg
HealthDay
28 December 2006

A large majority of Americans say they support changes in public policy to stem the rising tide of obesity among adults, a new survey shows.

"There is a lot of support for employer and health policies aimed at preventing obesity," said lead researcher Bernard Fuemmeler, an assistant professor in the department of community and family medicine at Duke University Medical Center, in Durham, N.C.

"This study provides tangible evidence that people support wide-scale policy changes that can affect obesity in the U.S.," Fuemmeler added.
The findings appear in the January issue of the American Journal of Preventive Medicine.

Approximately 60 million American adults are obese, according to the U.S. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. In 1998, Americans spent about 9 percent of all medical expenses on problems linked to being overweight or obese, the CDC reports.

The new telephone survey of 1,139 adults found that 85 percent supported tax breaks for employers who made exercise space available to employees.

In addition, 73 percent said they'd support government incentives for companies that reduced the cost of health insurance for employees who had healthy lifestyles and shed extra pounds. Seventy-two percent said they would support government policies requiring insurance companies to cover obesity treatment and prevention programs.

"There is growing public advocacy for these kinds of policy changes," Fuemmeler said. "There is also advocacy in the research community for large-scale policy changes. With some push, we might be able to get some changes that would help us better address the obesity epidemic in the country."

But one expert said it will take more than policy changes to get Americans to eat better and exercise more.

"The problem is not necessarily that employers need tax incentives," said Kathryn M. Kolasa, a professor in the department of nutrition services and patient education at East Carolina University. "The employer can expect to realize health-care cost savings and can be motivated by that."

However, "It's not clear what will motivate the employees," Kolasa said.

One problem is misinformation about weight loss. "Most individuals that present for nutrition counseling have significant amounts of misinformation about food and beverages that prevent them from being successful in weight loss or weight management," Kolasa said.

"Also, people continue to say that it costs more money to eat healthy, when it has been demonstrated time and again you can eat healthy at no greater cost," Kolasa added.

She does believe that changes in policy might make it easier for people to take advantage of health-promotion programs.

"Just because an insurance company provides a wellness benefit doesn't mean people will use it," Kolasa said. "I have one patient who was excited to receive the wellness benefit -- six visits with a certified dietitian during the year. Her employer let her take time from work for the first visit, but said subsequent visits would have to be on her time. This same employer allows employees to take time for doctor visits without penalty," she said.



Comment on this Article


Weight May Be Linked to Type of Bacteria

By Seth Borenstein
Associated Press
20 December 2006

WASHINGTON - The size of your gut may be partly shaped by which microbes call it home, according to new research linking obesity to types of digestive bacteria.

Both obese mice - and people - had more of one type of bacteria and less of another kind, according to two studies published Thursday in the journal Nature.

A "microbial component'' appears to contribute to obesity, said study lead author Jeffrey Gordon, director of Washington University's Center for Genome Sciences.

Obese humans and mice had a lower percentage of a family of bacteria called Bacteroidetes and more of a type of bacteria called Firmicutes, Gordon and his colleagues found.
The researchers aren't sure if more Firmicutes makes you fat or if people who are obese grow more of that type of bacteria.

But growing evidence of this link gives scientists a potentially new and still distant way of fighting obesity: Change the bacteria in the intestines and stomach. It also may lead to a way of fighting malnutrition in the developing world.

Nikhil Dhurandhar, a professor of infection and obesity at Louisiana State University's Pennington Biomedical Research Center, wasn't part of the research, but said it may change the way obesity is treated eventually.

"We are getting more and more evidence to show that obesity isn't what we thought it used to be,'' Dhurandhar said. "It isn't just (that) you're eating too much and you're lazy.''

He said the field of "infectobesity'' looks at obesity with multiple causes, including viruses and microbes. In another decade or so, the different causes of obesity could have different treatments. The current regimen of diet and exercise "is like treating all fevers with one aspirin,'' Dhurandhar said.

In one study, Gordon and colleagues looked at what happened in mice with changes in bacteria level. When lean mice with no germs in their guts had larger ratios of Firmicutes transplanted, they got "twice as fat'' and took in more calories from the same amount of food than mice with the more normal bacteria ratio, said Washington University microbiology instructor Ruth Ley, a study co-author.

It was as if one group got far more calories from the same bowl of Cheerios than the other, Gordon said.

In a study of dozen dieting people, the results also were dramatic.

Before dieting, about 3 percent of the gut bacteria in the obese participants was Bacteroidetes. But after dieting, the now normal-sized people had much higher levels of Bacteroidetes - close to 15 percent, Gordon said.

"I think that gut bacteria affects body weight,'' said Virginia Commonwealth University pathology professor Richard Atkinson, who wasn't part of the research team and is president of Obetech Obesity Research Center in Richmond. "I don't think there's any doubt about that and they showed that.''

The growing field of research puts more importance in the trillions of microbes that live in our guts and elsewhere, crediting it with everything from generations of people getting taller to increases in diabetes and asthma.

People are born germ-free, but within days they have a gut blooming with microbes. The microbes come from first foods - either breast milk or formula - the exterior environment, and the way the babies are born, said Stanford University medicine and microbiology professor David Relman, who was not part of the study.

For decades, doctors have treated bacteria in a "warlike'' manner, yet recent research shows that "most encounters we have with microbes are very beneficial,'' Gordon said.

"Much of who we are and what we can do and can't do as human beings is directly related to microbial inhabitants,'' Relman said.



Comment on this Article


Sea Slug Offers Clues to Human Brain Disorders

By Jeanna Bryner
LiveScience
28 December 2006

Beneath a slimy façade, the sea slug is somewhat of a brainiac.

At any given time within a single brain cell of this marine snail (Aplysia), more than 10,000 genes are hard at work, suggests a new study looking at aspects of the sea slug's genome.

By probing the brain of Aplysia, researchers identified more than 100 genes similar to those associated with all major human neurological diseases and more than 600 genes controlling brain development.

The findings suggest that acts of learning or the progression of brain disorders do not take place in isolation, and instead stem from interactions between large clusters of genes within many cells.
Any insights into how the brain runs and the genes that orchestrate the brain activity are welcomed by neuroscientists. Until now, for instance, scientists have been largely in the dark about how genes shape circuits in the brain to enhance learning and memory.

"This improves the genetic data that is available on Aplysia by several orders of magnitude," said study team member Eric Kandel of Columbia University in New York.

Brain web

The marine slug has a relatively simple nervous system, with about 10,000 large neurons that can be easily identified, compared with about 100 billion neurons in humans. Even so, the animal is capable of learning and its brain cells communicate in ways identical to human neuron-to-neuron messaging.

Like a meticulously-crafted spider web, most neurons sport thousands of strands that connect to other neurons. To journey between certain neurons, a signal must flow along the correct strands and intersections. Similarly, to store a memory that pathway, called a synapse, must be strengthened.

In past studies, scientists have found that once the route-map gets made, the sea slug marks the synapses connecting the relevant neurons. Next time the slug gets pinched, a certain protein gets sent out to all the synapses in a neuron. When the protein reaches a marked synapse, it triggers other molecules there to produce new proteins that strengthen the neuron-to-neuron connection.

Brainy conductor

To find out the genetic conductors of such learning and memory, scientists led by Leonid Moroz of the University of Florida Whitney Laboratory for Marine Bioscience studied gene activity in the sea slug's central nervous system, including genes known to switch on and off during a simple defensive maneuver-when the slug withdraws its gill.

Specifically they looked at the so-called transcriptome, a small percentage of genes that get copied to form molecules of ribonucleic acid (RNA). These molecules deliver directions for making proteins, which are key players in how cells operate.

They found specific genes linked to learning and memory. "We've now identified a whole bunch of receptors for serotonin. So we can see what their function is in various cells and which ones participate in the learning process," Kandel told LiveScience.

The scientists also analyzed 146 human genes implicated in 168 neurological disorders, including Parkinson's and Alzheimer's diseases, and genes controlling aging. They found 104 counterpart genes in Aplysia, suggesting the animal will be a valuable tool in understanding and ultimately treating neurodegenerative diseases.

The study is detailed in the Dec. 29 issue of the journal Cell.



Comment on this Article


Meat, milk from cloned animals safe to eat, U.S. officials say

Last Updated: Thursday, December 28, 2006 | 12:24 PM ET
CBC News

Food from cloned cattle, pigs and goats does not pose any health risks, the U.S. Food and Drug Administration said in a draft ruling Thursday.

"No unique risks for human food consumption were identified in cattle, swine or goat clones," the FDA said in a statement.

The FDA will accept public comments before it makes a final ruling in the new year on whether food from cloned animals may be made available for sale.
Scientists with the FDA suggest in the Jan. 1 issue of Theriogenology that food from cloned animals does not need to be specially labelled.

"Meat and milk from clones and their progeny is as safe to eat as corresponding products derived from animals produced using contemporary agricultural practices," wrote FDA scientists Larisa Rudenko and John C. Matheson.

Rudenko and Matheson also noted that when the cloned animals reached six to 18 months of age, it was almost impossible to distinguish them from animals that had been traditionally bred.

Food from cloned animals is forbidden for sale in Canada but Health Canada officials noted earlier in the year that they are waiting to evaluate the FDA's findings.

Meanwhile, consumer groups continue to argue that more precautions should be made to protect the safety of the food supply. They argue that food products made from cloned animals must be separated and labelled.

The Consumer Federation of America said the FDA is overlooking research that shows cloning produces more deformed animals than other reproductive technologies.

Carol Tucker Foreman, the federation's director of food policy, is calling on supermarkets to refuse to sell food from clones.



Comment on this Article


Housework cuts breast cancer risk (Men can get breast cancer too!)

JANE KIRBY
The Scotsman
29 Dec 06

MODERATE housework can help women substantially to cut their risk of developing breast cancer, according to a study.

Researchers analysed data from 218,169 women, aged 20 to 80, in nine European countries, looking at a range of activities, including work, leisure and housework.
Click to learn more...

Pre-menopausal women who did housework were 30 per cent less likely to develop breast cancer than pre-menopausal women who did none, while post-menopausal women who did housework were 20 per cent less likely to develop the disease than those who did none.
The research, published in the journal Cancer Epidemiology Biomarkers and Prevention, said: "In this large cohort of women ... increased non-occupational physical activity and, in particular, increased household activity, were significantly associated with reduced breast cancer risk, independent of other potential risk factors.

"These results strengthen the consistency of findings about the protective role of physical activity on breast cancer risk."

Some 44,100 cases of breast cancer are diagnosed in the UK every year and more than 12,400 women die from the disease.

Dr Lesley Walker, of Cancer Research UK, which part-funded the study, said: "We already know that women who keep a healthy weight are less likely to develop breast cancer. This study suggests being physically active may also help reduce the risk and that something as simple... as doing the housework can help."



Comment on this Article


Egypt faces grim bird flu situation

www.chinaview.cn 2006-12-29 06:25:45

CAIRO, Dec. 28 (Xinhua) -- Egypt witnessed three human bird flu death cases in only four days, the death toll of the human bird flu cases in the country rose to 10 and aroused some worries about spreading of the deadly disease.
Reda Abdel Halim Farid, a 26-year-old man from a big family living in the Egyptian Delta governorate of Gharbiya, some 90 km north of Cairo, died of the deadly H5N1 virus on Wednesday, became the third casualty in a week after another two members of the family, a 30-year-old woman and a 15-year-old girl, who died on Sunday and Monday respectively.

On the current bird flu situation in Egypt, Egyptian Health Ministry spokesman Abdel Rahman Shahine told Xinhua that the situation seems to be dangerous but it is under control, specially as people start to recognize how dangerous the virus is and directly inform the authorities of any suspected cases.

"H5N1 is a serious threat in Egypt and we set up a plan to take measures in cooperation with other ministries to deal with this problem," Shahine said.

He added that Egypt is cooperating with the World Health Organization and the EU among others to provide some vaccines to face the disease.

For his part, Egyptian Ministry of Environment senior official Ahmed el-Emary said that there would be serious problems during next March, the birds immigration season, when hundreds of birds come from the EU through Egypt on their way to Africa.

As for measures taken by the Egyptian government to deal with the grim situation, Egyptian cabinet spokesman Magdi Radi said that the country has designed a comprehensive plan in order to face the issue and a big number of Tamiflu, a kind of medicine against the bird flu disease, have already been imported.

Meanwhile, Radi asked people to stop buying alive birds to eat, recommending that it is better to change their habits and buy slaughtered birds which have been done under the supervision of the authorities.

The first bird flu case in Egypt was found in dead poultry on Feb. 17, 2006 and then the virus spread to 20 of the country's 26governorates, with the first human bird flu case in the Arab country reported on March 18, 2006.

Since then, a total of 18 reported human bird flu cases have been reported, among which 8 persons were cured.



Comment on this Article


Life is a Devil's Bargain: Cancer or Aging

By Ker Than
LiveScience Staff Writer
posted: 18 September 2006
09:33 am ET

Deterioration of body and mind are the prices our bodies pay for protection against cancer as we grow older, new studies suggest.

Scientists have discovered that a gene involved in tumor suppression also plays an important role in determining when certain cells in the body cease multiplying and start deteriorating. As cells age, the gene, called p16INK4a, becomes more active. The cells have greater protection against cancer but lose the ability to divide. Cells that don't divide die off and are not replaced.
The studies, detailed together in the Sept. 7 issue of the journal Nature, suggest the physical and mental ravages that accompany aging are not the result of simple wear and tear of the body, but of a cellular decline that is programmed into our genes—one designed to safeguard us against copying mistakes that become more frequent as we grow older.

"This research tells us why our old tissues have less regenerative capacity than young tissues," said Sean Morrison of the University of Michigan, who was involved in one of the studies. "It's not that old tissues wear out—they're actively shutting themselves down, probably to avoid turning into cancer cells."

No free lunch

Research teams from three medical schools examined the role of p16INK4a in cells collected from different parts of the body in mice.

One team, from the University of North Carolina (UNC) at Chapel Hill, looked at the gene's role in pancreatic islet cells, which produce and secrete the hormone insulin and which are defective in persons with Type 1 diabetes. Another team from the University of Michigan examined brain stem cells, while a third, from Harvard University, looked at p16INK4a in blood stem cells.

All three studies found similar results: as animals got older, p16INK4a activity increased and the cells eventually stopped dividing. Cells in mice deficient in the gene continued to divide but were more likely to turn cancerous, while cells in animals with over-expression of the gene stopped dividing earlier and aged prematurely.

The experiments also showed that cells taken from old animals remember their "age" and continue to deteriorate at their previous rate even when transplanted into young animals.

This last finding raises new questions about the usefulness of adult stem cells in tissue and organ repair compared to embryonic stem cells.

Fresh debate

The use of embryonic stem cells in medical research is currently a topic of fierce debate because harvesting the cells destroys developing embryos. As an alternative, some scientists are trying to use stem cells taken from adults and grow them into tissues in the lab; the new cells could then be reintroduced into the patient's body to replace failing tissues or organs.

"I think this data undermines that notion," said Norman Sharpless, a researcher at the University of North Carolina (UNC) at Chapel Hill who was involved in all three studies. "It shows that even these [adult] stem cells, which have the properties of self-renewal, are not limitless in their capacity to regenerate themselves. There are tumor-suppression mechanisms that limit their longevity."

Not all of the researchers agree. Morrison, the University of Michigan researcher, doesn't think the findings will have a drastic impact on how doctors use stem cells.

"I don't think this is a reason to say that embryonic stem cells are more valuable that adult stem cells," he said in a telephone interview. "It's been recognized for a long time that young adult [stem] cells are more robust than old ones. For example doctors are reluctant to do bone marrow transplants when the donor is old."

The more important consequence of the new findings, Morrison said, is that it helps explain embryonic stem cells' seemingly limitless ability to divide and become new cells.

These tumor-suppression "mechanisms probably don't exist in embryonic stem cells, and that's why they can proliferate indefinitely, while adult stem cells can't," he said.

Potential uses

The findings could prove to have numerous practical uses as well, the researchers say. For example, p16INK4a could be used as a "biomarker" to determine a cell's age. It is "like an odometer almost—you can use it to tell the mileage of the tissue," Sharpless told LiveScience.

This could allow doctors to one day do things like sort blood stem cells based on physiological age to determine whether someone will be a good bone marrow donor or not.

Also, it might be possible to create drugs that temporarily inactivate p16INK4a and promote healing in damaged cells, Morrison said.

"We could give people who have injuries a drug like that for a week or two weeks or a month," he said. "That's not likely to cause cancer, and even if some cells started to divide a little out of control during that period, you just stop the drug and p16INK4a comes back on and shuts things down again."

The findings might also lead to new kinds of therapies aimed at slowing or reversing the effects of aging, the researchers say. In the experiments, shutting down p16INK4a activity relieved only some, but not all, of the negative repercussions of aging. But scientists know of other tumor suppressor genes, and manipulating many of them at once might have a greater effect, Morrison said.

"Maybe if we look at the aggregate effects of five or six different tumor suppressors, we might be able to rescue most of the aging effect," he said.



Comment on this Article


Why I gave vegetarianism the chop after 17 years

By ALEX JAMES
28th December 2006

Handsome sides of dry-cured bacon hang, crystalline, all along one wall; there are pork pies and black and white puddings; faggots and blocks of lard are piled high and appealing in the long display cabinet below.

The shelves are crammed with pickles and relishes, mustards and accompaniments; the wipe-clean boards offer lists of more exotic game - pigeon, rabbit, venison, snipe and woodcock - alongside the everyday cuts and joints on show.

A well-worn beech chopping block and various saws, cleavers and gigantic knives are to hand.

The tiny subterranean shop is stuffed to the beams.
It's Trev's place. He's worked here in the butcher's since he was 12 - about 40 years. It's a great butcher's. I'm addicted to his chipolatas. He was preparing tempting looking mixed grill packages for one of the pubs when I arrived.

I've had the carcass of one of my lambs delivered direct to Trev from judging in the national championships in Shropshire, where, to my amazement, it won National Reserve Champion.

Usually the lambs come back from the abattoir, deconstructed, in a box the size of an overnight bag. But I wanted to take a carcass whole to the butcher, partly so that I could get the shoulders boned and rolled, and partly because I wanted to watch how it all works.

It would be much more difficult to eat your own lamb if you had only one of them. After lambing, we have a couple of thousand sheep; a mixture of breeds, mainly black-faced, Texels and Belgians.

Fred, the sheep farmer, has been crossbreeding the Belgians and Texels to produce a particularly meaty "Beltex" variety - the ones that are winning prizes.

Our flock comprises half a dozen tups (rams), the remainder being ewes and lambs. The ewes give birth to either one or two young, so the numbers boom at lambing time.

The lambs skip around, looking sweet, munching grass, chasing Fred's Land Rover and falling over. They grow phenomenally quickly - ready for the table in less than a year.

I've been observing the sheep closely. They remind me of shoaling fish sometimes. Their favourite pastime is munching, which they do voraciously. Sometimes they want to come towards you, sometimes they want to run away. You can never tell which it's going to be.

They will often, but not always, follow me as I walk over the fields to the station. It's a nice feeling; a gambolling carnival escort, a huge distended, electrified shadow. I never want to go through the gate when I get there. It can be strange at night walking home when you hear them thundering along behind you and you can't see them.

At the abattoir, the innards are removed along with the head and feet. They leave the kidneys in. Lambs' kidneys are the finishing touch to the perfect English breakfast. People seem to struggle more with eating offal than the flesh cuts, but I'm a convert.

There is so little demand for heart and brain that the abattoir doesn't even give you those bits, or the sweetbreads, the pancreas. I first had sweetbreads in France last year; they're impossibly delicious, tender and tasty, the nicest bit of all. I complain about this to Trev, but he says this is the wrong time of year for sweetbreads.

The carcass has been sliced perpendicular to the spine in the centre of the back, so the fat content can be judged. Trev gets his really big saw and bisects the thing along the length of the spine, giving us two sides.

The saw is frighteningly sharp - the first of several shudderingly sharp tools - but the sawing is still physical work.

He lays the first side flat on the block and nicks the bone at the top of the back - the neck end - and invites me to saw off the first chump chop. It's pretty gruesome, but I'm glad I'm doing it myself.

Trev says that normally you don't get these two cuts, one from each side. They are part of the abattoir's commission. They do look like the meatiest lamb chops I have ever seen. "That's dinner," I say.

He saws off the shoulders and the legs, and with a long knife removes the breast and belly, which is very fatty.

I've never managed to do anything good with the breast. He advises me to cook it overnight at a low temperature. He's not wrong.

I want to keep the racks whole, for roasting, but still there are some terrifying moments with a cleaver. It goes so close to Trev's thumb.

There's a ninja quality to his work; one slip and it's all over. This deftness becomes apparent only when he lets me have a go. He bones and rolls the shoulder in about 90 seconds. It's a work of art. The shoulder looks appetising by this point. Trev reckons shoulder is the best bit, so I let him have the other one.

It's all over very quickly. We've got legs, two shoulders, two racks, some lumps for stewing, breast for slow roasting and a bunch of chump chops.

Chopping up my first lamb stayed vividly on my mind for a few days. The anatomy of a sheep is pretty similar to our own, really. I couldn't scratch my ribs without the image of that immaculate carcass springing to mind. I thought about it involuntarily as I lay in bed at night. But, boy, those chump chops were good.

I was a vegetarian for about 17 years. Now here I am, butchering and eating one of my own lambs.

It was the rooks that put an end to it. They came with the farm. We were just about to get married when we laid eyes on the place.

It suggested irresistible pastoral bliss, the full Country Life package - woods, ponds, barns, stables, river frontage. I even found the village cricket pitch on an old map. It looked like the best possible place to play out a marriage.

Through presenting BBC Radio 4's On Your Farm, I've talked to other people involved with agriculture who didn't grow up on farms, or didn't know much when they started. It seems that the decision to become a farmer is always a huge leap of faith.

Fortunately, there are people who can help when you suddenly find yourself with a farm. They're called land agents. I was lucky to find Paddy. I thought it all looked wonderfully pretty, but Paddy explained that the place was more or less a wreck.

Drainage was poor, ditches were blocked, the fences were shot, the hedges needed re-laying, the woodland was out of control. There were rampant thistles and docks.

It had been a beef farm at one time, I'm told, home to the best shorthorn dairy herd in the country. It had not been a good time for beef farmers, and the place had gradually been run into the ground.

Land must be continuously managed. Leave it, and it becomes more and more difficult to get it back into shape. When he put the farm on the market, the beef farmer sold his cattle and rented the fields to a couple of sheep farmers. A grazing let is about the lowest-risk, least-hassle arrangement for a landowner.

The sheep farmers - no one calls them shepherds any more, and they don't have dogs; they have Range Rovers - bring their own electric fences and stock. The sheep just munch everything and keep it all looking tidy.

In return for this, the tenant grazier pays about £50 an acre per year. It's not much, not quite enough to pay the accountant, but land isn't worth a lot - about £3,000 an acre. In a bank, £3,000 would earn more than twice what a sheep farmer pays, but fields are nicer to look at than bank statements. Some people spend their money on art. I guess I bought some nature.

It seemed best to stick with the arrangement that was already in place with the sheep farmers while we improved the land. As part of this process, Paddy insisted that we do something about the rooks.

There were certainly lots of them, a multitude. It's hard to tell exactly how many as they wheel and soar, spectacular and secret, high above the forest. I didn't mind them around the place.

They are a nuisance, though. Along with magpies, jackdaws, ravens and jays, rooks are members of the corvid family. They're tough and clever.

The collective noun for rooks is a parliament, and a parliament of rooks can be deafening. The sheep farmers claim they will peck out newborn lambs' eyes.

This may well not be true, but they do eat other birds' eggs, and if you "let it be", you end up with just rooks. It seemed that the reasonable thing to do was to reduce numbers, to lend a benign hand to the balance of nature, to cull them. Kill them, that is.

Killing rooks is not nice at all. There are no neat boxes for exterminating them; shotguns are the only thing that work and it's a pretty medieval and messy business, which I don't enjoy.

But I felt I was acting for the greater good. It was a hard decision for a vegetarian to make, and the moment I made that decision was the moment I became a farmer.

Farmers have to be responsible for creating a balance in nature. They've got the whole world in their hands, after all.

We really care about animals in Britain, probably more than anywhere else in the world. Still, most people can't tell the difference between a pigeon and a collared dove. It's easy - collared doves taste much nicer. Just kidding.

It is our interest in animal welfare that is leading to changes in farming methods. We're converting to full organic status. Being organic and green is no longer philanthropy; it's simply good business sense.

Sheep farming is, by its nature, quite ethical. They tend to be freerange as that's the cheapest way to raise them. They just roam over the fields. The land must be well-drained, but it's not like you have to soak the soil with chemicals to make grass grow. Sheep have a pretty organic life.

Gradually, agriculture has become a different kind of economy. We want our food to be as cheap as possible; that's the simple reason farming became more intensive.

Nowadays, farmers tend to concentrate on just one thing. There are far fewer farm workers, and the Cotswolds are peppered with beautiful but redundant farm buildings. It's very hard to make money from farming and, as cheap imports proliferate and supermarkets dominate, it's going to get more difficult.

Beef farming is no longer a viable business. We have to import beef because we don't produce enough of it here. It seems ridiculous: roast beef is our national dish - and we'll only have to rely more and more on cheap and intensively farmed imports.

Our local area has been under cultivation for millennia. There are ancient tumuli going back into the mists of time all over the parish.

We have a couple of fields of ridge and furrow, which indicates farming activity here in the Middle Ages. The oldest part of the farmhouse was probably built in the 18th century, right next to a well.

There are wells all around the barnyard. Our plot was at one time part of a vast feudal estate. In its heyday, probably around the time that the posh-ish Victorian wing was built, as well as the dairy shorthorn herd, there would have been many other things happening.

It would have been a model farm, doing a bit of everything. There would have been chickens for eggs and chickens for the table; ditto geese; pigs for curing and pigs for roasting; sheep for wool and for meat. There was a nuttery (which is now extinct) and an orchard, which still remains.

A few dozen people would have worked here, and there would have been arable crops for the livestock and for market, and cereal crops. There was a bakery - I found the traces of the huge old bread oven - and a dairy that would have produced cheese and butter.

Basically, it would have produced more or less everything you would want to find in an upmarket delicatessen in Islington, that trendy part of North London. With the right kind of farm shop on site, I think the old model farm could work again.

That's where I'd like to take things here, eventually. For now, I just have my sheep, or rather my two sheep farmers, and a cheese that's perpetually nearly ready, but we are getting there, slowly. I was talking to the builders early yesterday morning when a man rolled up in a van. He caught my eye and he returned my gaze, squarely. He was wearing a very cool hat. Somehow, I could tell he was here to do some dirty work.

Moments later, I heard a loud crack and went to investigate. He was pumping up the air pistol again, a dead sheep at his feet.

He took the pistol to another sheep's head. I found I couldn't watch. I closed my eyes at the last moment. Crack.

It was horrible. Fred said there was nothing else for it. They were suffering. I can't think of a more humane or reasonable thing to do, but it still put me off my cornflakes.

I've not been to the abattoir yet. I will, though. Everyone should, if only to buy some chump chops.

This article was first published in The Independent, December 27, 2006.



Comment on this Article


The vaccine to prevent every strain of flu

by FIONA MacRAE
29th December 2006

British scientists are on the verge of producing a revolutionary flu vaccine that works against all major types of the disease.

Described as the 'holy grail' of flu vaccines, it would protect against all strains of influenza A - the virus behind both bird flu and the nastiest outbreaks of winter flu.

Just a couple of injections could give long-lasting immunity - unlike the current vaccine which has to be given every year.
The brainchild of scientists at Cambridge biotech firm Acambis, working with Belgian researchers, the vaccine will be tested on humans for the first time in the next few months.

A similar universal flu vaccine, being developed by Swiss vaccine firm Cytos Biotechnology, could also be tested on people in 2007 - and the vaccines on the market in around five years.

Importantly, the vaccines would also be quicker and easier to make than the traditional jabs, meaning vast quantities could be stockpiled against a global outbreak of bird flu.

Martin Bachmann, of Cytos, said: "You could really stockpile it. In the case of a pandemic, that would be a huge advantage.

"If you were to start making a traditional vaccine at the start of a pandemic, there is no way there would be enough."

The Government believes a bird flu pandemic is inevitable, killing 50,000 people in Britain alone.

However, it acknowledges that the bug could be much more lethal - infecting one in two people and claiming more than 700,000 lives.

Normal winter flu can also kill, claiming up to 12,000 lives a year in the UK.

Although a vaccine exists, constant changes in the virus's appearance have until now made it impossible to create just one flu vaccine. Instead a new vaccine is put together each year to protect against the particular strains circulating at that time.

In addition, the virus used in the jab is grown in hen's eggs - a time-consuming process that yields just one shot of vaccine per egg.

The new jabs would be grown in huge vats of bacterial 'soup', with just two pints of liquid providing 10,000 doses of vaccine.

Current flu vaccines focus on two proteins on the surface of the virus. However, these constantly mutate in a bid to fool the immune system, making it impossible for vaccine manufacturers to keep up with the creation of each new strain.

The universal vaccines focus on a different protein called M2, which has barely changed during the last 100 years.

The protein is found in all types of Influenza A, including the current bird flu and the virus that caused the 1918 Spanish flu pandemic which killed up to 50 million across the globe.

Normally, such vaccines would have to go through at least five years of human tests before going on the market. However, if a bird flu pandemic occurs before that, they could be made more quickly available.

Zurich-based Cytos, which is also developing anti-smoking and obesity vaccines, has showed that its version of the jab stops mice dying from a dose of flu strong enough to kill them four-times over.

The vaccinated animals were also spared the fever that normally goes along with flu.

Although it is too early to say what the effect would be in humans, an initial course of two or three shots could provide long-lasting immunity, topped up with booster shots given every five to ten years.

Dr Ashley Birkett, of Acambis, said: "It wouldn't be that one shot protects for life but you would need fewer doses over your lifetime."

In addition, the jabs could be produced in vast quantities and stockpiled ahead of a flu pandemic - or even given to people in advance.

In contrast, a traditionally-produced vaccine, matched to the specific strain of flu, would not be available until around six months after the start of the pandemic.

The new vaccines only protect against influenza A - the version of the bug responsible for pandemic flu and the most severe cases of winter flu.

However, it may also be possible to create a similar jab against influenza B, which causes a milder form of winter flu.

Professor John Oxford, Britain's leading flu expert, said the development of a universal vaccine was the "holy grail" of flu research.

He added: "If you get a M2 vaccine which protects against the whole caboodle in the same vaccine, the possibilities are huge."

But, others cautioned that there is no guarantee that the jabs would be as effective in humans as it has been in animals.

Virologist Professor Ian Jones, of the University of Reading, said: "It is an encouraging technique which may have a role to play but it is too soon to assume that it will translate into a universal vaccine in the human population."

Dr Jim Robertson, a vaccine expert from the government-funded National Institute for Biological Standards and Control, said the main advantage of a universal jab would be lasting immunity.

"If it works, it will be lovely," he said. "The best result would be that it would last for a long, long time."

Dr Ron Cutler, an infectious diseases expert from the University of East London, said: "Continual protection would be a tremendous advantage against flu."

He cautioned however, that there is no guarantee that the M2 protein will not mutate in the future - meaning the jab will have to be regularly reformulated.



Comment on this Article


Old Year, New Year


2007: will the dam break? - In 2006 Bush's foreign policy was decisively rejected by voters. And 2007 could see his deficit budget get a sharp comeuppance.

Joseph Stiglitz
December 29, 2006

The world survived 2006 without a major economic catastrophe, despite sky-high oil prices and a Middle East spiralling out of control. But the year produced abundant lessons for the global economy, as well as warning signs concerning its future performance.

Unsurprisingly, 2006 brought another resounding rejection of fundamentalist neo-liberal policies, this time by voters in Nicaragua and Ecuador. Meanwhile, in neighboring Venezuela, Hugo Chávez won overwhelming electoral support: at least he had brought some education and healthcare to the poor barrios, which previously had received little of the benefits of the country's enormous oil wealth.

Perhaps most importantly for the world, voters in the United States gave a vote of no confidence to President George W Bush, who will now be held in check by a Democratic congress.
When Bush assumed the presidency in 2001, many hoped that he would govern competently from the center. More pessimistic critics consoled themselves by questioning how much harm a president can do in a few years. We now know the answer: a great deal.

Never has America's standing in the world's eyes been lower. Basic values that Americans regard as central to their identity have been subverted. The unthinkable has occurred: an American president defending the use of torture, using technicalities in interpreting the Geneva Conventions and ignoring the Convention on Torture, which forbids it under any circumstances. Likewise, whereas Bush was hailed as the first "MBA president," corruption and incompetence have reigned under his administration, from the botched response to Hurricane Katrina to its conduct of the wars in Afghanistan and Iraq.

In fact, we should be careful not to read too much into the 2006 vote: Americans do not like being on the losing side of any war. It was this failure, and the quagmire into which America had once again so confidently stepped, that led voters to reject Bush. But the Middle East chaos wrought by the Bush years also represents a central risk to the global economy. Since the Iraq war began in 2003, oil output from the Middle East, which has the world's lowest-cost producers, has not grown as expected to meet rising world demand. Although most forecasts suggest that oil prices will remain at or slightly below their current level, this is largely due to a perceived moderation of growth in demand, led by a slowing US economy.

Of course, a slowing US economy constitutes another major global risk. At the root of America's economic problems are measures adopted early in Bush's first term. In particular, the administration pushed through a tax cut that largely failed to stimulate the economy, because it was designed to benefit mainly the wealthiest taxpayers. The burden of stimulation was placed on the Fed, which lowered interest rates to unprecedented levels. While cheap money had little impact on business investment, it fueled a real estate bubble, which is now bursting, jeopardizing households that borrowed against rising home values to sustain consumption.

This economic strategy was clearly untenable. Household savings became negative for the first time since the Great Depression, with the country as a whole borrowing $3bn a day from foreigners. But households could continue to take money out of their houses only as long as prices continued to rise and interest rates remained low. Thus, higher interest rates and falling house prices do not bode well for the American economy. Indeed, according to some estimates, roughly 80% of the increase in employment and almost two thirds of the increase in GDP in recent years stemmed directly or indirectly from real estate.

Making matters worse, unrestrained government spending further buoyed the economy during the Bush years, with fiscal deficits reaching new heights, making it difficult for the government to step in now to shore up economic growth as households curtail consumption. Indeed, many Democrats, having campaigned on a promise to return to fiscal sanity, are likely to demand a reduction in the deficit, which would further dampen growth.

Meanwhile, persistent global imbalances will continue to produce anxiety, especially for those whose lives depend on exchange rates. Though Bush has long sought to blame others, it is clear that America's unbridled consumption and inability to live within its means is the major cause of these imbalances. Unless that changes, global imbalances will continue to be a source of global instability, regardless of what China or Europe do.

In light of all of these uncertainties, the mystery is how risk premiums can remain as low as they are. Especially given the sharp brake on growth in global liquidity as central banks have raised interest rates, the prospect of risk premiums returning to more normal levels is itself one of the major risks the world faces today.

For the last few years, some bearish economists have warned about America's real estate boom, its consumption binge, global imbalances, and even unreasonably low-risk premiums; but somehow America, and the world, has muddled through. Some conclude that this proves that, even with poor political leadership, we can muddle through for still another year. Perhaps so. But perhaps not: muddling through has in some respects worsened the underlying problems, making the inevitable adjustments all the more painful. Indeed, that may be the main lesson we learn in 2007.

Copyright: Project Syndicate, 2006.



Comment on this Article


Just imagine what might be, if only Labour dared

Polly Toynbee
Friday December 29, 2006
The Guardian

With regime change due at the top of the party in 2007, it's time to break free from the daily grind of limited possibilities

New year resolutions may be wildly unrealistic, trying to be nicer, thinner, kinder, fitter, more generous, more patient and every other good thing. But even if experience knows that resolutions are bound to be broken within days, if not hours, that's no reason not to contemplate doing better. So the same is true of politics. Next year will bring regime change at the top. In this low season for an administration that sometimes seems lost in a fog of government, drained of purpose by daily drudgery, here are some optimistic but not wildly unrealistic resolutions it might at least consider:
- Start with acts of contrition for past political sins committed by all parties. Bring in state financing of parties, with a strict cap on all spending over the electoral cycle and a ban on all money-raising except from fixed individual membership subscriptions. Give each voter the power to allocate their share of party funds by ticking a box on the ballot paper to stop a carve-up by the main parties, a good incentive to parties to get every vote out even in the safest seats.

- Encourage citizens to vote with a bonus off their council tax; if they still won't turn out, make voting compulsory. Make it more enticing with the alternative vote, letting voters put their choices in 1, 2 ,3 order, choosing small parties closer to their views, while still using their second choice to keep out the party they most fear. As it keeps the link between MP and constituency, it can be done for the next election while reforming the Lords. If any party fears losing out under the alternative vote, let it support full proportional representation.

- Prove British democracy is not in hock to press barons, despite the humiliating courting of these political thugs. Restore the laws limiting media ownership by any one magnate, abolished by Margaret Thatcher to let Rupert Murdoch acquire his empire, so that he now owns over 40% of the press plus ever more dominant Sky.

- Fix the BBC's future with a legal guarantee of at least inflation-proof rises in the licence fee, free of political intervention in perpetuity. (Tessa Jowell should resign in protest if she fails to secure the BBC steady state funding as a bare minimum.) The licence fee is a bargain.

- Turn the Low Pay Commission into the Pay Commission, with a duty to recommend not just the minimum wage rate but to comment on the dysfunctions and dislocations caused by out-of-control pay at the top, now fracturing middle pay rates, inflating house prices, raising interest rates and harming all. It should comment too on migration and its effect on pay rates.

- Create a standing tax commission to expose who pays what and how fat cats squeeze through loopholes. Get tough on tax exiles: cut the time they can spend here tax-free while stashing their cash in Jersey or Monaco, losing the Treasury escalating sums as the UK turns tax haven itself. Bring a top tax band at £100,000 as an opportunity tax, earmarked to pay for new life chances for left-behind children. Make Every Child Matters a reality, with Sure Start a genuine universal guarantee that every child gets wrap-around help from well-qualified professionals to rescue all at risk. Labour's great idea, 10 years on, is still often only a half-fulfilled promise.

- Cut crime at a stroke: let clinics prescribe enough heroin to addicts daily to stop them mugging, stealing and turning to prostitution to support a habit. Lives can be stabilised on regular heroin and that is also the best hope of getting chaotic addicts into rehab.

- Begin again on foreign policy and, as Chirac departs, turn back to the EU. Europe is the world's best hope on climate change, the only grouping of nations with the power and intent to tackle it. Make carbon trading work, invite in the rest of the world, and create and donate clean technologies to China and India.

- Give the climate change bill teeth. The public is ready to change its habits, but is waiting for strong leadership to say what everyone knows must be done.

- Merger and acquisition mania is back in the City with renewed ferocity. Boasts about "inward investment" to Britain are often just a sign on the borders saying Britain for Sale, in ways that amaze other countries. Water, gas, airports and other essentials are up for grabs to asset-strippers who borrow to tear companies apart regardless of anything but vast profits for the fixers. Time to cap City kickbacks that are the only reason for many of the most destructive deals.

- Grasp David Cameron's suggestion that, alongside measuring GDP, there should be a general wellbeing index. Hard cash is the tangible proof of a government's success, yet money is only the means to greater political ends. Without measuring who is spending it on what, crude GDP reveals little about the state of a nation. For decades there have been reliable measures of relative national happiness: countries with least inequality are the happiest. (Yes, the Nordics come top.) Cameron never considered the full implications, but moving the index upwards would require a radical shift in priorities to alleviate the worst suffering of the depressed and mentally ill, of neglected children or old people needing kinder care. If he really wants governments to be judged by a felicific calculus, then letting a billionaire acquire another £1m would score virtually nil. The loudest voices of the most powerful would no longer command the best of everything, since getting their way would do nothing for the wellbeing index.

New year's resolutions are only good intentions. But it is better to have them than not even to try. After 10 years, Labour is too stuck in the daily grind of limited possibilities, forgetting how to imagine what might be if only it dared, if only it had the nerve. The above are not that difficult, and more could be added; implementing just a few would shift the can't-do gloom Labour has fallen into and change the grey spirit of the times.

polly.toynbee@guardian.co.uk



Comment on this Article


Review of the year: Bush's America - A lame duck, presiding over a lost cause

By Rupert Cornwell
29 December 2006

Three years ago the US brought regime change in Iraq. Now Iraq has returned the favour. George W Bush, to the dismay of much of the world, could remain President of the United States until 20 January 2009. But in last month's mid-term elections, his Republican Party surrendered control of both House and Senate to the Democrats for the first time in a dozen years - the term "lame duck" does scant justice to the extent to which Bush has been diminished. In each case the prime reason was the President's disastrous war.
It was no ordinary defeat on 7 November. In the House, where the Democrats made a net gain of 29 seats, the losses were limited by a decade of redrawing (more politely, gerrymandering) of congressional districts that has greatly increased the number of rock-safe seats for both parties. But psychologically it was a landslide to match 1994, when the Republicans captured a net 52 House seats to sweep the Democrats from power. In the Senate the outcome was even more stunning - the Democrats made a net gain of six seats, larger than even most partisans had dared hope, lifting the party to a 51-49 majority. The elections had been a perfect storm, where domestic incompetence, the stain of corruption and foreign policy failure collided to change the face of US politics, perhaps for many years. First and foremost among the reasons was Iraq.

In 2004 voters gave Bush the benefit of the doubt. This time, though, their patience ran out - at the incompetence and arrogance of power and its refusal to face facts, its inability to take responsibility for the mistakes it made, or to recognise the damage inflicted on the reputation and moral authority of the US in the wider world.

Americans now understand they have been led into a war apparently without end. The Iraq debacle was best summed up by retired general Anthony Zinni, arguably the sharpest strategic thinker produced by the US military in recent times: "We made a mess in the worst possible place we could have made a mess." Barring a miracle, Iraq will surely go down as one of the greatest, even the greatest, foreign policy blunder in the country's history.

America has been here before. Ronald Reagan in 1986, and Bill Clinton in 1994, were sitting presidents whose parties took a mid-term hammering. Both also suffered huge second-term embarrassments: the Iran-Contra affair in the case of Reagan, the Monica Lewinsky scandal for Clinton. But both recovered and left office amid high popularity.

Bush, however, is in a different position. His approval rating is around 35 per cent, with little prospect of improvement. The US is trapped in the no-man's land that is Antonio Gramsci's definition of a crisis, "When the old is dead and the new cannot be born" (or not until that January inauguration day two years hence).

The president who most closely resembles Bush is Lyndon Johnson, who had his own unpopular and ever more obviously unwinnable war. Vietnam prompted LBJ not to run for office again. Johnson made his announcement on 31 March 1968, and within barely seven months the country had a new president. George W Bush will be in the Oval Office until 2009, facing a hostile Congress and no longer in command of even his own party.

In retrospect, two dates stand out. The first is 7 November. Within 24 hours Donald Rumsfeld, the Defense Secretary who had been the lightning rod for the war, was forced to resign. Many Republicans claimed that had he gone a month earlier, the Senate at least could have been saved.

Characteristically, Rumsfeld was unyielding to the last. The air positively crackled in the Oval Office as President Bush stood between the outgoing Pentagon chief and the man chosen to replace him, the former CIA director Robert Gates. The fault was not his, Rumsfeld made clear. It was the American people who had so rebuked him at the ballot box - who had failed to understand what the war was about.

The second date was 6 December. Tony Blair had just arrived for a miserable summit and a press conference at which Bush was asked whether he actually understood what was happening in Iraq. More pertinent were two other events that day. In the morning, the congressionally mandated Iraq Study Group, a bipartisan panel headed by former secretary of state James Baker, went to the White House to deliver its damning verdict on the Iraq mess. Hours later, at the other end of Pennsylvania Avenue, Congress overwhelmingly approved Gates as the new Defense Secretary, by 95 votes to two.

The extent to which Iraq policy will change under Gates is as yet unclear. But the change in style was instant. Gone was the brusque, domineering Rumsfeld, unheeding of advice, ever certain he was right. In had come the crafty Gates, lower key and more cerebral, and like Baker an exponent of the "realist" school of foreign policy associated with President Bush the father. Bush the son, who had used the "war on terror" to greatly expand presidential powers and prerogatives, seemed by the year's end to have lost control of events - even inside his own administration.

For along with the "realists" that Bush junior once despised, leaks too have returned to Washington. For his first five years, Bush ran the tightest presidential ship in memory. But the floodgates have opened, first in a series of books, one of which revealed the existence of a secret programme of government eavesdropping without warrants, introduced in the name of the "war on terror". Then within the space of less than a week, The New York Times chalked up a couple of blockbusters. First it obtained a memo by Stephen Hadley, Bush's national security adviser, expressing grave doubts about Nouri al-Maliki, the Iraqi Prime Minister whom the administration effusively backed in public. Then it published a secret memo on the war from Rumsfeld in his final weeks at the Pentagon, whose dismal tone was utterly at variance with his upbeat public statements. In the US as everywhere, a leaking government is a sinking government.

But the Republican meltdown at the polls is not fully explained by either Iraq or the other inadequacies of a President ranked by some historians as the worst ever. This disaster has been a long time in the making - perhaps from the day the swaggering Newt Gingrich led his troops to victory in the Congressional elections of November 1994. The Republicans won then because Democrats had grown corrupt, lazy and out of touch after 40-odd years of power. It took them barely a decade to fall into the same trap.

The 109th Congress, which wrapped up its business on 9 December, must rank among the worst ever. The House of Representatives sat for just 102 days in 2006, fewer even than the "do-nothing Congress" of 1948. Though the Republican Party controlled both the White House and Capitol Hill, it failed in its most elementary constitutional duty by passing only two of the 12 bills funding the federal government in the current fiscal year. Much of its time was spent not on matters of concern to ordinary Americans, such as social security or immigration reform, but on symbolic issues such as the sanctity of heterosexual marriage and flag-burning. Unsurprisingly, Congress' approval rating is now even lower than that of the President. Equally unsurprisingly, the Republicans were blamed.

Then there were the scandals: first and foremost the one centred on the disgraced lobbyist Jack Abramoff, he of the Indian tribes rip-off and the all-expenses-paid golfing trips to St Andrews for Republican pals on the Hill. In 2005, the Abramoff connection forced the once-mighty House majority leader Tom DeLay to resign. This year Bob Ney, a senior Ohio congressman, pleaded guilty to influence-peddling charges and faces two years or more in jail when he is sentenced next month.

Separately, Randy "Duke" Cunningham, a flamboyant Republican congressman from California and born-again Christian, was jailed for eight years in March for taking over $2m in bribes from defence contractors. For many voters the case summed up the hypocrisy of politics as practiced by the type of Republican who wears religion on his sleeve. That impression was only confirmed by the devastating Mark Foley scandal that broke five weeks before the vote.

Foley was a senior Florida Republican who had made his name on Capitol Hill as an opponent of child pornography and as chairman of the House Caucus on Missing and Exploited Children. It then emerged that for years Foley had been an exploiter himself, sending sexually explicit e-mails and instant messages to young men he had known when they were teenage congressional pages. It further emerged that the Republican leadership had been given at least some idea of Foley's predatory behaviour as long ago as 2003.

The scandal deeply upset many Christian conservatives, one of the most important Republican constituencies, and may have kept some away from the polls on 7 November. And if that were not enough, a former Bush official wrote a book alleging, inter alia, that White House aides privately mocked the Christian right, even as they made a fuss of them in public.

Last but not least are the deepening ideological divides within Republican ranks. The party has long been a broad church - but now the side walls are so far apart that the roof is falling in.

Iraq, of course, is a part of the problem. The descent into civil war has deepened the rift between the "realists" and the discredited neo-conservatives who have made the foreign-policy running under Bush. It has also emboldened the isolationist, fortress-America wing of the party that loathes all foreign entanglements. The latter has been on one side of the bitterly fought immigration issue, pitting it against pro-business Republicans (among them President Bush) who favour a normalisation of the process and offering a path to citizenship to millions who have come to the US illegally.

Fiscal conservatives - another traditional Republican constituency - are appalled at the huge trade and budget deficits run by this administration. Libertarians who want the government to confine itself to government were horrified by the way in which the leadership and the White House injected themselves into Terry Schiavo's right-to-die legal case, a blatant act of pandering to the religious right. In 2006 Karl Rove, Bush's erstwhile electoral magician, gambled on getting out the Republican base. But he foundered on the question: which base? By the time voting day arrived, all that was required of Democrats was not to be Republicans.

Maybe voters on 7 November registered their dislike of the one-party control of the executive and legislature that had eroded the checks and balances vital to the US system of government - a failure most notable in the oversight of the Iraq war. In fact, Congress may actually have edged rightward last month. Many of the Republicans who lost were moderates, while some newly elected Democrats are little different from those they defeated. America remains conservative, and could return a Republican Congress in 2008, especially if the new Democrats on Capitol Hill fail to deliver. Far short of the veto-overturning majority of two-thirds in either House or Senate, the incoming speaker Nancy Pelosi will have to strike deals with the President if any significant legislation is to pass.

Equally possibly, however, American politics may be undergoing one of its twice- or three-times-in-a-century shifts. A Republican era of dominance that began in the late 1960s may be drawing to an end. The mid-term results may not have been merely a massive vote of no confidence in the President. They suggest that the once "natural majority" party is being penned back to the south and west. The Democrats not only own the two coasts, but are gaining ground in the Midwest and the fast-growing south-west. If so, then Iraq may have precipitated not just regime change in the US, but a quiet generational political revolution as well.



Comment on this Article


Review of the year: The Middle East - Pray for little countries that believe in empty promises of a superpower

By Robert Fisk
29 December 2006

If Lebanon survives into next year, it will be the only "democracy" in the Arab world to have done so. Afghanistan is crumbling, Iraq is already a mass grave. The Palestinians face their own inter-factional catastrophe. But desperate for the help of Syria and Iran to ease his trapped legions from Iraq, Bush is now urged to deal with Israel's Arab opponents. By year's end, the UN's tribunal investigator was no longer blaming Syria for Hariri's murder and the Lebanese awaited their second betrayal by the US: to be fed back to Damascus in return for salvation in Iraq. The world should watch what happens to little countries that believe in the promises of a superpower - and pray for their salvation.

By this month, Lebanon's sectarian crisis, its attempted coups d'état (by the Iranians, by the Syrians, by the US, take your pick) had struck even the humble journalist. Each year at this time, I renew my residence card. To receive my card from the office of "General Security" at a whacking cost of around £1,300, I need a valid government-issued press card. To receive my press card, I need to present the Lebanese ministry of information with a valid work permit. And to receive a work permit, I have to ask the minister of labour for his signature on an insurance document. But - reader, you may have guessed - the Lebanese minister of labour is an elected member of the Hizbollah. And the Hizbollah - along with other Shia ministers - has resigned from the elected government of Fouad Siniora in an attempt to overthrow it, create a "national unity" government with more pro-Syrian ministers and, if you believe Siniora's supporters, prevent the UN tribunal into the murder of the ex-prime minister, Rafiq Hariri, last year from ever arresting the culprits.

So after 30 years of legal residency in Lebanon, I now have to apply for a humble tourist visa each time I arrive at the airport that is named after the man whose assassination changed the political face of the country in 2005 and produced elections that, for the first time in decades, freed the nation from Syrian hegemony and forced Damascus to withdraw its 22,000 soldiers. It didn't prevent the continued murder of Syrian opponents in Lebanon, but those of us who live there no longer had to look over our shoulders when we talked politics in Beirut's best restaurants - or, at least, we could glance over our shoulders more briefly than before. The US had promised to protect what the State Department called Lebanon's "Cedars Revolution". Well, maybe.

So when 2006 began, Lebanon felt like a safe home again - for its people as well as foreigners. There were "conciliation" talks in parliament between men with blood on their hands and men who have no blood on their hands (yet). General Michel Aoun, the crazed Christian ex-army officer who had returned from exile to found his own political party, the Druze leader Walid Jumblatt, Rafiq Hariri's son Saad, the Christian ex-militia murderer Samir Geagea, even the Hizbollah leader Sayed Hassan Nasrallah, gathered in central Beirut for coffee, croissants and manouches (a thick, toasted cheese sandwich) to discuss how they would work together in the new "Syrian-free" Lebanon (the quotation marks are a necessary precaution). The problem they had to confront - and preferred to avoid, especially Nasrallah - was that the same UN Security Council Resolution that successfully called for the Syrian withdrawal from Lebanon, also called for Syria's Hizbollah guerrilla allies, whose weapons come from Iran, to be disarmed.

Since it had been the Hizbollah that had largely driven the Israeli army out of Lebanon in 2000 (and since the resolution looked, even to Jumblatt and others, like a US attempt to "soften up" a powerless Lebanon for a peace treaty with Israel), it was agreed that the future of Nasrallah's earnest and ferocious young men would be regarded as a local, Lebanese issue rather than an international demand. But the US and France, who had sponsored the UN resolution, continued to ask when they could expect the Hizbollah to abide by the UN's instructions. Save for a few desultory incursions across the UN's blue line to attack an Israeli held-district called Shebaa Farms (which was Lebanese under the pre-Second World War French mandate but was regarded by the Israelis as occupied Syria), the Hizbollah was silent; Nasrallah even indicated to the Lebanese government, in which it had two ministers, to expect a quiet summer.

But on 12 July, it struck across the border and seized two Israeli soldiers, killing three others. Four other Israeli troops would be killed that same day when their tank was blown up by a mine. Israeli forces had many times captured or kidnapped Hizbollah men in Lebanon without eliciting a massive bombardment from the guerrillas, or any protest from the world. But Israel's response to its soldiers' capture was a bombardment of Lebanon that pulverised hundreds of villages, the Beirut suburbs, more than 40 road bridges, factories and civilian homes in the capital, along with the headquarters of the Hizbollah itself. The latter responded with thousands of new, long-range rockets into Israel, hitting Haifa and other northern cities.

The Israelis blamed Siniora's powerless government, and the US, hoping that Israel could fulfil its hopeless boast that it would destroy the Hizbollah (and thus intimidate Iran into abandoning its nuclear ambitions) postponed any talk of a ceasefire. George W Bush, along, of course, with Tony Blair, allowed the bombs to keep falling on Lebanon, killing a total of 1,300 civilians and a handful of guerrillas and causing billions of dollars' worth of damage. So much for Washington's support for Lebanon's democracy.

Hizbollah might not have won its "divine victory", but Israel certainly lost (Bush said the opposite, of course). Its soldiers fought to a standstill after one of its warships was set afire, its top-secret air-traffic control centre was hit by missiles, several of its major cities were struck by rockets and 40 Israeli troops were killed inside Lebanon in 36 hours. Fewer than 200 of its people were killed, more than half of them soldiers. The world, as usual, promised to rebuild Lebanon. The UN force in southern Lebanon was expanded to include thousands of Nato troops and the Lebanese acknowledged - at first - Hizbollah's courage. But as the scale of the destruction to the country and the millions of cluster bomblets with which the Israelis had soaked southern Lebanon was discovered, Hizbollah was held to account.

Which was when Nasrallah began to demand the overthrow of the "traitor" Siniora, whose government was "owned" by the US ambassador, whose ministers had supposedly urged the US to arrange an Israeli attack on Lebanon. The Hizbollah, in alliance with Aoun's Christians (he probably thought he might be made president) called for the overthrow of the non-Shiite Lebanese cabinet. Lebanon's Christians were now dangerously divided between two factions: those loyal to the messianic Aoun and those who followed Geagea's gangster politics. And, to place Lebanon even closer to the ghosts of the civil war, the Christian minister Pierre Gemayel was killed in east Beirut last month. The assassins were still at work.

If Lebanon survives into next year, it will be the only "democracy" in the Arab world to have done so. Afghanistan is crumbling, Iraq is already a mass grave. The Palestinians face their own inter-factional catastrophe. But desperate for the help of Syria and Iran to ease his trapped legions from Iraq, Bush is now urged to deal with Israel's Arab opponents. By year's end, the UN's tribunal investigator was no longer blaming Syria for Hariri's murder and the Lebanese awaited their second betrayal by the US: to be fed back to Damascus in return for salvation in Iraq. The world should watch what happens to little countries that believe in the promises of a superpower - and pray for their salvation.




Comment on this Article


North Europe to welcome new year with ice-free Baltic Sea

AFP
29 Dec 06

TALLINN - Northern Europeans have been poised to celebrate the passage to the new year in a way that is out of the ordinary for them: with an ice-free Baltic Sea.

"It's quite unusual that we welcome the new year with no ice in the Baltic Sea," Tarmo Kouts, senior researcher at the Estonian Marine Institute, told AFP on Friday.

Temperatures in Estonian coastal waters are warmer by one degree Celsius (around three degrees Fahrenheit) than at the end of last year, Kouts said.
"The temperature of 1C in the Bay of Parnu means conditions are ready for ice formation, if only we had at least a week of sub-zero temperatures," Kouts said.

"But the forecast shows mild weather continuing into the New Year."

Still, he assured, the sea could freeze this winter.

"It would take up to 10 days of freezing temperatures and we would see ice forming in the coastal areas," Kouts said.

"It's too early to rule out ice altogether for this winter."

Winters with little ice in the Baltic Sea are happening more frequently, and often it is only the Bay of Parnu in Estonia and the Gulf of Bothnia near Finland and Sweden that develop a layer of ice.

The warm winters of recent years stem from climatic change, but do not yet indicate an irreversible trend, Kouts said.

According to Kouts, the last time the region had particularly warm winters was in the late 1980s and early 1990s, when four winters in a row saw above-average temperatures.

To find a similar series of warm winters before that, you would have to go back several hundred years, he said.

Meanwhile, the winter of 2002-2003 was significantly colder than average, Kouts said.



Comment on this Article


2006 A Year End Wrapup: UFO Digest

by Dirk Vander Ploeg
28 Dec 06

This year, 2006, has been a watershed of sorts in the field of UFOlogy.

From the stories I have investigated, to those contributed by writers and those from eyewitnesses, 2006 was indeed a monumental and unforgettable year for ufodigest.com and ufologists.

I was discussing this very thought with Errol Bruce-Knapp, host of The Virtually Strange Network and the radio program Strange Days...Indeed (CFRB Toronto, Canada). Something was in the air we agreed. Sightings, some of a remarkable nature, were being reported monthly if not weekly and this phenomena seemed to be increasing. We could both remember when a single sighting of significance would incur once every few years or at best annually. Now it seemed the floodgates were opening, inch by inch, and month by month.
We suddenly became witnesses other than reporters. Photographic proof was evident of dramatic events. Obscure and blurry dots and streaks of unknown origin were replaced with large objects seemingly posing for the camera. Many of these photographs were taken while the objects themselves remained invisible until the photos were examined.

Some of the objects hovered over lakes or near historical buildings. Others were photographed possibly entering or exiting vortexes, appearing very similar in appearance to aircraft breaking the sound barrier. One tourist in Greece while capturing a panoramic night shoot of the mountains captured a truly remarkable photograph that clearly shows 4 - 7 unknown objects moving from left to right. The Great Lakes Dive company announced that they had discovered the wreckage of the F-89 Scorpion aircraft that allegedly crashed in 1953 while investigating an UFO spotted on radar.Extreme close-ups of these photos indicate classic UFO shaped objects. Odd shaped objects, rectangles, cubes, acorns and others have been photographed around the world at air-shows, skydiving and other public events.

The following is just a sampling of some of our more spectacular sightings, reports and articles.

The Kinross Incident

The Great Lakes Dive company announced that they had discovered the wreckage of the F-89 Scorpion aircraft that allegedly crashed in 1953 while investigating an UFO spotted on radar. This particular story, albeit real or hoax, has caused considerable controversy because certain elements of the story can't be validated and other individuals are paranoid that the military industrial complex will fly in, under the cover of darkness, and scoop up the mysterious wreckage.

The mystery surrounding the 1953 "Kinross Case" may well be on its way to being solved. The "Kinross Case", so called for the name of the air force base (AFB) from which the plane departed, involves the disappearance of a fighter jet and its crew, pilot Felix Moncla and radar observer Robert Wilson, sent to investigate an unknown object that was tracked on radar.

A Michigan based company, The Great Lakes Dive Company, announced in 2005 that they had discovered the wreckage of a F-89 and an unknown object at the bottom of Lake Superior. The objects were located at a depth of at least 250 feet. Ufologists, who have been investigating this case, have been waiting for the results of side scan sonar and remotely operated vehicles (ROV) imaging that was to commence in 2006.

The company is owned by a group of Michigan engineers and divers who share a common interest in shipwreck hunting and historical preservation.

The history and mythology of the Kinross Case began on November 23, 1953. A US Air Force F-89 jet fighter was scrambled from the Kinross AFB in Michigan. The plane known as the Scorpion was sent on an "active air defense mission" to intercept an "unknown object." Speculation as to the identity of the object has been the subject of debate for over 50 years.

American officials claim that the object was simply a Canadian aircraft, while Canadian officials deny the claim, citing that there were no Canadian aircraft in the vicinity at the time of the incident.

The following is extracted from the official accident report:

Aircraft took off at 2322 Zebra 23 Nov 53 on an active Air Defense Mission to intercept an unknown aircraft approximately 160 miles Northwest of Kinross Air Force Base. The aircraft was under radar control throughout the interception. At approximately 2352 Zebra the last radio contact was made by the radar station controlling the interception. At approximately 2355 Zebra the unknown aircraft and the F-89 merged together on the radar scope. Shortly thereafter the IFF signal disappeared from the radar scope. No further contact was established with the F-89. (The next 16 or so letters as well as the entire next sentence have been blacked out by Air Force censors) An extensive aerial search has revealed no trace of the aircraft. The aircraft and its crew are still missing.

Radar operators claim that the F-89 and the unknown object seemed to merge on their radar screens. At about the same time as the "blips" seemed to collide, both voice and identification friend or foe (IFF) contact were lost. According to reports, after the two objects came together, only one object, the original rogue object remained and it appeared not be affected as it continued on its original course and speed.

A large scale search was immediately launched. Its important to note that the aircraft was lost in late November and although the weather was stable, it was winter, snow covered the ground and the water of Lake Superior was freezing.

In the summer of 2005 The Great Lakes Dive company was testing some new equipment - wide trajectory side scan sonar and were so impressed by the initial results that they decided to search for a pair of French minesweepers, named the Cerisoles and its sister ship the Inkermann, that were lost in lake Superior in 1919. Unfortunately, they experienced glitches with their equipment and by the time the problems were corrected it was too late in the year for a full search that could take several months to complete.

Actual image of the missing plane. Used with permission of The Great Lakes Dive Company.
So they put off their search for the minesweepers and decided to attempt to solve the mystery of the missing plane, known as the "Kinross Case". Radar information and the original search grid were available as to where the F-89 was believed to have gone down, so the company had area to investigate. They had just begun searching the area, using the new wide trajectory side scan sonar, and on their first pass located an object on the bottom. It was a plane and the scans proved it was a F-89. The port (left) wing was missing, probably sheared off as well as a piece of the rear tail wing. The starboard (right) wing was partially buried, due to the crash or the gradual build up of silt over the years.

Further evidence was uncovered using Hi Res scans which show that the canopy and the fuselage of the aircraft were intact. The groups took a total of 28 passes over the area, but were unsuccessful in finding the missing wing and tail section. "We have not been able to confirm that the bodies of the two pilots are inside the aircraft", explained Adam Jimenez, spokesman for the company ,"but with the canopy intact, one would assume that would be the case. However, the ROV survey would tell the tale."

Jimenez stated, "We have confirmed the identity of the F-89 using several techniques. First, the general design of the aircraft is a complete match. Our scan shows an upswept tail section which is a design characteristic of only the F-89 (hence the model name "Scorpion"). Second, this aircraft has a wing pod. Also a design match to the F-89. Also the canopy location is a match. There are also other exact matches that I can't go into at this time. There were no other F-89s or similar aircraft lost over the middle of Lake Superior."

Jimenez describes the unknown as, "The object that the F-89 collided with is metallic and plowed into the lake bed in a similar manner as the F-89 south of the aircraft wreckage. The object bears a strike mark that matches a hole where the port side wing of the F-89 used to be (this supports the collision theory). We are a little baffled by the actual physics of the crash though...if you can imagine a plane colliding with another object and a wing shearing away, it seems as though the plane would spin out of control and disintegrate on the surface of the lake. Also, the plane is in deep water, yet appears to be plowed into the lake bed, how could the plane (or object for that matter) maintain enough power to accomplish this. I'm telling you this because we don't have all of the answers to this mystery yet. Our best guess is that the collision took place at or near sea level at relatively low speed. This scenario would preserve most of the aircraft structure, but still doesn't account for the plowing. We do have side scans of the object, and are currently discussing the possibility of releasing them."

There has been a lot of discussion within the team about the mystery object... but without ROV footage, it is very hard to determine what exactly it is. It is not a part of the F-89, and does not appear to be a part off of another aircraft...it is simply a mysterious object.

But like all great quests this one has hit a snag!

"2006 began as an ambitious project season for us, we were looking forward to further work at the F-89 site", said Jimenez . He added, "Then we received some bad news. The Canadian government refused to allow us to use our ROV at the wreck site without first providing them the GPS coordinates of the site and allows either a Coast Guard escort or government official to accompany the expedition. We were stuck, we don't want to give up the site (especially because of the object, and it's potentially huge significance) but we need stay on the good side of the Canadians due to our Gunilda project which involves a lot of other contributors."

The Gunilda is rumored to be a treasure ship that sank in 1911 and lies 265 feet below Lake Superior. The Great Lakes Dive company plans to provide a high definition view of the famous wreck. Their plan involves lowering twin light towers, provided by Cinemarine, to illuminate the entire shipwreck. ROVs, equipped with cameras will explore the interior of the historical ship.

"So as it stands now, we have just issued a letter to the Canadian government essentially abandoning work on the F-89 site this season", sums up Jimenez.

The company plans to produce a feature length documentary of the search and discovery of the F-89 and its mysterious companion.



Comment on this Article


2006: A year of invention - Patent Sleuth turns up some strange things

Tom Simonite
NewScientist.com news service
29 Dec 06

For more than 30 years, patent sleuth Barry Fox has trawled the US patent applications for New Scientist. Here we provide a round-up of his most interesting, surprising and sometimes alarming, discoveries of 2006.
Weapons patents can sound dead serious, dead ridiculous or both at once. One of this years most discussed suggestions was for bullets that required a password before the handgun could fire.

Another patent took a different approach to gun safety. The 'I've-been-shot gun' would aid policemen or soldiers by connecting wirelessly and informing HQ when and where it has been fired.

But why not do away with bullets altogether? According to two inventors from Albuquerque, US, it is possible to construct an energy weapon from a stack of components taken from ordinary household microwave ovens.
Slime time

An even less lethal alternative might be to coat an adversary with slippery slime. US researchers developed a super-slippery material that could be sprayed from the back of a truck or tank. It could be an ideal solution, they suggest, for police or military forces trying to break up riots without causing anyone serious harm.

An altogether different kind of gun was also one of the most bizarre ideas filed this year. The US Defence Advanced Research Projects Agency (DARPA) thinks a human-firing cannon might be the best way to get special forces, police officers or fire fighters onto the roofs of tall buildings in a single bound.

Meanwhile, ballistics on a very different scale could see the stinging cells of jellyfish used to inject drugs and apply tattoos. US company NanoCyte reckons these jellyfish injections could fire compounds through the skin less painfully than a conventional needle.
Think again

Great patents are not always about completely new technologies, however.

Some of the most interesting ideas of 2006 involve a new spin on an existing solution. One such idea was for a CD-ROM that doubles as a biological weapons detector. The disc would have data written as an antibody that binds with a biological agent. This causes it to stop working when the biological agent is present in the air, providing an immediate warning of an attack.

Sony, meanwhile, was trying to deal with the problem of tangle headphone wires. It filed an application for headphones that do away with wires altogether, instead sending pulsing signals straight through the listener's body. These body-wired headphones would pick up changes to the body's electrostatic charge, induced by a conductive pad on the player's wrist, or elsewhere.

Another electronics giant also had a curious idea for transmitted information. Samsung proposed to turn the whole ionosphere into a giant antenna to broadcast radio signals around the globe without the need for expensive satellites.
Office inventions

Another modification to an everyday piece of office equipment is the printer cartridge filled with exploding ink patented by UK defence research company Qinetiq. This lets an ordinary printer print out fuses for finely-controlled firework detonations, vehicle air bags and even conventional munitions.

Continuing with the theme of modified hardware, another patent application revealed that computer monitors could someday look right back at you. US computer giant Apple filed an application for a display that takes pictures while displaying images using sensors placed between its LCD pixels.

And, last of all, an even more subtle surveillance tool: the "invisible drone"created by US firm VeraTech. The whole of this Y-shaped craft rotates so rapidly that it becomes a hard-to-discern blur, like the blades of a helicopter.



Comment on this Article


The Fortress and the Fringe


Living in America's Fringe Economy

By Howard Karger
Dollars and Sense
December 29, 2006

Millions of Americans live on the margins of the American economy, depending on the likes of payday lenders and pawnshops, who charge excessive interest rates and superhigh fees for their services.
Ron Cook is a department manager at a Wal-Mart store in Atlanta. Maria Guzman is an undocumented worker from Mexico; she lives in Houston with her three children and cleans office buildings at night. Marty Lawson works for a large Minneapolis corporation. (The names have been changed to protect the privacy of the individuals.) What do these three people have in common? They are all regular fringe economy customers.

The term "fringe economy" refers to a range of businesses that engage in financially predatory relationships with low-income or heavily indebted consumers by charging excessive interest rates, superhigh fees, or exorbitant prices for goods or services. Some examples of fringe economy businesses include payday lenders, pawnshops, check-cashers, tax refund lenders, rent-to-own stores, and "buy-here/pay-here" used car lots. The fringe economy also includes credit card companies that charge excessive late payment or over-the-creditlimit penalties; cell phone providers that force less creditworthy customers into expensive prepaid plans; and subprime mortgage lenders that gouge prospective homeowners.

The fringe economy is hardly new. Pawnshops and informal high-interest lenders have been around forever. What we see today, however, is a fringe-economy sector that is growing fast, taking advantage of the ever-larger part of the U.S. population whose economic lives are becoming less secure. Moreover, in an important sense the sector is no longer "fringe" at all: more and more, large mainstream financial corporations are behind the high-rate loans that anxious customers in run-down storefronts sign for on the dotted line.

The Payday Lending Trap

Ron and Deanna Cook have two children and a combined family income of $48,000 -- more than twice the federal poverty line but still $10,000 below Georgia's median income. They are the working poor.

To make ends meet, the Cooks borrow from payday lenders. When Ron and Deanna borrow $300 for 14 days they pay $60 in interest -- an annual interest rate of 520%! If they can't pay the full $360, they pay just the $60 interest fee and roll over the loan for another two weeks. The original $300 loan now costs $120 in interest for 30 days. If they roll over the loan for another two-week cycle, they pay $180 in interest on a $300 loan for 45 days. If the payday lender permits only four rollovers, the Cooks sometimes take out a payday loan from another lender to repay the original loan. This costly cycle can be devastating. The Center for Responsible Lending tells the tale of one borrower who entered into 35 back-to-back payday loans over 17 months, paying $1,254 in fees on a $300 loan.

The Cooks take out about ten payday loans a year, which is close to the national average for payday loan customers. Although the industry claims payday loans are intended only for emergencies, a 2003 study of Pima County, Ariz., by the Financial services for the poor and credit-challenged are big business.

Southwest Center for Economic Integrity found that 67% of borrowers used their loans for general non-emergency bills. The Center for Responsible Lending found that 66% of borrowers initiate five or more loans a year, and 31% take out twelve or more loans yearly. Over 90% of payday loans go to borrowers with five or more loans a year. Customers who take out 13 or more loans a year account for over half of payday lenders' total revenues.

The Unbanked

Maria Guzman and her family are part of the 10% of U.S. households -- more than 12 million -- that have no relationship with a bank, savings institution, credit union, or other mainstream financial service provider. Being "unbanked," the Guzmans turn to the fringe economy for check cashing, bill payment, short-term pawn or payday loans, furniture and appliance rentals, and a host of other financial services. In each case, they face high user fees and exorbitant interest rates.

Without credit, the Guzmans must buy a car either for cash or through a "buy-here/pay-here" (BHPH) used car lot. At a BHPH lot they are saddled with a 28% annual percentage rate (APR) on a high-mileage and grossly overpriced vehicle. They also pay weekly, and one missed payment means a repossession. Since the Guzmans have no checking account, they use a check-casher who charges 2.7% for cashing their monthly $1,500 in payroll checks, which costs them $40.50 a month or $486 a year.

Like many immigrants, the Guzmans send money to relatives in their home country. (Money transfers from the United States to Latin America are expected to reach $25 billion by 2010.) If they sent $500 to Mexico on June 26, 2006, using Western Union's "Money in Minutes," they would have paid a $32 transfer fee. Moreover, Western Union's exchange rate for the transaction was 11.12 pesos for the U.S. dollar, while the official exchange rate that day was 11.44. The difference on $500 was almost $14, which raised the real costs of the transaction to $46, or almost 10% of the transfer amount. Without a checking account, the Guzmans turn to money orders or direct bill pay, both of which add to their financial expenses. For example, ACE Cash Express charges 79 cents per money order and $1 or more for each direct bill payment. If the Guzmans use money orders to pay six bills a month, the fees total nearly $57 a year; using direct bill pay, they would pay a minimum of $72 in fees per year.

All told, the Guzmans spend more than 10% of their income on alternative financial services, which is average for unbanked households. To paraphrase James Baldwin, it is expensive to be poor and unbanked in America.

The Cooks and the Guzmans, along with people like Marty Lawson caught in a cycle of credit card debt (see sidebar), may not fully appreciate the economic entity they are dealing with. Far from a mom-and-pop industry, America's fringe economy is largely dominated by a handful of large, well-financed multinational corporations with strong ties to mainstream financial institutions. It is a comprehensive and fully formed parallel economy that addresses the financial needs of the poor and credit-challenged in the same way as the mainstream economy meets the needs of the middle class. The main difference is the exorbitant interest rates, high fees, and onerous loan terms that mark fringe economy transactions.

The Scope of the Fringe Economy

The unassuming and often shoddy storefronts of the fringe economy mask the true scope of this economic sector. Checkcashers, payday lenders, pawnshops, and rent-to-own stores alone engaged in at least 280 million transactions in 2001, according to Fannie Mae Foundation estimates, generating about $78 billion in gross revenues. By comparison, in 2003 combined state and federal spending on the core U.S. social welfare programs -- Temporary Aid to Needy Families (AFDC's replacement), Supplemental Security Income, Food Stamps, the Women, Infants and Children (WIC) food program, school lunch programs, and the U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development's (HUD) low-income housing programs -- totaled less than $125 billion. Revenues in the combined sectors of the fringe economy -- including subprime home mortgages and refinancing, and used car sales -- would inflate the $78 billion several times over and eclipse federal and state spending on the poor.

There can be no doubt that the scope of the fringe economy is enormous. The Community Financial Services Association of America claims that 15,000 payday lenders extend more than $25 billion in short-term loans to millions of households each year. According to Financial Service Centers of America, 10,000 check-cashing stores process 180 million checks with a face value of $55 billion.

The sheer number of fringe economy storefronts is mindboggling. For example, ACE Cash Express -- only one of many such corporations -- has 68 locations within 10 miles of my Houston zip code. Nationwide there are more than 33,000 check-cashing and payday loan stores, just two parts of the fringe economy. That's more than the all the McDonald's and Burger King restaurants and all the Target, J.C. Penney, and Wal-Mart retail stores in the United States combined. ACE Cash Express is the nation's largest check-casher and exemplifies the growth and profitability of the fringe economy. In 1991 ACE had 181 stores; by 2005 it had 1,371 stores with 2,700 employees in 37 states and the District of Columbia. ACE's revenues totaled $141 million in 2000 and by 2005 rose to $268.6 million. In 2005 ACE:

* cashed 13.3 million checks worth approximately $5.3 billion (check cashing fees totaled $131.6 million);

* served more than 40 million customers (3.4 million a month or 11,000 an hour) and processed $10.3 billion in transactions;

* processed over 2 million loan transactions (worth $640 million) and generated interest income and fees of $91.8 million;

* added a total of 142 new locations (in 2006 the company anticipates adding 150 more);

* processed over $410 million in money transfers and 7.6 million money orders with a face value of $1.3 billion;

* processed over 7.8 million bill payment and debit card transactions, and sold approximately 172,000 prepaid debit cards.

Advance America is the nation's leading payday lender, with 2,640 stores in 36 states, more than 5,500 employees, and $630 million this year in revenues. Dollar Financial Corporation operates 1,106 stores in 17 states, Canada, and the United Kingdom. Their 2005 revenues were $321 million. Check-into-Cash has more than 700 stores; Check N' Go has 900 locations in 29 states. Almost all of these are publicly traded NASDAQ corporations.

There were 4,500 pawnshops in the United States in 1985; now there are almost 12,000, including outlets owned by five publicly traded chains. In 2005 the three big chains -- Cash America International (a.k.a Cash America Pawn and Super- Pawn), EZ Pawn, and First Cash -- had combined annual revenues of nearly $1 billion. Cash America is the largest pawnshop chain, with 750 locations; the company also makes payday loans through its Cash America Payday Advance, Cashland, and Mr. Payroll stores. In 2005, Cash America's revenues totaled $594.3 million.

The Association of Progressive Rental Organizations claims that the $6.6 billion a year rent-to-own (RTO) industry serves 2.7 million households through 8,300 stores in 50 states. Many RTOs rent everything from furniture, elec tronics, major appliances, and computers to jewelry. Rent- A-Center is the largest RTO corporation in the world. In 2005 it employed 15,000 people; owned or operated 3,052 stores in the United States and Canada; and had revenues of $2.4 billion. Other leading RTO chains include Aaron Rents (with 1,255 stores across the United States and Canada and gross revenues of $1.1 billion in 2005) and RentWay (with 788 stores in 34 states and revenues of almost $516 million in 2005).

These corporations represent the tip of the iceberg. Low-income consumers spent $1.75 billion for tax refund loans in 2002. Many lost as much as 16% of their tax refunds because of expensive tax preparation fees and/or interest incurred in tax refund anticipation loans. The interest and fees on such loans can translate into triple-digit annualized interest rates, according to the Consumer Federation of America, which has also reported that 11 million tax filers received refund anticipation loans in 2000, almost half through H&R Block. According to a Brookings Institution report, the nation's largest tax preparers earned about $357 million from fringe economy "fast cash" products in 2001, more than double their earnings in 1998. All for essentially lending people their own money!

The fringe economy plays a big role in the housing market, where subprime home mortgages rose from 35,000 in 1994 to 332,000 in 2003, a 25% a year growth rate and a tenfold increase in just nine years. (A subprime loan is a loan extended to less creditworthy customers at a rate that is higher than the prime rate.) According to Edward Gramlich, former member of the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System, subprime mortgages accounted for almost $300 billion or 9% of all mortgages in 2003.

While the fringe economy squeezes its customers, it is generous to its CEOs. According to Forbes, salaries in many fringe economy corporations rival those in much larger companies. In 2004 Sterling Brinkley, chairman of EZ Corp, earned $1.26 million; ACE's CEO Jay Shipowitz received $2.1 million on top of $2.38 million in stocks; Jeffrey Weiss, Dollar Financial Group's CEO, earned $1.83 million; Mark Speese, Rent-A-Center's CEO, made $820,000 with total stock options of $10 million; and Cash America's CEO Daniel Feehan was paid almost $2.2 million in 2003 plus the $9 million he had in stock options.

Fringe-economy corporations argue that the high interest rates and fees they charge reflect the heightened risks of doing business with an economically unstable population. While fringe businesses have never made their pricing criteria public, some risks are clearly overstated. For example, ACE assesses the risk of each check-cashing transaction and reports losses of less than 1%. Since tax preparers file a borrower's taxes, they are reasonably assured that refund anticipation loans will not exceed refunds. To further guarantee repayment, they often establish an escrow account into which the IRS directly deposits the tax refund check. Pawnshops lend only about 50% of a pawned item's value, which leaves them a large buffer if the pawn goes unclaimed (industry trade groups claim that 70% of customers do redeem their goods). The rent-to-own furniture and appliance industry charges well above the "street price" for furniture and appliances, which is more than enough to offset any losses. Payday lenders require a post-dated check or electronic debit to assure repayment. Payday loan losses are about 6% or less, according to the Center for Responsible Lending.

Much of the profit in the fringe economy comes from financing rather than the sale of a product. For example, if a used car lot buys a vehicle for $3,000 and sells it for $5,000 cash, their profit is $2,000. But if they finance that vehicle for two years at a 25% APR, the profit jumps to $3,242. This dynamic is true for virtually every sector of the fringe economy. A customer who pays off a loan or purchases a good or service outright is much less profitable for fringe economy businesses than customers who maintain an ongoing financial relationship with the business. In that sense, profit in the fringe economy lies with keeping customers continually enmeshed in an expensive web of debt.

Funding and Exporting America's Fringe Economy

Fringe economy corporations require large amounts of capital to fund their phenomenal growth, and mainstream financial institutions have stepped up to the plate. ACE Cash Express has a relationship with a group of banks including Wells Fargo, JP Morgan Chase Bank, and JP Morgan Securities to provide capital for acquisitions and other activities.

Advance America has relationships with Morgan Stanley, Banc of America Securities LLC, Wachovia Capital Markets, and Wells Fargo Securities, to name a few. Similar banking relationships exist throughout the fringe economy.

The fringe economy is no longer solely a U.S. phenomenon. In 2003 the HSBC Group purchased Household International (and its subsidiary Beneficial Finance) for $13 billion. Headquartered in London, HSBC is the world's second largest bank and serves more than 90 million customers in 80 countries. Household International is a U.S.-based consumer finance company with 53 million customers and more than 1,300 branches in 45 states. It is also a predatory lender. In 2002, a $484 million settlement was reached between Household and all 50 states and the District of Columbia. In effect, Household acknowledged it had duped tens of thousands of low-income home buyers into loans with unnecessary hidden costs. In 2003, another $100 million settlement was reached based on Household's abusive mortgage lending practices.

HSBC plans to export Household's operations to Poland, China, Mexico, Britain, France, India, and Brazil, for starters. One shudders to think how the fringe economy will develop in nations with even fewer regulatory safeguards than the United States. Presumably, HSBC also believes that predatory lending will not tarnish the reputation of the seven British lords and one baroness who sit on its 20-member board of directors.

What Can be Done?

The fringe economy is one of the few venues that creditchallenged or low-income families can turn to for financial help. This is especially true for those facing a penurious welfare system with a lifetime benefit cap and few mechanisms for emergency assistance. In that sense, enforcing strident usury and banking laws to curb the fringe economy while providing no legal and accessible alternatives would hurt the very people such laws are intended to help by driving these transactions into a criminal underground. Instead of ending up in court, non-paying debtors would wind up in the hospital. Simply outlawing a demand-driven industry is rarely successful.

One strategy to limit the growth of the fringe economy is to develop more community-based lending institutions modeled on the Grameen Bank or on local cooperatives. Although community banks might charge a higher interest rate than commercial banks charge prime rate customers, the rates would still be significantly lower than in the existing fringe sector.

Another policy option is to make work pay, or at least make it pay better. In other words, we need to increase the minimum wage and the salaries of the lower middle class and working poor. One reason for the rapid growth of the fringe economy is the growing gap between low and stagnant wages and higher prices, especially for necessities like housing, health care, pharmaceuticals, and energy.

Stricter usury laws, better enforcement of existing banking regulations, and a more active federal regulatory system to protect low-income consumers can all play a role in taming the fringe economy. Concurrently, federal and state governments can promote the growth of non-predatory community banking institutions. In addition, commercial banks can provide low-income communities with accessible and inexpensive banking services. As the "DrillDown" studies conducted in recent years by the Washington, D.C., nonprofit Social Compact suggest, low-income communities contain more income and resources than one might think. If fringe businesses can make billions in low-income neighborhoods, less predatory economic institutions should be able to profit there too. Lastly, low and stagnant wages make it difficult, if not impossible, for the working poor to make ends meet without resorting to debt. A significant increase in wages would likely result in a significant decline in the fringe economy. In the end, several concerted strategies will be required to restrain this growing and out-of-control economic beast.

Howard Karger is professor of social work at the University of Houston, and author of Shortchanged: Life and Debt in the Fringe Economy (Berrett-Koehler, 2005).



Comment on this Article


Value of RMB against USD ends 2006 on new high

www.chinaview.cn 2006-12-29 16:24:57

SHANGHAI, Dec. 29 (Xinhua) -- The value of the Renminbi against the U.S. dollar ended 2006 on a record high on Friday, reaching 7.8087 yuan to one dollar, according to the China Foreign Exchange Trading Center based in Shanghai.

It is the seventh record set since the beginning of December, following on from Thursday's new high, the center added.
The value of the RMB has risen nearly 3.86 percent since China decided to revalue its currency in July 2005.

The central parity of the RMB against the other four major currencies announced on Friday by the Trading Center were as follows: 10.2665 yuan to one euro, 6.5630 yuan to 100 Japanese yen, 1.00467 yuan to one HK dollar and 15.3232 yuan to one pound.

According to Ye Yaoting, a forex analyst from the Bank of Communications, commercial banks needed to sell their dollars at the end of the fiscal year.

"The move drove up demand for the RMB and helped further increase the value of the local currency," Ye said.



Comment on this Article


Consumer confidence up, Wall Street tumbles

www.chinaview.cn 2006-12-29 18:01:35

BEIJING, Dec. 29 (Xinhuanet) -- Good news about the housing market, consumer confidence and jobs sent Wall Street into a bit of a tailspin Thursday because investors are worried the newfound economic strength is a signal the Federal Reserve will not feel any urgency about cutting interest rates in the early part of 2007.

The Dow Jones industrial average fell 9.05 points to close at 12,501.52.
The National Association of Realtors reported sales of existing homes was 0.6 percent in November to a seasonally adjusted annual rate of 6.28 million units, after a 0.5 percent rise in sales in October.

That is the first back-to-back increase in sales of existing homes since the spring of 2005 and followed news Wednesday that sales of new homes rose 3.4 percent last month.

The better-than-expected showing for both new and existing home sales could be a sign this year's severe slide in housing is starting to bottom out, analysts said.

However, they cautioned not to expect a sharp rebound. They said prices will continue falling for several more months as sellers are forced to trim their asking prices more because of near-record levels of unsold homes.

Meanwhile, the Conference Board reported Thursday that consumer confidence rose sharply to an eight-month high of 109.0 in December.

That was only slightly below last April's 109.8, when confidence had hit the highest point in four years before soaring gasoline prices and a slumping housing market took their toll on Americans' perception of the future.

The rise in the consumer confidence readings was a good sign that the housing slowdown was not more seriously affecting consumers' willingness to spend money, analysts said.

The fear had been that the severe slump in housing would cause people to stop spending and possibly contribute to an outright recession, much as the bursting of the stock market bubble in 2000 helped trigger the 2001 downturn.

For October, the median price for an existing home fell for a record fourth consecutive month, dropping to 218,000 U.S. dollars, down 3.1 percent from a year ago.

There was good news on jobs Thursday as the Labor Department reported that the number of laid off workers filing applications for unemployment benefits rose by only 1,000 last week to 317,000. That is a level that analysts said indicated the job market was remaining strong in spite of the slowdown in overall economic growth.



Comment on this Article


Crude oil prices rebound on drop of U.S. stockpiles

www.chinaview.cn 2006-12-29 04:57:20

NEW YORK, Dec. 28 (Xinhua) -- Crude oil prices rebounded Thursday as a report showed massive drop in U.S. stockpiles last week.

The U.S. Department of Energy said Thursday that crude oil stockpiles dropped 8.1 million barrels to 321 million in the week ended Dec. 22, dipping below year-ago levels of 323.3 million barrels.
However, market showed little reaction to the report as the United States is experiencing an unusually mild winter, which lower demand for heating fuel.

New York's main contract, light sweet crude for delivery in February, rose 19 cents to 60.53 dollars per barrel.

In London, Brent North Sea crude for February delivery climbed 10 cents to 60.62 dollars.



Comment on this Article


'Fortress America' visa system scaring businesses away

By Jeff Bliss and John Hughes
Bloomberg News
December 26, 2006


WASHINGTON: For growing numbers of international business travelers, visa and customs regulations are making trips to the United States a thing of the past.

Companies say U.S. rules have become so onerous in the wake of the terrorist attacks of Sept. 11, 2001, that it is often simpler to meet customers, business partners and employees elsewhere. Exxon Mobil has held customer meetings in a London branch office; Ingersoll-Rand says it took one of its Indian engineers three 18-hour trips to get his U.S. visa.

Problems created by the entry requirements have become so evident that the man who initially helped enforce them - Tom Ridge, the first U.S. secretary of homeland security - is now working with a business group to change them.
"Our challenge now is to continue to meet our security needs while striking a better balance with how we welcome foreign visitors," Ridge said.

Entry requirements will be tightened further as of Jan. 23, when everyone entering the United States by airplane from Canada, Mexico, South or Central America and the Caribbean will be required to present a passport.

The number of business travelers to the United States fell 10 percent in 2005 from the previous year, according to World Travel Market, a London-based trade-show group. The Discover America Partnership - the group Ridge is working with, an organization of business executives working to improve America's image abroad - says its survey of foreign travelers found that the U.S. entry process was rated the "worst" by a margin of more than two to one.

The National Foreign Trade Council estimates that the entry rules cost U.S. businesses $31 billion in lost sales and higher expenses from 2002 to 2004.

But more broadly, U.S. business groups say, foreign travelers choosing other destinations might fuel the growth of rival commercial and financial centers.

International travel "has expanded in Dubai, Budapest, Dubrovnik, not Washington, Philadelphia and Boston," said William Hanbury, president and chief executive of the Washington Convention and Tourism Corporation.

Companies are pressing their case with the U.S. State Department. Visa regulations were a topic at a meeting Dec. 6 involving the under secretary for management, Henrietta Fore; assistant secretary for consular affairs, Maura Harty; and executives from companies including Boeing, Walt Disney and Marriott International.

With no major changes in sight, executives at Exxon Mobil are meeting with a "significant" number of foreign customers, business partners and employees in Europe and Singapore, said Dan Nelson, who heads the company's legislative strategy team in Washington.

Pixelworks, with no time to appeal visa denials for some 20 employees in China, sent the workers to a Canadian branch office for training, said Chris Bright, a spokesman for the semiconductor maker.

At Ingersoll-Rand, a travel troubleshooter, Elizabeth Dickson, tells the story of the Indian engineer who had to make three trips to the U.S. consulate in Madras, an 18-hour trek, because of U.S. government mistakes. Those included first issuing him the wrong type of visa and then refusing to give him the correct visa, she said.

Since learning that all of the Sept. 11 hijackers had entered the country on visas, the United States has required every visa applicant to be interviewed in person and fingerprinted. Previously, many were able to get visas through the mail.

Even if U.S. officials can argue that a need for heightened security justifies their actions, they are ignoring the negative image that such programs create, business travel groups say.

"We do have a perception out there that it's a difficult country to enter, this whole 'Fortress America' idea," said Kevin Mitchell, chairman of the Business Travel Coalition, a group of frequent foreign and U.S. business travelers.

Bush administration officials respond that problems with visas and customs clearance are the exception.

Since the Sept. 11 attacks, the State Department has added 520 employees to process visas and has worked to automate procedures and reduce the waiting time for interviews, which used to be as long as five months in India, the deputy assistant secretary of state for visa services, Tony Edson, said.

Still, "if people don't think the U.S. is welcoming international travelers, it's as important as what America is actually doing with world travelers," he said.

On average, Customs and Border Protection officers handle 1.1 million people coming into the United States every day, denying entry to only 860, or fewer than 1 percent, said Kelly Klundt, an agency spokeswoman.

Aware of the public's negative perception, Customs and Border Protection has begun a training program to make officers more sensitive to the foreigners they are questioning.

"We understand and are acutely aware that the vast majority of travelers are legitimate," Klundt said.



Comment on this Article


A coming of age for the European currency

Financial Times
December 27 2006


On January 1, 2007, Europe celebrates the fifth anniversary of the launch of euro notes and coins by welcoming a thirteenth member of the eurozone - Slovenia, the tiny former Yugoslav republic. But the eurozone's geographical expansion is modest in comparison with the rapid growth in euro notes in circulation within the region and beyond.

Earlier this month, the value of euro notes pushed through the €600bn (£402bn; $787bn) level - roughly double the value of the then-national currencies in circulation at the end of 2001. The signs are that in December the currency came of age by overtaking the US dollar in terms of the value of notes in circulation. The figures used for the comparison by the Financial Times include notes held in the vaults of commercial banks but exclude reserves of notes held by central banks.
Slovenia's small size - its population is just 2m - means that the impact of its entry will be hard to separate from the usual spike in demand for cash around Christmas and New Year, according to Antti Heinonen, head of the European central bank's bank notes directorate. So what has driven rapid growth in euro notes?

After the 2002 launch, the rate of increase slowed, but has remained at or above 10 per cent a year. The exact reasons are unclear; even central banks do not know where their notes are or for what purposes they are used.

Mr Heinonen suggests several explanations. Within the eurozone, citizens may still be adjusting to the new currency. In terms of population, the eurozone, with 315m inhabitants, is larger than the US. Low interest and inflation rates have "reduced the opportunity cost of holding cash, rather than putting your money in a bank account", he says.

Eurozone citizens anyway like to hoard some cash, perhaps more than their US counterparts, especially if they have difficulty getting to an automated cash dispenser. Electronic payment systems remain far from universal.

Robust eurozone growth, which has matched that in the US in recent quarters, could have added to demand.

Other clues come from the popularity of different euro notes. In volume terms, €500 notes have seen the fastest growth; their number in circulation was rising at an annual rate of almost 14 per cent in November. The volume of low-denomination dollar notes means that in terms of individual notes in circulation, the dollar leads the euro, and the dollar has retained its title as "cash most used outside of its borders", says Mr Heinonen.

The popularity of high-value euro notes might result from their use by criminals, although the ECB does not put too much weight on such factors. "Clearly cash is used by criminals because it is an anonymous instrument," adds Mr Heinonen. "But to say that it would be more difficult to commit a crime if we didn't have high denomination notes would be to confuse cause and effect. If we didn't have the higher denominations, criminals would use the lower denominations - or other global currencies, such as the US dollar or Swiss franc."

The overseas demand for euro notes is clearer to see. Tourists travelling outside the eurozone are likely to have taken euro notes with them and not brought so many back. The notes have also become popular in European Union member states that hope to one day to join the eurozone. Kosovo and Montenegro have adopted the euro as their national currency, even though they are not yet EU members. In countries such as Russia and beyond, euros have gained acceptance.

And at least when it comes to overseas use, the ECB has some indications about the scale of demand. Using statistics on the net the value of euros shipped by financial institutions, the ECB estimates that the stock held outside the eurozone must be worth at least €55bn, and that is almost certainly too low an estimate given the net outflow accounted for by tourists.

The ECB estimates that between 10 and 20 per cent of the €600bn euro notes in circulation are held outside the eurozone.



Comment on this Article


The Truth About Where Your Donated Clothes End Up

ABC News
21/12/2006

Think Charity Means Giving Someone Less Fortunate Your Old Shirt for Christmas? Think Again

ACCRA, GHANA - Christmas is one of those times of the year when many Americans clean out our closets and donate some of our used clothing to a charity. Perhaps we hope that Santa Clause will replace them with shiny new shirts, jeans, blouses and shoes. Or maybe we just want to do some good.

In New York City, AnnMarie Resnick told ABC News why her family donates clothing at Christmas time. "By the time my kids grow out of it," she said, "it is generally in good condition, and I want someone else to get good use out of it." And who does she think is benefiting? "We hope, and we think we know, it is people in our neighborhood who just aren't as fortunate as us. And who need it."

And the same sentiment from Marc Kaplowictz, who told ABC News: "I am assuming that is helping people who need it more than we do."

But do most Americans really know what they're doing when they donate clothing? For instance, do you think you are giving your beloved but worn jeans to someone with no money to buy their own? Perhaps some poor person in your hometown, or even far away in Africa?

Wake up and smell the money. Your used clothes are usually sold, not given away.
According to various estimates, here's what happens to your clothing giveaways. In most cases, a small amount of the items, the best quality castoffs -- less than 10 percent of donations -- are kept by the charitable institutions and sold in their thrift shops to other Americans looking for a bargain. These buyers could be people who are hard up, or they could be folks who like the idea of a good deal on a stylish old item that no longer can be found in regular stores.

The remaining 90 percent or more of what you give away is sold by the charitable institution to textile recycling firms. Bernard Brill, of the Secondary Recycled Textiles Association, told ABC News: "Our industry buys from charitable institutions, hundred of millions of dollars worth of clothing every year."

So, at this point, the charity you have donated clothes to has earned money off of them in two ways -- in their shops and by selling to recyclers. Then the recycler kicks into high gear. Most of the clothes are recycled into cleaning cloths and other industrial items, for which the recyclers say they make a modest profit.

Twenty-five percent, however, of what the recycling companies purchase from charities is used not as rags, but as a commodity in an international trading economy that many American may not even know about. Brill, from the textile association, picked up the story. "This clothing is processed, sorted and distributed around the world to developing countries," he said.

Take that pair of bluejeans you may have recently donated. Your jeans are stuffed with others into tightly sealed plastic bales weighing about 120 pounds and containing about 100 pairs of jeans.

The bales are loaded into huge containers and sold to international shippers who put them on ships bound for Africa and other developing regions. Again, the price of your old jeans has increased a bit because the shipper had to buy them.

By the time the bale of jeans is unloaded from a container here in Accra, Ghana, it is worth around $144. That's $1.30 per pair of jeans. But when the bale is opened up and the jeans are laid out for sale in the so-called "bend over" markets, customers bend over and select their purchases from the ground for an average price of $6.66 per pair of jeans. That's a 500 percent increase in value just by opening up the bale of clothes.

So now you know that about 70 percent of your old donated jeans are being used as cloths to wipe oil off of engine parts and the remaining 20 to 25 percent of pants that left your closet with no value are ultimately sold in Africa, where American clothes are extremely popular, for an average price of about $7 per pair. That's a bargain for African shoppers -- most of them are low-income earners who cannot afford to buy newly made U.S. clothes.

And jeans are by no means the only American charity clothing items on sale here. I saw everything from T-shirts with U.S. logos like "General Motors" to major league baseball caps, name brand dresses, sports shoes and even underwear. All of them used.

There are two ways to look at all this. One view is that it is wrong for entrepreneurs to profit from what you give away to charity, and that by dumping huge amounts of cheap U.S. clothing on the streets here, African textile industries are closing their factories and laying people off because they cannot make clothes as cheaply as those American items found in the bend over markets.

Bama Athreya, deputy director of the International Labor Rights Fund in Washingtron D.C., told ABC News: "Many of these countries in Africa used to have a fairly well-developed indigenous market for textiles and clothing and particularly for hand-crafted or hand-tailored clothes. And we've seen those markets virtually disappear over the last decade or two."

Athreya concedes that the African market for used U.S. clothing is not the only reason African workers have lost jobs. ABC News has spoken to various sources who point out that Africa also lags in production techniques and suffers from lack of infrastructure, job training and from corruption that undermines efficiency. But, added Athreya, "There is no question that the secondhand clothing market has had a significant impact on domestic African clothing production. The tailors, the small producers have been put out of business. Those were good jobs for Africans and there are no jobs taking their place. This is a trade that feeds on the poor rather than benefits the poor."

And if Africans can't keep their factories open in order to make clothes, they can't make clothes to export to the United States, thus they continue to suffer economically.

Neil Kearney, general secretary of the Brussels based International Textile, Garment and Leather Workers Federation says the practice is exploitative, "It is neo colonialism in its purest form. It's exporting poverty to Africa, a continent that is already exceedingly poor."

This state of affairs upsets AnnMarie Resnick, a woman we met in Manhattan while she was donating clothes, who told ABC News: "It stinks. I don't like it, but I would still give. There are a lot of people who are going to constantly profit, because this is probably happening with really nice people. With us -- and we profit too -- we get a tax deduction. If I knew how to send to Africa myself, I would."

Marc Kaplowictz, whom we also met while he was donating clothes in New York City, has mixed feelings: "And who ends up with the profit there? Big picture, obviously I would be against that. I am obviously the little guy in this process. I don't know. I don't think the answer is to have people stop donating."

The other view is that the donated clothing market is actually the American way, that your old clothing is used at every step to create new wealth and to help people who are less fortunate. First of all, charities like Goodwill Industries and The Salvation Army make clear on their Web sites that proceeds for charity and thrift shops, as well as from bulk sales to recyclers, go directly to support education, work and drug rehab programs for people who would otherwise suffer greatly. After all, isn't that the spirit in which you gave your clothes to begin with?

Brill, of the Secondary Recycled Textiles Association, told ABC News that it is a win-win situation. "It provides thousands of jobs here at home [in the U.S.] and it provides hundreds of thousands of jobs in Africa." And he added: "It also diverts waste material that would otherwise go to land fill. It goes to recycling, so it helps to protect the environment."

Both the Goodwill and the Salvation Army point out on their Web sites that much of the donated clothes are sold in their charity shops to raise money for a variety of good causes. But there is no mention of the fact that some donated items are sold overseas at a profit to private enterprises. One Goodwill source stressed that Americans should continue to donate their used clothing because U.S. charities need their cut of this market in order to help other Americans in need.

Most people we spoke with seemed to agree.

Lynn Novick, also donating in New York, told ABC News: "So someone's making money every time they are sold? At least they are not going in the garbage, and going totally to waste...I will continue donating."

And Valerie Adam, of Manhattan, said, "It is kinda the American way, isn't it? Somebody discovered something and turned it into a business. I will continue donating. We Americans we collect so much. We accrue so much."

And here on the streets of Ghana, Africans, for better or worse, end up buying a lot of what we give away.



Comment on this Article


The shocking truth about the baby factories

Mail on Sunday
22/12/2006



This is the first picture of the British woman with the Romanian baby she stole. And as this investigation reveals, countless other children are being bred to order in Mafia-run baby farms:

The Baby Factory is run with brutal efficiency. As soon as an order has been placed, a woman is chosen to produce a baby. Only the beautiful girls are selected to join the production line.

The customers will, the owners of the factory know all too well, pay a higher price for an angelic-looking baby. The blue-eyed ones are particularly prized.

The woman is impregnated by mafia racketeers and then looked after, housed, fed and clothed for the next nine months.

She does not give birth in hospital in case someone asks too many questions. Rather, she has the baby in a makeshift maternity suite - a room in a house rented by the factory for the purpose.

A trained midwife in the pay of the factory is on hand to ensure a safe delivery. There is, after all, a lot of money at stake. Up to £20,000, in fact.

The scenario painted above sounds like something that might have happened in Hitler's Germany. In reality, it is a burgeoning industry today.
A Mail investigation has uncovered such a baby factory in Athens run by the Albanian and Russian mafias, catering to the demands of wealthy Western women unable to have children of their own.

They come from Britain, Europe and as far afield as America, hand over a huge wad of cash and take the child back home.

The baby factory in Athens is doing a booming trade. The girls selected by the gangs for the production line are mostly Bulgarians and Romanian gipsies.

Consequently, there are very real fears that when Romania and Bulgaria join the EU next month, giving nationals from those countries an open door to Britain, the gangs will set up similar baby factories here.

Did Marie Golby, the 41-year-old British woman who hit the headlines this week after being accused of stealing a baby from a Romanian gipsy, come into contact with such a gang? The Romanian gipsy, Sophia Percula, has admitted to the police that she went to Greece earlier this month to sell her six-month-old daughter for 14,000 euros (around £9,500) in an illegal adoption scam arranged by a cousin.

She told police that she arranged to meet Golby in an Athens supermarket on Wednesday of last week, but Golby ran off with the child. Golby denies stealing the six-month-old girl - pictured here exclusively for the first time in the Mail - but admits taking her.

Sophia's father-in-law, Nikolai Percula, is said to have brought her over the border into Greece earlier this month.

Does Nikolai, who has a Rasputin-like appearance together with cartoonish attempts at a menacing manner during his appearances in court, have connections with the mafias running the baby factory?

Sophia certainly fits the mould of the beautiful, healthy young woman who has the misfortune to be desperately poor - perfect prey for the gangsters running the racket.

The police are keeping an open mind, but at this stage they suspect it was an 'independent' operation.

The Greek authorities admit the babies-for-sale racket is worsening. 'This is an escalating problem, the scale of which is impossible to grasp,' said Lieutenant Colonel Antonia Andreakou, director of the Greek police's public security division, which handles cross-border crime.

Ms Andreakou said her department had traced nine sales of Bulgarian infants in the first six months of this year and arrested 33 suspected mediators - 24 Bulgarians, seven Greeks (including doctors and lawyers) and two Albanians.

'This is just a fraction of the number of cases,' she said. 'We need to prove that money has exchanged hands, as this is what makes the transaction illegal, but that is very difficult to do.'

Last month, five Albanians were arrested near the Greek-Albanian border for the alleged sale of eight Roma infants. The gangs recruit the women in several ways. One, say police sources, is to seek out a young, attractive, healthy woman and tell her they can organise a false passport and papers to enable her to enter Greece.

Once this has been done, the girl is presented with a huge bill which she is unable to pay. She is then told that the debt will be written off if she gets pregnant and gives up her baby.

'The girls have no option but to comply,' says a police source. 'You would not want to upset these people.'

It is believed that these women are made pregnant by members of the gang - a man inevitably caught up in the other mafia 'businesses' of drug dealing and prostitution.

Another method of 'recruitment' is to prey on pregnant women who are drug addicts. They are offered money in return for their baby.

During the woman's pregnancy, she is well looked after. Not out of care or compassion, of course, but to ensure the baby has the best possible chance of being born healthy.

The birth takes place in one of the factory's self-styled maternity wards. But there will be a doctor and midwife present at the birth to make sure the investment yields a viable product.

The woman takes care of her child for up to 40 days before it is handed over to the couple in exchange for a large envelope of cash. The gangs have doctors and midwives in their employ who will vouch that the baby is the adoptive woman's own for the purposes of obtaining a birth certificate.

It's a dirty business. Amid this backdrop of bribery, misery and menace, a child is bought by an affluent Westerner who will be entirely ignorant of the wretched circumstances of her child's conception. But what of the baby's natural mother?

'Once the woman has served her purpose, she is as good as dead,' a senior police source told me. 'The gang will force her into prostitution and drive her into the ground.' The location of the baby factory's HQ is unclear but it is likely some of its operations are carried out within Athens' red light district.

It is in one of the area's grubby hotels which operate as brothels that Sophia, whose young husband remained behind in Romania, is believed to have been staying in the past few weeks.

It's a long way from the wealthy enclaves of Europe and the U.S. So just how do these middle-class women make contact with Albanian and Russian gangsters?

'They don't go to them, the gangs go to the women,' explains Spiras Kloudas, a lawyer who specialise in human trafficking cases. 'The gangs are tipped off that the women are desperate for a baby and they make contact with them.'

For example, if the woman has had failed IVF treatment in hospital, a corrupt employee will inform the gang. It is also thought there may be staff at adoption agencies who tip off the mafia.

It is not yet clear how Golby, from a Leamington Spa, Warwickshire, made contact with Sophia Percula, but it is clear she was desperate to the point of going mad to have a baby.

At 17, she had had an operation to remove an abscess on her ovaries and was told she could never have children, but she did not give up hope.

Married three times, she has left a trail of bitter ex-husbands and boyfriends in her wake in her search for true love and a family.

Husband number one was Kevin Kawalkowski, a member of the U.S. Air Force stationed at Upper Heyford, near Oxford, in the late 1980s. Within three weeks, she informed him she was pregnant and three months after that, said she had lost the baby. Tests revealed the 'pregnancy' had not existed.

The marriage ended soon afterwards. It is believed there was a second brief marriage in America before Golby returned home in the early 1990s.

Husband number three was Michael Leonard, whom she married in 2002. Attempts to conceive through IVF treatment failed and the marriage broke down.

Last year, Golby went on holiday to the Greek island of Kefalonia, where she met Giorges Manentis, a 24-year-old restaurant owner. She fell in love with her handsome toyboy and decided to stay on.

As a result, she has been dubbed a real life Shirley Valentine, after the eponymous character in the 1989 film in which a disaffected British housewife finds love with a Greek waiter.

The couple did not live together, however. Golby set up home in the town of Skala, near the Veto bar where she worked, while Mr Manentis lived a few miles away in the village of Agia Irini.

Then, it seems, she decided to fake a pregnancy. Two months ago, during a trip back home to Britain, Mr Manentis says she called him to say she was having his baby and that she would be returning to Greece with the child.

On Wednesday of last week, Golby met up with Sophia Percula. As she told it to the police, she had not arranged to meet the mother, but came across her begging in the streets.

Her lawyer, Christopher Kaparounakis, says she felt sorry for the girl and bought her a cheese pie, then gave her some money to buy nappies.

The girl then disappeared. Instead of going to the police, however, Golby headed to Kefalonia with the baby.

Unfortunately, Mr Manentis thought she seemed rather large for a baby just a couple of weeks old.

'The baby girl is indeed beautiful, but when she brought it to Kefalonia I quickly suspected it was not mine. I could not accept to raise it.

'Marie was very anxious to have a child, to have a family, but she should have understood that I am much too young to take on such responsibilities.'

After Mr Manentis had told her he could not accept the child - and ended the relationship - Golby took her to a hospital on Kefalonia and requested that the baby be taken in for adoption because she did not have the means to raise her.

Because she had no documents to prove she was the mother, doctors called police and she was arrested.

She was taken to Athens, charged with 'direct involvement in the abduction of a child for illegal adoption or possible sale' and placed in custody. The offence carries a maximum sentence of ten years. Sophia and her father-in-law were also arrested for their part in the alleged scam.

As for the child, she is being cared for at a children's hospital in Athens and is likely to be put up for adoption.

Golby may have to wait up to a year before her trial begins. On Wednesday, she was freed on bail on condition that she remains in Greece.

On Thursday afternoon she boarded a ferry to Kefalonia, presumably to try to make things up with her boyfriend. There is little chance of that.

There is no happy ending to Marie Golby's story. And while many of those other women who come to Athens to adopt a baby through the back door get what they want, it comes at a huge cost to those benighted women who have been forced on to the production line of the Baby Factory.



Comment on this Article


Quirks


Weirdest Science Stories of 2006

LiveScience
29 Dec 06

1. Scientists Create Cloak of Partial Invisibility

2. Amazon River Flowed Backwards in Ancient Times

3. A New Wave: Scientists Write on Water

4. Stingray Kills 'Crocodile Hunter' Steve Irwin

5. Whales Found to Speak in Dialects

6. The Red Sea Parts Again

7. Rats Born to Mice in Bizarre Lab Work

8. Penis Transplant Removed After Two Weeks

9. Spider Cries Out While Mating

10. Coins Don't Smell, You Do





Comment on this Article


Female Komodo Dragon Has Virgin Births

By Jeanna Bryner
LiveScience
20 December 2006

Maybe females could live without males, at least for Komodo dragons. These behemoths of the reptile world can produce babies without fertilization by a male, scientists recently discovered.

Currently at London's Chester Zoo, one mother-to-be named Flora is waiting for her eight offspring to hatch, each one the result of a process called parthenogenesis-or a virgin conception.

"Parthenogenesis has never been documented in Komodo dragons before now, so this is absolutely a world first," said co-researcher Kevin Buley of Chester Zoo.
No sperm needed

Parthenogenesis, in which an unfertilized egg develops to maturity, has been found in 70 species of vertebrates, including captive snakes and a monitor lizard species. In most of these reptile cases, this process is their only method of reproduction.

In some whiptail lizards, males have become somewhat of an accessory, and all individuals are female. The type of asexual reproduction in whiptail lizards generates all-female offspring.

The Komodo dragon, turns out, can do both: they can reproduce sexually or asexually depending on their environmental conditions. At most zoos, females live alone and are kept separate from other dragons.

Magic dragon

In May of this year, Flora laid 25 eggs, of which 11 were viable. The zookeepers knew Flora had played both mom and pop as soon as they confirmed her eggs were fertile. That's because Flora had never come into contact with a male dragon while at the zoo.

Three of the developing eggs collapsed during incubation, providing embryonic material for testing this theory. The zoo staff worked with Phillip Watts of Liverpool University to carry out genetic analysis of the collapsed eggs.

"This paternity test confirmed that all the genetic material in the eggs had come from Flora and that she was indeed both the mother and the father of the developing eggs," Buley told LiveScience.

Egg-cellent

Both males and females carry out meiosis in which cells divide to form the respective sex cells, sperm or egg. In females, meiosis produces four egg-progenitor cells, one of which becomes the egg while the other three typically get reabsorbed by the female's body. For Flora, one of the extra cells acted like a surrogate sperm and fertilized the egg cell, explained Buley.

The one-parent event resulted in offspring containing the same genetic material as their mother. Flora's infant dragons will not be her clones, however, because there is genetic shuffling going on during the egg production stage, Buley said.

For instance, not all copies of genes are identical and each gene has an alternate form. If a person has two "alleles" for blond hair she would show a head of sunny hair, but if one allele was for blond and the other for dark brown, the person could show up a brunette. The same shuffling process occurred in the Komodo dragon babies.

Family affairs

With the ability to reproduce without male mates, Komodo females could potentially found an entirely new colony on their own. "Theoretically, a female Komodo dragon in the wild could swim to a new island and then lay a fertile clutch of eggs," Buley said.

The downside is that all hatchlings resulting from this type of parthenogenesis are males. "These would grow up to mate with their own mother and therefore, within one generation, there would potentially be a population able to reproduce normally on the new island," Buley explained.

In the long-term this Oedipus-like practice could lead to health problems associated with inbreeding, as the entire colony would have such low genetic diversity.

The results also have implications for captive-breeding programs that have sprouted to ensure the survival of the threatened lizards. Fewer than 4,000 Komodo dragons are thought to remain in the wild, residing on just three islands in Indonesia.

Scientists wonder if the act of keeping males and females separate could cause them to switch from sexual to asexual reproduction, which could lead to decreased genetic diversity.

The discovery is detailed in the Dec. 21 issue of the journal Nature.



Comment on this Article


French space agency to publish UFO archive online

Reuters
Dec 29, 2006

PARIS - The French space agency is to publish its archive of UFO sightings and other phenomena online, but will keep the names of those who reported them off the site to protect them from pestering by space fanatics.

Jacques Arnould, an official at the National Space Studies Center (CNES), said the French database of around 1,600 incidents would go live in late January or mid-February.

He said the CNES had been collecting statements and documents for almost 30 years to archive and study them.
"Often they are made to the Gendarmerie, which provides an official witness statement ... and some come from airline pilots," he said by telephone.

Given the success of films about visitations from outer space like "E.T.", "Close Encounters of The Third Kind" and "Independence Day", the CNES archive is likely to prove a hit.

It consists of around 6,000 reports, many relating to the same incident, filed by the public and airline professionals. Their names would not be published to protect their privacy, Anould said.

Advances in technology over the past three decades had prompted the decision to put the archive online, he said, adding it would likely be available via the CNES website www.cnes.fr.



Comment on this Article


Mother-Ships? Crikey!!!

The Redfern Files
29 Dec 06

Mother-ship: now there's a term absolutely guaranteed to raise the hackles of any smug, self-important ufological skeptic. So, I'll say it again, only this time louder: MOTHER-SHIP!
For those unaquainted with this one-time ufological stalwart, the mother-ships were almost a permanent fixture of the halcyon days of ufology (and by that I mean the 1950s and 1960s), and became so-named as a result of their huge size. Usually described as being hundreds of feet in length, and very often cigar-shaped, the mother-ships were seen by many as being the outer-space equivalent of a modern-day aircraft carrier - the purpose of which was to carry smaller, flying saucer-style vehicles across vast stretches of space before dropping them onto our planet to undertake whatever dark and nefarious activities they deemed fit.

But the problem with the mother-ships wasn't so much the fact that people saw them, or that the scenario of having one huge craft carrying a whole "family" of smaller ones defied logic. Nope: the problem was that the mother-ships became inextricably linked with the so-called "Contactee" controversy.

In the early 1950s, numerous characters - including George Adamski, George Van Tassel, Truman Bethurum (who, had his wife agreed, might have engineered the first intergalactic three-way - with the help of beautiful, shapely "space captain-ette" Aura Rhanes), and George Hunt Williamson (funny how the aliens seem to like earth people named George), reported close encounters, and direct contact, with eerily human-looking aliens who - among other things - loftily insisted we disarm our nuclear arsenals and live in harmony with one another (there's zero chance of that happening anytime soon!). And thus was born the cult of the Contactee - for a cult is certainly what it was and still is.

Moreover, many of the contactees - and particularly Adamski - claimed that their visitors were arriving in gigantic mother-ships. And, as a result of the fact that many of the more down-to-earth researchers of that era poured scorn on the accounts of the Contactees, so the tales of the mother-ships came to be viewed with growing suspicion.

Incredibly, even the FBI got in on the act: FBI memoranda of 1954 refers to a source who had advised the Bureau that "5,000 mother ships...150 to 200 feet in length" were at that time surrounding our planet. Their purpose: to "repair fault-lines in the Pacific Ocean." Well, that was nice of them - although I see no evidence of such repairs having ever occurred.

However, we might not want to dismiss the mother-ships completely out of hand. Consider the following report, found in the files of the British Government's National Archive by UFO researchers Andy Roberts and David Clarke.

Dating from December 2, 1942 and with the long and yawn-inspiring title of "Report by the crew of 61 Sqdn. A/c 'J,' Captain W/O Lever, of object seen during raid on TURIN, night of November 28/29th, 1942," the report reads as follows:

"The object...was seen by the entire crew of the above aircraft. They believe it to have been 200-300 feet in length and its width is estimated at 1/5th or 1/6th of its length. The speed was estimated at 500 m.p.h., and it had four pairs of red lights spaced at equal distances along its body. These lights did not appear in any way like exhaust flames; no trace was seen. The object kept a level course. The crew saw the object twice during the raid and brief details are given below."

The author of the report continued:

"After bombing, time 2240 hours, a/c height 11,000 feet. The aircraft at this time was some 10/15 miles South-West of Turin travelling in a northwesterly direction. The object was travelling South-East at the same height or slightly below the aircraft. After bombing, time 2245 hours, a/c height 14,000 feet. The aircraft was approaching the Alps when the object was seen again travelling West-South-West up a valley in the Alps below the level of the peaks. The lights appeared to go out and the object disappeared from view."

The document concluded:

"The captain of the aircraft also reports that he has seen a similar object about three months ago North of Amsterdam. In this instance it appeared to be on the ground and later travelling at high speed at a lower level than the heights given above along the coast for about two seconds; the lights then went out for the same period of time and came on again, and the object was still seen to be travelling in the same direction."

Now, seeing strange things when in the vicinity of Amsterdam is practically par for the course; but it's worth noting that a covering letter attached to this report that had been prepared by the Air Vice Marshal, Commanding, No. 5 Group of the British Royal Air Force stated: "The crew refuses to be shaken in their story in the face of the usual banter and ridicule."

And, of course, no nation on earth - to the best of our knowledge, at least - was flying aircraft 200-300 feet in length and at speeds of 500 mph, 55 years ago.

If the late Steve Irwin had investigated UFOs, at this stage he would probably be shouting at the top of his voice "Crikey!" And perhaps so we should, too. Maybe George, George, George and Co. were right all along. And so, with that final, astonishing thought in our collective minds, altogether now: "CRIKEY!"



Comment on this Article


Montana a UFO hotspot dating back to 1950s

By STACY HASLEM
Great Falls Tribune

The story goes something like this:

The date was March 16, 1967. Missile maintenance crews from Malmstrom Air Force Base were camped out at a missile site about 30 miles north of Lewistown.

Suddenly an alarm horn sounded.

A Minuteman missile had gone off alert and become inoperable. Upset and believing that the maintenance personnel had failed to tell him they were doing work that would create this "off-alert" warning, a first lieutenant called the missile site.

He didn't get the response he was expecting.

An on-site security guard told him that no maintenance had been done on the missile that morning. A UFO hovering over the site was a more likely culprit, he said.
Soon other missiles started going off-line as well. Within seconds, the other nine missiles were down.

About 20 miles southeast at the Oscar flight, a topside airman reported to his below-ground crew commander that strange, nonaircraft lights were zigzagging around the sky.

The commander didn't take the report seriously and told the airman to call back if anything more significant happened.

After a few minutes, the airman called again, clearly frightened and shouting: "Sir, there's one hovering outside the front gate!"

"One what?"

"A UFO. It's just sitting there. We're all looking at it. What do you want us to do?"

Moments later, several other Oscar missiles were down as well.

***

This report and others like it have made northcentral Montana a UFO hot spot dating back to the 1950s.

"It's been a pretty active area, and there are a lot of world-documented sightings going way back," said Jeff Goodrich, state director of the Montana chapter of the Mutual UFO Network (MUFON).

A video recording of two bright, silvery objects zipping around the sky on Aug. 15, 1950, brought national attention to the Electric City.

Nick Mariana, general manager of the Great Falls Electrics baseball team, noticed the objects and quickly scrambled to record the incident on the 16-mm camera he kept in his glove box. The "Montana Movie," as it came to be known, is considered one of the best UFO films of all time.

More recently, a series of mysterious cow mutilations has locals baffled and questioning whether space aliens have perhaps paid us another visit.
UFOs are for real

It's a fact: UFOs are out there. Astronomers, scientists, government officials and ufologists all agree on that. The dispute is whether little green or gray or purple men are piloting these aircraft, if that's even what the objects are.

Ray Kelly, owner of Kelly Signs, always has been a believer and even has a few sightings to boot.

"I've always felt this universe is just too vast for us to be the only people or living creatures," he said.

Kelly's first sighting came in the 1990s. As he pulled into his alley after work one night, a bright star caught his attention. Then, suddenly, it shot straight up.

Some years later, Kelly took direction from the popular 1990s television series "Sightings" and propped his Zenith camcorder on a tripod in his backyard and focused it on the sun's corona, or surrounding halo of light. If you block out the main part of the sun you'll catch bustling UFO activity in the outer rim, the theory suggests.

"These objects are kind of invisible to the naked eye until they fly into the corona," Kelly said.

Sure enough, Kelly captured glowing objects of all shapes and sizes moving at different speeds and directions in and out of the corona. He also recorded what he believes to be two UFOs traveling across the sky. One moves on a straight west-to-east plane. The other flies the same direction but instantly changes directions at two different intervals.
UFO mania

The UFO era began in June 1947 when a Boise businessman and pilot named Kenneth Arnold reported nine mysterious objects flying around Mount Rainier in Washington. He described them as flying close together, saying their movement reminded him of a rock or saucer skipping across the top of water. He is credited for coining the term "flying saucers."

Following Arnold's sighting and the alleged crash at Roswell, N.M., where ufologists believe an extraterrestrial spacecraft and its alien occupants were recovered in July 1947, flying saucer mania began. The interest and curiosity in UFOs paired with the looming threat of nuclear attack by the Soviet Union had people nationwide and across Montana looking toward the heavens.

While the government opened an official investigation of UFOs, more reports trickled in from all over Big Sky Country. A couple weeks after Mariana's sighting, two Great Falls men reportedly saw a silvery mass over the eastern horizon near Geyser. They said the large, oblong object had a long tail and flew extremely high. It vanished over the western horizon in about eight seconds. The following week two Air Force veterans reported six amber-colored objects flying over Great Falls, passing each other at alternate intervals.

In November 1957, a Great Falls woman reported seeing an oblong, illuminated object that was twice as large as the moon and had a flashing light on one end. Later that month a Sidney resident reported a white ball of fire with towering red columns rising up and green lights projecting from the base moving slowly across the sky.

Several UFO reports have come from MAFB and its missile sites.

The investigation that followed the 1967 missile incidents turned up no reasonable cause for the missile shutdowns, though a number of airmen as well as the deputy launch controller from that day have come forward to credit UFOs. However, the Air Force reportedly maintains that no UFO incident ever has affected national security.

Public affairs officials at Malmstrom say the base doesn't have any records related to UFOs.

The hodgepodge of reports over the years indicate that UFOs come in all shapes, sizes and colors and travel at various speeds. Some are described as balls of light that explode in the sky. Others resemble flying cars.

Of course, there also are curious reports of what "visitors" leave behind.
Alien forensics?

The first Montana report of a mutilated cow came from the Sand Coulee area in August 1974. In the few years that followed, sheriff's deputies investigated more than 65 mutilation reports from Cascade, Judith Basin, Chouteau, Teton and Pondera counties.

The most recent reported mutilation occurred on Oct. 9 of this year on a ranch in Valier. There are similarities to the mutilations of three decades ago.

What's left behind has raised doubt that the killings were caused by humans or predators.

Often the tongue, an eye and all or part of the ear are removed along with a portion of the udder, the genitals and the anus. Facial skin is scraped off with great precision, and the exposed bones are squeaky-clean. Many of the animals are drained of blood. There is no mess, no footprints and no one hears a sound.

What's even more bizarre, hungry predators steer clear of the carcasses for weeks.

The early cases from around the nation prompted a federally funded investigation that resulted in a 300-page report concluding the cows were killed by natural predators. Even still, ideas swarm about the mysteries, some pointing fingers at satanic cults, government or military conspiracies and, of course, space aliens.
Local UFO group

Various groups have formed over the years to investigate UFO sightings, of which a majority are re-classified as IFOs, or identified flying objects.

"The vast majority of them are misidentified known objects, some probably classified aircraft," said Goodrich, who's retired from the military and works for a civilian contractor at MAFB. "I think a small number of them would very well be alien spacecraft."

Goodrich has been involved with MUFON, a national organization dedicated to finding scientific explanations for UFOs, for 25 years. As state director he assigns field investigators to Montana sightings. But with a dwindling statewide membership (currently eight members), Goodrich said it's impossible to investigate every report.

"The ones that are more worthy of investigation are daylight sightings of metallic objects," he said. "They are much fewer in number."

Goodrich said that when folks see a UFO they either should fill out the sighting report form online at www.mufon.org or call the National UFO Reporting Center (NUFORC) telephone hotline, 206-722-3000, in Davenport, Wash.

Goodrich said local law enforcement officers and public relations officers at Malmstrom usually direct UFO-related calls to MUFON or NUFORC. The NUFORC hotline is staffed 24/7, so it may be the better route, he said.

And while Great Falls has a reputation for some of the more credible UFO reports, Goodrich said folks aren't going to get much attention without a photograph or other physical evidence.

"Anecdotal evidence doesn't really go very far as far as reaching a firm scientific conclusion," he said.
Hogwash!

Arthur Alt, the author of the Tribune's daily Skywatch column who has a doctorate in science education and nine other degrees, doesn't believe aliens from outer space are visiting planet Earth, abducting its inhabitants and flying away with cow teat souvenirs.

"Everybody on this planet sees UFOs - unidentified flying objects," said Alt, a science professor at the University of Great Falls. "That does not translate into little green men flying spaceships. There is not one single solid thread of evidence that they exist."

Alt doesn't think the people who report UFOs are gullible or are telling tall tales. Rather they just have a hard time identifying what they see. Some of the explanations he offered for the misidentified objects in the sky include weather balloons, planets, meteors, iridescent goose wings, and lenticular clouds, which actually resemble flying saucers.

He added that hallucinations and optical illusions also play tricks on the brain.

"Our brain works in a linear fashion," he said, adding he teaches his UGF students to think in a nonlinear fashion and manages to change most of their minds regarding flying saucers by the end of the semester.

Though Alt doesn't believe space aliens are visiting the Earth, he believes they exist.

"I'm absolutely convinced there is intelligent life in the universe outside the Earth," he said.

However, Alt theorizes that the amount of energy, time and food it would take to visit the Earth would not be worth it to any species. He said the nearest star system is about 4 1/2 light years away, which would mean a 10-years roundtrip for a vehicle traveling at the speed of light.

And for what purpose? Ten years is a lot of time just to satisfy curiosity, he said.

Alt added there's no good reason why aliens would collect samples of unintelligent animals like cows, noting the missing cow pieces wouldn't provide much information about reproducing the animal. He believes people, perhaps cult members, are responsible.
Just another Montana Movie

Kelly doesn't have a theory on the cattle mutilations, but he does believe his video shows something of an extraterrestrial nature.

Relaxing in his lawn chair while barbecuing one afternoon, Kelly captured footage of an illuminated object moving across the sky. His video shows a UFO passing behind limbs of a tree and then eventually getting lost in the garble.

"I got pretty excited about it," Kelly said. "I showed my wife right away."

He reported the incident to MUFON and the "Coast to Coast" radio program, but it didn't amount to anything. He didn't pursue the effort further because he was satisfied enough.

"I finally saw one," he said. "I'm happy."

Kelly believes humans are being observed by other life forms from other planets or even dimensions.

"A lot of these could be government secret propulsion programs, too," he said.

And he doesn't believe UFOs pose any threat to himself, his family or mankind in general.

"I'm not afraid ... as long as I'm not a cow," he said.

Reach Tribune Staff Writer Stacy Haslem at 791-1490, 800-438-6600 or at shaslem@greatfal.gannett.com.



Comment on this Article


Report: Woman Stuck In Broken Paris Elevator For 3 Days

Associated Press
29 Dec 06

PARIS -- A 19-year-old woman who disappeared was found stuck in an elevator in a suburban Paris housing project for three days, the French press reported Friday.

On Wednesday, the girl's father, who had advised police of his daughter's disappearance, filed a complaint for non-assistance to a person in danger -- a crime in France -- according to Le Figaro.
The daily Le Figaro described the woman, identified only as Safiatou, as vulnerable because she had "problems of confusion." It said she was found dehydrated but alive on Dec. 22.

According to newspaper and television accounts, Safiatou's father had contacted the building concierge Dec. 19 to say his daughter could be stuck in a broken elevator. No alarm went off and the concierge and a repairman found no one when they checked, Le Figaro reported, citing a source close to the investigation.

The technician began repair work the following day. On Dec. 22, the repairman returned to complete the job and heard a soft cry, Le Figaro reported.

On Wednesday, the girl's father, who had advised police of his daughter's disappearance, filed a complaint for non-assistance to a person in danger -- a crime in France -- according to Le Figaro.

Several elevators in the housing project had recently been renovated but not the one in question, according to the news reports. They said that it was unclear why Safiatou did not cry out for help.



Comment on this Article


Wild Bees Reject Genetically Engineered Crop

Ecological Society of America
Dec 23, 2006

Major Impact on Pollination

Abstract. The ecological impacts of agriculture are of concern, especially with genetically modified and other intensive, modern cropping systems, yet little is known about effects on wild bee populations and subsequent implications for pollination. Pollination deficit (the difference between potential and actual pollination) and bee abundance were measured in organic, conventional, and herbicide-resistant, genetically modified (GM) canola fields (Brassica napus and B. rapa) in northern Alberta, Canada, in the summer of 2002.
Bee abundance data were collected using pan traps and standardized sweep netting, and pollination deficit was assessed by comparing the number of seeds per fruit from open-pollinated and supplementally pollinated flowers. There was no pollination deficit in organic fields, a moderate pollination deficit in conventional fields, and the greatest pollination deficit in GM fields. Bee abundance was greatest in organic fields, followed by conventional fields, and lowest in GM fields. Overall, there was a strong, positive relationship between bee abundance at sampling locations and reduced pollination deficits. Seed set in B. napus increased with greater bee abundance. Because B. rapa is an obligate outcrossing species, the lack of pollination deficit in the organic (B. rapa) fields likely was due to the high bee abundance rather than a lower dependence of B. rapa on pollinators than B. napus canola. Our study illustrates the importance of wild bees to agricultural production and suggests that some agroecosystems may better sustain wild bee abundance, resulting in greater seed production.

Further research on why some cropping systems, such as genetically modified, herbicide-resistant canola, have low wild bee abundance would be useful for management of agroecosystems to promote sustainability of food production. Key words: agriculture; bees; Brassica rapa; Brassica napus; canola; conventional; genetically modified; organic; pollination; sustainable development.



Comment on this Article


So-Damn Insane


Saddam wins big! (And human rights take a thumping)- Saddam Hussein might have been the first leader to be held accountable for genocide. Instead, he'll go down as a martyr to neocolonialism.

by Joshua Holland
December 28, 2006.

Under "Iraqi law*," Saddam Hussein must hang before January 27 for ordering the deaths of 148 people in the town of Dujail in 1982. CBS reports that the execution will be recorded, but it's not clear if the tape will be broadcast.

As I've written before, the trial was a joke -- an utter sham. And while Saddam Hussein, the decrepit old man, doesn't deserve much in the way of sympathy, the fact that the Bushies -- in order to score domestic political points -- threw away an opportunity to bring to justice Saddam Hussein, the former president of Iraq who ordered the gassing of as many as 30,000 Kurds, will go down as one of the great tragedies in a war that's been replete with them.

Saddam couldn't have hoped for a better end than a swift death after an illegitimate trial by Western occupiers, or a better legacy than that which will result from it.
Saddam might have been tried for genocide in proceedings that conformed to at least the minimal standards of due process. And he would have been found guilty, sending a loud message to future dictators. Instead, his death will be perceived by much of the world as a textbook case of victor's justice -- the final act in a decades-long dance with the West in which Saddam ended up martyred on the altar of Pan-Arabism after an illegal invasion by the U.S. and Britain.

It may not be a very accurate portrait of his reign, but it'll gain traction as Iraq continues to fester and the Sunni-Arab world continues to sweat the emergence of a "Shiite Crescent" in the ME. And it'll gain more currency if Iraq's Sunni insurgents follow through on their promise to react to the execution by canceling ongoing peace talks with the Iraqi government and the U.S. and launching a new wave of violence.

Let's put the opportunity that we passed up into context. Since 1951, when the Genocide Convention came into effect, there have been 9 genocidal campaigns, including the gassing of the Kurds in Halabja**. To date, no head of state has ever been held accountable for any of them -- Saddam might have been the first in history (see note about Rwanda, below).

Consider what's happened to the other heads-of-state accused of the crime:

* Pakistan's Bangladesh War, 1971: Pakistani president Agha Mohammed Yahya Khan wiped out between 300,000 and 3 million people while fighting Bengali nationalists in then East Pakistan. Tried for other crimes -- not genocide -- he was placed under house arrest for five years, and died a free man in 1980. He was buried with honors. A case against the Pakistani armed forces was filed in the Federal Court of Australia this year-- twenty-six years after Khan's death -- for genocide and war crimes.

* Burundi Genocide 1972: between 100,000 and 150,000 Burundian Hutus were massacred. Former Burundian president Michel Micombero, under whose regime the bloodshed took place, died of a heart attack in exile in Somalia in 1983.

* Cambodia, 1975-1979: Under Pol Pot, nearly a quarter of the population died in Cambodia's "killing fields." After years of exile in Thailand and a few years under house arrest, the Khmer Rouge announced in 1998 that they'd hand Pol Pot over to an international tribunal (one opposed by the U.S.). Pot died the night that the decision was announced, either from a heart attack or suicide, depending on whom you ask.

* Indonesian-occupied East Timor, 1975-1999: Under Haji Mohammad Suharto, about a quarter of the East Timorese population were killed by Indonesian security forces. Suharto, who came to power in what historian Peter Scott called "a three-phase right-wing coup -- one which had been both publicly encouraged and secretly assisted by U.S. spokesmen and officials" -- lives in seclusion today. Attempts to bring him to justice have failed due to his "poor health."

* Ethiopia, the "Red Terror" of 1977-78: under Mengistu Haile Mariam, as many as 1.5 million Ethiopian opponents killed in one of the worst acts of genocide in history. This month, after a 12-year trial, Mariam was found guilty of genocide. But he's lived in exile in Zimbabwe under the protection of Robert Mugabe since 1995, and attempts to extradite him have so far failed.

* Balkans, 1990s: several mass killings including the Srebrenica Massacre. Former Serbian president Slobodan Milosevic died soon before his trial at the Hague for crimes that included genocide concluded; former Bosnian president Radovan Karadiic was indicted for genocide and is currently a wanted fugitive, whereabouts unknown.

* Rwandan genocide, 1994: 800,000 Tutsis and moderate Hutus killed. One could argue that Jean Kambanda, who pled guilty to charges of genocide in 1998, was, technically, the first head of state to be found guilty of the ultimate crime (he later appealed, saying he wasn't aware of the charges to which he admitted guilt, but the verdict was upheld). But the Rwandan genocide started after the country's internationally-recognized president, Juvénal Habyarimana, was assassinated, and Kambanda was the "interim prime minister" of the caretaker government that perpetrated the crimes during its 100-day rule, not a legitimate national leader.

* Darfur, present: So far, the international community has been hobbled in its reaction to the genocide in Darfur by institutional limitations and tensions remaining from the Iraq war. Although it's universally recognized that the militias that have slaughtered tens of thousands in Darfur are backed by Sudan's government, they nevertheless provide a legal cut-out between the bloodshed in Darfur and the government in Khartoum that will make the future prosecution of Sudan's leaders, including president Omar al-Bashir, difficult.

After the Holocaust, the world said "never again." 55 years after that promise was codified under international law, Saddam Hussein could have been the first leader to ever pay a price for the crime. Instead, he'll hang for a far, far lesser offense -- a run-of-the-mill bit of savagery like any of a hundred others committed by dozens of other dictators. It may be something that few care about right now, but over the long run I think history will record it as a shameful abrogation of responsibility on the part of the U.S.-led coalition and the fledgling Iraqi government.

________________________

* I put "Iraqi law" in quotes for a reason. Human Rights Watch said that Iraqi jurists and lawyers lacked "an understanding of international criminal law," and Scott Horton, an adjunct professor at the Columbia University Law School who monitored the trial, said: "In my experience, everything that comes out of Baghdad is very carefully prepared for U.S. domestic consumption .... There is a team of American lawyers working as special legal advisers out of the U.S. embassy, who drive the tribunal."

** What does or does not qualify as an act of genocide is hotly contested. An old professor of mine argued that a literal reading of the Genocide Convention reveals dozens of acts since its passage that would qualify as genocides. The nine I listed are those where something approaching a consensus exists. Feel free to debate my choices or ommissions in the comments (here's the legal definition).

Joshua Holland is a staff writer at Alternet and a regular contributor to The Gadflyer.



Comment on this Article


Saddam could be executed within days: reports

Last Updated: Friday, December 29, 2006 | 12:20 AM ET
CBC News

Former Iraqi dictator Saddam Hussein could be executed as early as this weekend, according to some reports.

Iraq's highest court on Tuesday rejected Saddam's appeal against his conviction and death sentence for the killing of 148 Shias in the northern city of Dujail in 1982. The court said the former president should be hanged within 30 days.
NBC News reported Thursday that, according to a U.S. military officer, Saddam will be hanged before the start of the Eid religious holiday, which begins this Sunday.

The U.S. military received a formal request from the Iraqi government, NBC reported, to transfer Saddam to Iraqi authorities, which is one of the final steps required before his execution.

CNN also reported that, according to Bush administration officials, Saddam is expected to be executed "this weekend."

It's up to Iraq: official

But Homeland Security advisor Fran Townsend told CNN that the timing of the execution is up to the Iraqi government.

The White House was preparing for Saddam's execution as early as this weekend, based on information that U.S. officials in Baghdad were receiving from the Iraqi government, a senior administration official said in Washington.

But Iraq's deputy justice minister, Bosho Ibrahim, said Saddam shouldn't be hanged for another few weeks.

"The law does not say within 30 days, it says after the lapse of 30 days," Ibrahim said.


Some U.S. officials and Iraqis have expressed concern about the potential for even worse bloodshed following Saddam's execution. Saddam's lawyer, Khalil al-Dulaimi, said transferring Saddam to Iraqi authorities could be the trigger.

"If the American administration insists in handing the president to the Iraqis, it would commit a great strategic mistake which would lead to the escalation of the violence in Iraq and the eruption of a destructive civil war," al-Dulaimi told the Associated Press in a telephone interview.

Comment: Hmmm. That's quite a difference of interpretation over the law: within 30 days vs after a lapse of 30 days....

Not that it is Saddam who will be going to his death. For more on that story see The Capture, Trial and Conviction of Saddam Hussein - Another US Intelligence Farce.


Comment on this Article


Officials: Saddam still in U.S. custody

By LAUREN FRAYER
Associated Press
29 Dec 06

BAGHDAD, Iraq -- Saddam Hussein's half brothers visited him in his jail cell and he gave them his will, Iraqi officials said Friday, indicating his execution may be approaching. But they said he had yet to be transferred to Iraqi custody.

The former president is being held at Camp Cropper, an American military prison where he is expected to remain until the day of his execution, at which point he is to be transferred to Iraqi authorities.

On Tuesday, an Iraqi appeals court upheld Saddam's death sentence for the killing of 148 people who were detained after an attempt to assassinate him in the northern Iraqi city of Dujail in 1982. The court said the former president should be hanged within 30 days.

"Nothing and nobody can abrogate the ruling," Prime Minister Nouri al-Maliki said in comments released by his office Friday.

"Our respect for human rights requires us to execute him, and there will be no review or delay in carrying out the sentence," Al-Maliki said.
The Iraqi prime minister said those who oppose the execution of Saddam were insulting the honor of his victims. His office said he made the remarks in a meeting with families of people who died during Saddam's rule.

On Thursday two half brothers visited Saddam, a member of Saddam's defense team said, citing another of Saddam's lawyers.

"Upon his request, his two half brothers ... were brought to him and spent some time in his cell," Badee Izzat Aref told The Associated Press in a telephone call from Dubai.

"Saddam handed his brothers his personal belongings," Aref said.

A senior commander at the Iraqi defense ministry also confirmed the meeting, and said that Saddam handed over his will to one of his half brothers. The official spoke on condition of anonymity because he was not authorized to speak to the media.

But Raed Juhi, spokesman for the High Tribunal court that convicted Saddam, denied that Saddam's relatives visited him.

The White House was preparing for Saddam's execution as early as this weekend, based on information that U.S. officials in Baghdad were receiving from the Iraqi government, a senior administration official said in Washington.

U.S. and Iraqi authorities have said he will be handed over to Iraqi officials prior to his execution.

An official close to al-Maliki has said Saddam would remain in U.S. custody until he is delivered to Iraqi authorities on the day of his execution. The official spoke on condition of anonymity because he was not authorized to speak to the press.

Ibrahim said Friday that the transfer had yet to occur.

"Press reports that he has been handed over are not correct," he said late Friday morning local time.

On Thursday, Saddam's chief lawyer beseeched world leaders to prevent the United States from handing over the ousted dictator to Iraqi authorities.

"According to the international conventions, it is forbidden to hand a prisoner of war to his adversary," Khalil al-Dulaimi told The Associated Press.

"I urge all the international and legal organizations, the United Nations secretary-general, the Arab League and all the leaders of the world to rapidly prevent the American administration from handing the president to the Iraqi authorities," al-Dulaimi said.

Cardinal Renato Martino, Pope Benedict XVI's top prelate for justice issues and a former Vatican envoy to the U.N., condemned the death sentence in a newspaper interview published Thursday, saying capital punishment goes against the teachings of the Roman Catholic Church.

After Saddam's death sentence was handed down last month, Louise Arbour, the U.N. high commissioner for human rights, urged Iraq to ensure a fair appeals process and to refrain from executing Saddam even if the sentence is upheld.

Some international legal observers and human rights groups have also called Saddam's trial unfair because of alleged interference by the Shiite-dominated government.

But State Department Deputy Spokesman Tom Casey said Thursday the Bush administration believes the trial was held in accordance with international and Iraqi laws.

"(The Iraqis) carried out their work in a transparent and open manner and they arrived at a verdict based on the facts in the case," Casey said.

News of Saddam's impending execution came as the U.S. military reported the deaths of eight more troops and announced that Iraqi forces, backed by American forces, captured an al-Qaida in Iraq cell leader believed responsible for the June kidnapping of two soldiers who were found tortured and killed.

With at least 72 more Iraqis killed Thursday in violence, U.S. officials and Iraqis expressed concern about the potential for even worse bloodshed following Saddam's execution. Al-Dulaimi, the lawyer, said transferring Saddam to Iraqi authorities could be the trigger.

"If the American administration insists in handing the president to the Iraqis, it would commit a great strategic mistake which would lead to the escalation of the violence in Iraq and the eruption of a destructive civil war," he said in a telephone interview.

On Friday, a round of mortar shells slammed into al-Maidan square in central Baghdad, wounding ten people and damaging shops and buildings in the area, a police officer at Rissafa Police Station said on condition of anonymity out of security concerns.

A roadside bomb wounded three civilians in Balad Ruz, 45 miles northeast of Baghdad, police said.

Comment: George Bush, Dick Cheney, Don Rumsfeld, Condoleezza Rice, et al, need to pay close attention to the precedent they are setting for the handling of War Criminals and those who commit Genocide. They should remember the story of Haman...

Comment on this Article


TV: Iraq denies transfer of Saddam

www.chinaview.cn 2006-12-29 16:37:29

BAGHDAD, Dec. 29 (Xinhua) -- Iraq's Department of Justice Friday denied reports saying that U.S. has transferred ousted Iraqi leader Saddam Hussein to the Iraqi authorities, pan-Arabic television al-Jazeera reported.

Officials from Justice Ministry said that the news report about the transfer of Saddam is untrue, adding that Saddam is still in custody of Americans now.
The denial of Iraqi officials came after CNN quoted a defense lawyer of Saddam as saying that they were asked by the U.S.officials to pick up belongings of Saddam, who has been transferred from U.S. custody to Iraqi authorities.

CNN also hailed the hand-over as a key step before the former Iraqi president is executed, saying that it is apparent that the execution process is under way.

Saddam is now being held at a U.S. camp near Baghdad international airport.

On Nov. 5, a panel of five Iraqi judges sentenced Saddam, his half-brother Barzan al-Tikriti and Iraq's former chief judge Awad Hamed al-Bandar to death by hanging for killing of 148 people in Dujail, some 60 km north of Baghdad.

On Dec. 3, the defense lawyers of Saddam officially appealed to the higher court against the death penalty imposed on Saddam and another two codefendants.

However, the Iraqi appellate court chief announced on Tuesday that the court had upheld the death sentence for Saddam Hussein and he would be executed within 30 days.



Comment on this Article


Saddam's Time Running Out - U.S. Takes First Step Toward Handing Him Over To Iraqi Authorities

CBS/AP
Dec. 29, 2006

Saddam Hussein remained in American custody Friday morning, pending his handover to Iraqi authorities for execution, his chief defense attorney and a top Iraqi official said.

The lawyer, Khalil al-Dulaimi, said American officials had called him and asked him to authorize someone to receive Saddam's personal belongings from the U.S. military prison where the ousted Iraqi leader is being held. Al-Dulaimi said he had not yet done that.

But he said, "This call means that they will hand him to the Iraqi authorities soon."
A U.S. military officer told CBS News Thursday that Saddam Hussein would be turned over to the Iraqi government within the next 36 hours. CBS News national security correspondent David Martin reports the officer expects that the Iraqis will execute their former leader before the start of the Eid religious holiday on Sunday.

Al-Dulaimi, speaking from Amman, Jordan, said he could not say when the handover will be, or when Saddam's expected execution will happen.

Al-Dulaimi warned that turning over Saddam to the Iraqis would increase the sectarian violence that already is tearing the country apart.

"If the American administration insists in handing the president to the Iraqis, it would commit a great strategic mistake which would lead to the escalation of the violence in Iraq and the eruption of a destructive civil war," he said.

Issam Ghazzawi, another member of Saddam's defense team, said there was no way of knowing when Saddam's execution would take place.

"The only person who can predict the execution of the president ... is God and Bush," Ghazzawi said on Thursday.

Saddam is being held at the American military prison known as Camp Cropper. U.S. and Iraqi authorities have said he must be handed over to Iraqi officials prior to his execution.

"Press reports that he has been handed over are not correct," Bosho Ibrahim, Iraq's deputy justice minister, said late Friday morning local time.

Armand Cucciniello, a spokesman for the U.S. Embassy in Baghdad, said he could not say whether Saddam had been transferred to Iraqi authorities.

"It's up to the government of Iraq to carry out the execution," Cucciniello said.

National Security adviser Mouffak al Rubaie said fear of reprisals by Saddam loyalists has kept the date of the execution secret, he strongly indicated to CBS News that Saddam's execution is imminent.

"I think the sooner the better," al Rubaie told CBS News correspondent Randall Pinkston.

Whenever it occurs, Saddam's execution is likely to cause an uproar across the Arab world.

"It will be a huge shock to the people in the Arab world," Abdel-Bari Atwan, editor of the London-based Arab newspaper Al-Quds Al Arabi, told CBS' The Early Show. "I think people will be shocked and dismayed by this execution.

On Tuesday, an Iraqi appeals court upheld Saddam's death sentence for the killing of 148 people who were detained after an attempt to assassinate him in the northern Iraqi city of Dujail in 1982. The court said the former president should be hanged within 30 days.

Thursday, Saddam's chief lawyer urged the United States not to hand the ousted leader over to Iraqi authorities before his expected execution because he is a "war prisoner."

Al-Dulaimi called on international and legal organizations, including the Arab League and United Nations, to "rapidly prevent" the Americans from handing Saddam to the Iraqis.

"According to the international conventions it is forbidden to hand a prisoner of war to his adversary," he told The Associated Press in a telephone interview.

Pinkston reported Iraqis, members of the coalition and international representatives will witness the execution.

Iraqi officials have said that Saddam's final moments will be videotaped by the government.

"We will video everything," al Rubaie said. "All documentation will be videoed. Taking him from his cell to the execution is going to be videoed, and the actual execution will be documented and videoed."

It's not clear whether the videotape will be broadcast on Iraqi television.

An Iraqi government official says efforts are under way to carry out the death sentence by the end of this month, indicating that they want to do the execution before Eid, which coincides with the New Year.

A top government official disputed the court's ruling that Saddam must be hanged within 30 days, saying the execution should be held after that time period. The comment comes amid debate over other legal procedures such as whether the presidency is required to approve the execution.

"The law does not say within 30 days, it says after the lapse of 30 days," said Busho Ibrahim, deputy justice minister. There was no immediate explanation for the conflicting claims.

In a farewell letter posted on the Internet Wednesday, Saddam urged Iraqis to embrace "brotherly coexistence" and not to hate the U.S.-led troops.

"I call on you not to hate because hate does not leave space for a person to be fair and it makes you blind and closes all doors of thinking," said the letter.

Saddam is in the midst of another trial, one in which he's charged with genocide and other crimes during a 1987-88 military crackdown on Kurds in northern Iraq. An estimated 180,000 Kurds died during the operation. That trial was adjourned until Jan. 8, and experts have said the trial of Saddam's co-defendants is likely to continue even if he is executed.

Human Rights Watch, an international watchdog group, says Saddam was certainly a human rights violator, but Iraq's government shouldn't execute him. "The true test of respect for human rights comes when the human rights of someone who has violated in unspeakable ways the human rights of many millions of people comes into play," said the group's Richard Dicker.

In other recent developments in Iraq:

# A suicide bomber killed nine civilians north of Baghdad on Friday afternoon, police said. At least a dozen people were also injured when the bomber detonated his explosives belt in Khalis, 50 miles north of the Iraqi capital, police said.

# Two Iranian diplomats detained by U.S. troops in Iraq were released early Friday in Baghdad, Iran's state-run television and news agency reported. The Iranians were in Iraq on the invitation of Iraqi President Jalal Talabani, officials have said. Their detention was announced on Monday.

# The U.S. military announced five more American troop deaths: four soldiers hit by roadside bombs on patrol and a Marine killed in combat in volatile western Iraq. That raises U.S. troop deaths this month to 100.

# As of Thursday, Dec. 28, 2006, at least 2,991 members of the U.S. military have died since the beginning of the Iraq war in March 2003, according to an Associated Press count. The British military has reported 126 deaths; Italy, 33; Ukraine, 18; Poland, 18; Bulgaria, 13; Spain, 11; Denmark, six; El Salvador, five; Slovakia, four; Latvia, three; Estonia, Netherlands, Thailand, two each; and Australia, Hungary, Kazakhstan, Romania, one death each.

# In search of a new U.S. strategy on Iraq, President Bush met at his ranch Thursday morning with his top national security advisers. Afterwards, he said he's making good progress in coming up with a new plan for Iraq, reports CBS News White House correspondent Mark Knoller.

# In a 2004 interview embargoed for release after his death, former president Gerald Ford told the Washington Post the war in Iraq was unjustified and that he very strongly disagreed with President Bush's reasons for attacking Iraq.



Comment on this Article


Saddam to hang, but confusion over how soon

By Mariam Karouny
Reuters
29 Dec 06

BAGHDAD - Senior Iraqi officials on Friday dismissed suggestions from Washington that they would hang
Saddam Hussein this weekend and said some in cabinet were pushing for the execution to be put off for a month or more.

But Shi'ite Prime Minister Nuri al-Maliki, who has called for the ousted president put to death this year for killing and oppressing Shi'ites, said there would be "no review or delay" in the sentence following this week's failure of Saddam's appeal.

And a defense lawyer said he thought Saddam might well die on Saturday after lawyers were told to collect his belongings.
But in a continuation of public confusion at the highest levels and secrecy over the historic proceedings,
Iraq's Justice Ministry, which must carry out the execution, denied it had taken custody of Saddam from his U.S. military jailers and said it could not legally hang him for nearly a month.

One senior cabinet official told Reuters that ethnic Kurdish minority leaders were pressing for a second trial, for genocide against Kurds in the 1980s, to conclude before any execution.

"It's none of the Americans' business to decide when," a senior Justice Ministry official said after a U.S. official said Saddam could die as early as Saturday. He insisted the ministry could not legally put him to death until January 26, when 30 days will have elapsed since the appeals court gave its judgment.

With some of Saddam's fellow Sunnis angry at what they see as a political act of vengeance by the U.S.-sponsored court and many Kurds keen to see him first convicted of genocide against them, the timing of Saddam's walk to the gallows is an explosive issue for a country on the brink of sectarian civil war.

Saddam's conviction on November 5 was hailed by
President Bush as a triumph for the democracy he promised to foster in Iraq after the 2003 invasion. With U.S. public support for the war slumping as the number of American dead approaches 3,000, Washington is likely to welcome the death of Saddam, despite misgivings among many allies about capital punishment.

Two senior Iraqi cabinet members told Reuters they did not expect an execution in the coming days, not least because of a religious holiday lasting until January 7. The Saddam-era Penal Code bars executions on holidays. But another government source advised reporters to be ready for such news in the coming week.

Najib al-Naimi, a former Qatari justice minister who helped defend Saddam, told Al Jazeera: "The Americans called the defense team to pick up his personal belongings. All these indications show he will probably be executed tomorrow."

"NO DELAY"

Maliki has not commented on the timing since Tuesday's announcement by the appeals court. But, according to an official statement, he told relatives of some of those killed during Saddam's three decades in power: "There is no review or delay in carrying out the execution against the criminal Saddam."

Apparently responding to talk within his fractious national unity coalition that the execution should wait, he said: "Whoever opposes Saddam's execution is insulting the martyrs ... No one can overrule the death sentence."

Saddam had a farewell meeting with two of his half-brothers on Thursday, his lawyers said, adding that the fallen dictator was in high spirits. A third half-brother and another aide are also condemned to die for crimes against humanity.

The senior official at the Justice Ministry said they could not be executed before January 26: "If they don't want to break the law, they cannot execute him before the 30 days is up," he said.

A court spokesman and a cabinet minister said that could be brought forward if the president decreed it -- though President Jalal Talabani seems unlikely to do that given his fellow Kurds' hesitations and a personal policy of not signing death warrants.

Although legally in Iraqi custody, U.S. troops physically keep guard over Saddam. And although Iraqis will carry out the execution, U.S. and Iraqi officials say, it also seems likely U.S. forces will stay on hand throughout for fear that opponents of the former leader could turn it into a public spectacle.

International human rights groups criticized the year-long trial, during which three defense lawyers were killed and a chief judge resigned complaining of political interference.

Rights groups, along with many of the United States' Western allies which nearly all ban capital punishment, have voiced unease over the decision to put Saddam and his aides to death.



Comment on this Article


Fearless Leaders - NOT!


Blair's Folly: Britain's Afghan quagmire

by Bahlol Lohdi
antiwar.com

In 1996, Sir Robert Cooper published a pamphlet entitled "The Postmodern State and the World Order" [.pdf]. In it, he suggested,

"The postmodern world has to start to get used to double standards. Among ourselves, we operate on the basis of laws and open cooperative security. But when dealing with old-fashioned states outside the postmodern continent of Europe we need to revert to the rougher methods of an earlier era - force, preemptive attack, deception, whatever is necessary..."
That Sir Robert, the archetypal product of Delamere School for Boys in Nairobi and British rule in Kenya, should express such views would not have been remarkable. However, as Cooper was Tony Blair's top policy adviser at the time, his views were shocking. The egregiousness of the expressed ideas was compounded by Blair's effusive praise of them in the foreword to Cooper's pamphlet.

Cooper's pamphlet proposed such a radical "reordering of the world" that "commentators expressed surprise and alarm at the very public neo-imperial ambitions of Blair's Britain [and] sections of his own party dismissed the prime minister's foreign policy adviser as a maniac."

Therefore, it was unsurprising that within days of 9/11 Blair sent a plan, based on the maniac's ideas, to the Bush administration as an outline for the forthcoming reordering of Afghanistan. Moreover, Sir Robert represented Britain at the crucial Bonn Conference and played a decisive role in engineering the rise of Sir Hamid Karzai, and the Tajik "Northern Alliance," to the stewardship of Afghan affairs.

The U.S. military campaign in Afghanistan and the British-inspired political dispensation were supposed to demonstrate the new paradigm of British brains and American brawn in reordering world affairs. But, the meager military resources available to the London neo-imperialists limited their ability to have a lasting effect on the situation unfolding in Afghanistan, and subsequently in Iraq.

During the initial phase of Operation Enduring Freedom, the British forces were given a minor role in the hunt for foreign and domestic extremists in eastern Afghanistan. As British press reports indicated, this was not appreciated. The U.S. decision to limit ISAF, a British project, to the confines of Kabul also created tensions. Britain would have liked to join forces with the U.S., and so be able to "reorder" the Pashtun heartland in the South, thereby clearing the way for Karzai and his Tajik-dominated regime to extend its power beyond the suburbs of ISAF-controlled Kabul. The British knew that they did not have the necessary resources to do this alone.

As the American objective of destroying the infrastructure of foreign jihadists neared conclusion, Washington agreed to the expansion of ISAF's areas of responsibility to the Afghan provinces, first in the north, then west and south, under the guise of NATO. The final phase was to be handing over the east, where U.S. forces are still battling al-Qaeda and its Afghan component. These "handovers," meant to be part of the U.S. "exit strategy" from Afghanistan after accomplishing its primary objective, was seized on by the British press gleefully as an indicator of the U.S. military's failure, and consequent a cry for help from their stalwart British allies.

The Daily Mirror, a British tabloid newspaper, crowed that Britain intended to deploy a substantial number of troops to Afghanistan. "5,000 BRITISH TROOPS TO BE SENT INTO CHAOS OF AFGHANISTAN ... TO BAIL OUT U.S. IN HUNT FOR BIN LADEN," roared the headline.

This public insult must have angered the American military, particularly as it came after some British officers' widely reported derogatory comments about the U.S. military's fighting prowess, when Britain first joined the hunt for al-Qaeda in the initial phase of Operation Enduring Freedom.

In any event, British troops saw little or no action at that time, and their casualties consisted of a hundred or so soldiers laid low by a mysterious stomach "bug" contracted in the line of duty, forcing them to do "The Bagram Quickstep."

The Daily Mirror reported that the second deployment was to be different; a senior defense source was quoted as saying: "What is needed is to make the back end of the country secure, the warlords disarmed, and the Taliban destroyed." One could imagine a Colonel Blimp figure smoothing his mustache and clearing his throat before adding that "the feeling is the current setup is not cutting the mustard."

The current setup was U.S. forces battling a spreading Pashtun-led insurgency against Karzai and his regime of venal warlords-cum-war criminals. Consequently, the writ of the impotent, benighted British favorite did not extend beyond the precincts of his palace in Kabul. So the British cavalry was going to ride to the rescue of the alleged "American Project."

John Reid, the British defense secretary, visited Kabul several times to prepare the way for the British deployment. On his last visit prior to leaving his post, he famously said that the British army hoped to leave Afghanistan "without firing a single shot."

However, these conciliatory statements were contradicted by the asides of his officers, who vouchsafed that such remarks were meant to lull the Pashtuns while British forces set up bases and prepared for battle: "A certain amount of deception is essential, don't you know," remarked one valiant officer to reporters in Kabul.

That British intentions were anything other than the settling of old scores with the Pashtuns was belied by the naming of all their military bases after the "heroes" of past British defeats suffered at Pashtun hands. This was reinforced by the widely reported utterances of their top commanding officers in Afghanistan.

Brig. Ed Butler, commander of the British forces in Kandahar, let it be known that he kept the memoirs of Lord Roberts of Kandahar by his bedside. This was the same "vicious runt" whose idea of honorable warfare was to tie captured Afghan nobles to the mouth of cannons and blow them to pieces so their relatives would be unable to find and bury their remains. Gen. Richards, the overall British commander, boasted that he was very happy to be in Kabul, prosecuting the war in Afghanistan: "It's in the blood, you know!"

All this jingoism and British military swagger was predicated on the assumption that NATO forces would be available to achieve British objectives when Richards assumed command of all Western forces in Afghanistan, as ISAF expansion out of Kabul morphed into a NATO presence throughout the country. However, events in Iraq and the "ground realities" in Afghanistan conspired to turn Britain's neo-imperial dreams into a nightmare of military reverses and humiliating retreats, which no amount of obfuscation and spin could hide.

In the prosecution of the Iraqi campaign, the British authorities frequently leaked to the press criticism of American efforts to control the violence in Iraq. It was intimated that the superior British methods of how to tame recalcitrant natives were not inculcated in the American occupying forces. Much was made of the British "soft hat" versus the American "hard hat" approach to peace enforcement. This debate was rudely terminated by the citizens of Basra, who forgot to play their assigned role of obedient natives and began to attack British forces at every opportunity. This was to have consequences for their planned operations in Afghanistan.

The rapid deterioration of the situation in the south of Iraq accentuated the bitter public debate about Britain's deepening involvement in Afghanistan, particularly as their forces were besieged in Basra. The British military responded by pointing out that American behavior had poisoned the atmosphere in Iraq. They said that, unlike in Iraq, in Afghanistan, "[Britain] would be in charge."

The "we would be in charge" hubris infected even the reporters of British broadsheets - there were incessant allusions to the fact that Gen. Richards would be commanding U.S. forces in Afghanistan; this singular event would mark only the second time since World War II that this had happened. What everyone failed to recall was that the American experience of the first occasion was unhappy. Gen. Eisenhower was constantly bombarded with unsolicited criticism and advice by Gen. Montgomery, forcing the mild-mannered and stoical Ike to rebuke the opinionated British general. History repeated itself when Gen. James L. Jones, supreme allied commander and Richards' superior, recently rebuked him and said if Richards had been an American officer he would have been dismissed.

While the British and their Canadian sidekicks were preparing to deploy troops to the Pashtun heartland in southern Afghanistan, it soon became clear that other NATO nations were not as keen to deploy their forces outside Kabul. This reluctance was most marked in Holland, where tremendous pressure was brought to bear on the Dutch to agree to the deployment of their men to the troubled Uruzgun province, despite the Dutch public's opposition to such a move. Germany chose to move their forces to the relative calm of the north, well away from the troublesome Pashtuns.

In the months prior to the deployment of ISAF forces to the south and west, the British took the lead in calling for a change in the rules governing the ISAF mission. Their efforts produced the term "robust peacekeeping"; it was intended to lend legitimacy to British offensive military operations in dealing with their historical enemy, the Pashtuns. The British intention to humble the Pashtuns was further signaled by symbolically placing Camp Bastion, their main base, close to Maiwand in Helmand province, where a major British force was almost annihilated by the Pashtuns in the 19th century.

The British deployment to Helmand was to be spearheaded by the Parachute Regiment. "The Paras," as they are fondly called, form the elite shock troops of the British army. Their fierce reputation is much trumpeted by the British public and media, and is meant to intimidate opponents even before they arrive on the scene. The Pashtun resistance leaders' response was the Afghan equivalent of "Bring 'em on!"

Within days of the British deployment to the south, articles appeared in the British press bemoaning the lack of past American commitment to controlling the spread of resistance in the south of the country in general, and Helmand in particular. It was emphasized that only 300 American troops were stationed in an area the size of half of England. Consequently, Helmand had become the bailiwick of Pashtun resistance in the south, thus making the British task more difficult, but not impossible.

The media enthusiastically reported Gen. Richards' remarks about past British successes in defeating insurgencies during the glory days of their empire. Aspects of the forthcoming campaign to tame the Pashtun hoards were elucidated. The "ink spot" strategy, a term translated from the French term tache d'huile, was explained. The British public, as well as the international audience, was being readied for a bravura performance by British forces. Alas, this did not happen; in fact, quite the opposite occurred.

The name of Sangin will join the battle at Maiwand in British and Afghan military lore. The Guardian in London gave the following account:

"On Wednesday August 30, a couple of Chinook helicopters landed at Camp Bastion, the main British base in Helmand province, southern Afghanistan, and a filthy, exhausted group of armed men walked down the ramp into the dust. The men of A Company of the 3rd battalion, Paratroop Regiment, had just completed their third and last stint in a town whose name has come to stand for the bloodiness of Britain's struggle against the Taliban: Sangin.

"Other British units have fought and suffered losses over the summer in that outwardly unremarkable town of 30,000 people, but none fought longer and took more casualties than A Company and the few dozen non-paras grouped with it. For the best part of two months, they experienced the kind of vicious combat British troops haven't seen since Korea. Roughly every seventh man in the original 65-strong company was killed or wounded. One platoon, the 1st, lost almost a third of its fighting strength: not quite D-Day levels, where airborne units were halved by combat, but getting close."

The Independent gave an equally harrowing account of the battle, but added that one of the Paras said that his bowels opened and he soiled himself when faced with leaving the transport helicopter in the midst of a fierce battle.

The news of other battles (Panjwii one and two, Operation Medusa, etc.), when investigated and reported, was just as shocking to British pride. The tough Paras had been stunned by the Pashtun determination to stand and fight; some of them even voiced their admiration for the skill and bravery of their foe.

As the realization and full import of British reverses sank into the minds of forces on the ground, but apparently not among their political masters in London, accounts of bitter recrimination and blame-apportioning surfaced in the British press.

In unprecedented actions, senior British field commanders began resigning and publicly speaking out against "Blair's War."

"[One] officer decided to leave after Tony Blair told exhausted troops that they were in war-torn [Afghanistan] for 'reconstruction.' The officer said: 'I couldn't believe what I was hearing. It is not a reconstruction exercise in Afghanistan. Every day lives are put at risk on the frontline. Hearing that message was a kick in the guts for me and the rest of the boys. The truth is not being told and there is anger on the frontline....'"

Another officer, "Captain Leo Docherty - aide to Colonel Charlie Knaggs, commander of British operations in Helmand - resigned claiming [British] strategy was 'barking mad.'"

The much-vaunted Royal Air Force's role in Afghanistan did not escape withering criticism: "in leaked e-mails, [Maj. James Loden] condemned the force as 'utterly, utterly useless.'" The RAF began to be called "The Royal Air Farce" by troops on the ground. The Ministry of Defense spokesman, safely in London, said, "We don't believe these views represent a widespread problem on the ground in Afghanistan."

Eventually, the military high command's solution to the grave situation facing British forces in Afghanistan was provided by Sir Richard Dannatt: Get British troops out of Iraq, where they were "part of the problem" and redeploy them in Afghanistan; otherwise, Britain faced defeat in both theaters. This "bombshell" put the beleaguered Blair on the spot - he couldn't act without permission from Washington.

Consequently, an unedifying British media campaign of denigrating the contribution of its European NATO allies was begun. The French and Italians were reported as propping up the bars at Kabul Airport, a drink in one hand and fondling the charms of comely ladies with the other. The German contingent was deemed to be acting as "traffic wardens and social workers" in northern Afghanistan.

By September 2006, the situation of British forces had seriously deteriorated, and it became obvious that NATO allies, apart from Canada and Holland, did not wish to join Britain's campaign against the Pashtuns. Therefore, Gen. Richards, from his bunker in Kabul, ordered ever increasing air strikes - it is estimated that the number of bombing sorties in Afghanistan was 10 times that flown in Iraq during the same period.

The concomitant civilian casualties were horrendous: whole families, and in some cases entire villages, were wiped out. The net result was the swelling of the ranks of the Pashtun resistance and increasing hatred of the Karzai regime and its foreign friends.

In October 2006, U.S. Senate Majority Leader Bill Frist visited Kabul. On leaving he said that the war against the Taliban guerrillas could never be won militarily because the fighters were "too numerous," and "had too much popular support" to be defeated on the battlefield. "You need to bring them into a more transparent type of government. If that's accomplished, we'll be successful," he added. This was unwelcome news to those who had set out with different aims.

To counter Frist's definition of America's policy objectives in Afghanistan, Blair flew to Helmand in November to rally the demoralized British contingent. Trying to sound Churchillian, he informed the bemused troops, "Here in this extraordinary piece of desert is where the future in the early 21st century of world security is going to be played out." Raising the threat posed to "world security" by the Pashtun refusal to submit to a foreign yoke to the same level as past threats posed by the Wehrmacht or Red Army sounded ridiculous to anyone but the discredited and desperate Blair.

Churchill coined the aphorism that "In wartime, truth is so precious that she should always be attended by a bodyguard of lies." The British media and public have become convinced that Blair has been engaged in this practice all the time, irrespective of a state of war or peace.

Blair's dissembling had little effect on the world stage: on the eve of the NATO summit in Riga, the Belgian defense minister announced that the conflict in Afghanistan could not be resolved militarily, and a political process had to be considered as part of NATO's exit strategy from the Afghan morass. The leaders of France, Germany, and Italy quickly voiced their support for the Belgian position. Seemingly, Britain was alone in wishing to keep slaughtering Pashtuns until they accepted Karzai as their leader and the cutthroats of the Northern Alliance as the new Afghan elite.

The decisions taken at the NATO Riga summit, and the anodyne statements issued at its close, dashed British hopes of using other countries' troops to achieve Britain's objectives. The ensuing British bitterness and anger can be gauged by the recent British claims published in The Independent: "British intelligence and military commanders have accused the U.S. of undermining British policies in Iraq and Afghanistan..."!

The neo-imperialists in London had failed to grasp what was obvious to M.K. Bhadrakumar, a seasoned Indian diplomat who, in numerous published articles, cautioned India against using the tag of "Taliban" to stigmatize the insurgents in Afghanistan. He added that the U.S. does not view the Pashtun "Taliban" through the same prism as India and Britain. Interestingly, the Pashtuns do not view the United States the way they view Britain: an insurgent commander in Kandahar province reportedly said, "We don't hate America - anyone is entitled to one mistake. But we hate the British because this is the fourth time they have invaded our land. We're determined to kill them and send them home in coffins."

Throughout the 10 years of Soviet occupation, and now five years of Western troops' presence on Afghan soil, the Pashtun majority has refused to accept direct or indirect foreign domination of their land. But during both periods, notwithstanding the myths spun about "heroes" such as "The Great Masood," the ethnic minorities, mainly inhabiting the north of the country, have either remained largely quiescent or actively collaborated with all foreign forces. Consequently, it has become an accepted fact in both Washington and Moscow that only the Pashtuns form a bulwark against any foreign power's efforts to drag Afghanistan into its sphere of influence. Therefore, both the United States and Russia have an interest in ending the present marginalization of the Pashtuns and facilitating their reintegration into the Afghan political calculus, thereby ending the present insurgency. Afghanistan's geo-strategic position, as well as its social fabric and cultural identity, dictates its natural destiny to be a neutral buffer between competing geopolitical tectonic plates.

Hence, as the United States nears the achievement of its primary objective of dismantling the international jihadist infrastructure in Afghanistan, it is naturally exploring modalities whereby it can withdraw its forces from Afghanistan. A successful and honorable withdrawal demands the formation of a new government acceptable to the majority of Afghans, as well as a different foreign security architecture for bringing peace to the country, while Afghan forces are being formed and trained.

The idea of a coalition government headed by Hamid Karzai is proposed by his Kabul supporters. However, the leadership of Hamid Karzai is as unacceptable to the insurgent Pashtuns as the leadership of Mullah Omar would be to those presently ensconced in Kabul. The means to resolve this conundrum would be the formation of an apolitical, technocratic transitional government, without the inclusion of either claimant or their circles. The concept of such a regime was mooted by some leading Afghans at the first "jirga" held in Kabul, but it was quickly stifled by the adherents of the Tajik Northern Alliance.

The Pakistani proposal of reconvening meetings of the "six plus two" (the U.S. and Russia plus Afghanistan's six contiguous neighbors), as well as its proposal for holding a joint "jirga" of all Pashtun tribes living on either side of the Durand Line, appear to be aimed at achieving this mode of settlement of the Afghan problem . Unfortunately, it has been vehemently rejected by the British-supported Karzai and those who wish to continue hanging onto power in Kabul, whatever the cost in Afghan lives or foreign blood and treasure.

Sir Robert Cooper's idea of "force, preemptive attack, deception, whatever is necessary" remains the British policy in Afghanistan. It remains to be seen how long others will be deceived into supporting Britain's position and the hapless Karzai.



Comment on this Article


Once, Labour wanted Blair to go, now it wants him in jail

Michael Portillo
The Sunday Times
December 24, 2006

You cannot be in parliament long before some bore takes you aside to remind you of the old adage, "That is not the enemy in front of you. Your enemies are behind you." It means, of course, that the people you really have to fear are in your own party. The fact that it has been repeated ad nauseam does not make it less true.

It is logical. While you are in a struggle with the other political parties for power, it comes to a head only at elections every four years. In any case the rivalry is institutionalised and so rarely personal. Many MPs like to have friends in other parties, which is the political equivalent of being cool. If those friendships deliver intelligence it earns kudos with your own party.
Within parties, by contrast, the battle is continuous and often intensely personal. Any party constantly anticipates the next reshuffle when some will be relegated making way for others to be promoted. Most of the time there is also a contest going on for the soul of the party, like that today between modernising and reactionary Tories.

Even though I have understood all that for more than 30 years, I have evidently not lost my capacity to be shocked. Because the viciousness within the Labour party now surpasses anything I had thought possible.

Look at the headlines generated by the cash for peerages affair. For a few days the hue and cry was against Gordon Brown who was accused (by someone) of proposing peerages for two political allies who had given money to Labour. Then it was alleged that Jonathan Powell, the prime minister's chief of staff, would bear the brunt of forthcoming police investigations. Another day we were told that staff at No 10 would be investigated for perverting the course of justice, having destroyed evidence. The newspapers helpfully reminded us that such crimes can be punished by life imprisonment and might be easier to prove than the corrupt award of a peerage.

Such stories do not come from nowhere. My guess is that most stem from either the Brown or Blair camps. Consider the implications. Supporters of the chancellor and the prime minister bandy accusations against their colleagues of potentially criminal behaviour. I cannot think of a precedent.

History provides many examples of political enmity. Enoch Powell, a Tory MP, so detested Edward Heath's policies that he refused to stand in the February 1974 election and urged people to vote Labour, probably sealing the government's defeat. Sir Geoffrey Howe's resignation speech in 1990 precipitated the end of Margaret Thatcher's premiership. After John Major sacked Norman Lamont, his chancellor, the two men did not speak for many years.

However, in none of those cases were the rivals seeking to get each other locked up. Whereas in the present case I am told that a Labour figure took what he hoped was damaging information about this administration to the police. Also, in the past the causes of the enmity were generally political, even if over time they also became highly personal.

Recently I interviewed Tony Benn about the stormy meeting of the parliamentary Labour party that followed the resignation of Aneurin Bevan in 1951 over the chancellor's decision to introduce charges for certain National Health Service supplies. Benn recalls that parliamentarians were offering to take each other outside for a punch- up, and in his diary he mentions Bevan's hatred and paranoia. But even if Hugh Gaitskell at the Treasury and Bevan also hated each other, their dispute was essentially political.

It is a mystery what the fundamental political difference between Brown and Tony Blair is meant to be. The chancellor wishes us to believe that it is not the Iraq war, relations with America or the renewal of our nuclear deterrent. Nor apparently is it the "need" for tough measures to combat domestic terror. Maybe there are differences on foundation schools and trust hospitals, but if so they are so arcane that probably even the warring factions could not explain them.

Perhaps some of Labour's hatred for Blair is because many feel that the party has been kidnapped by an outsider. They see the prime minister as a barely disguised Tory who has trampled on Labour's constitution and traditions. His sins are compounded by Iraq and his worst detractors regard him as a warmonger with blood on his hands. That might explain why they would happily see him end up in jail.

The fact that Blair has won Labour three unprecedented election victories cuts no ice. He has, his enemies say, done nothing to further equality during his time in office and in any case it is a coterie of cronies, not Labour, that has governed Britain for the past decade.

One question arises. Are the people who feed the fratricidal bile to the media really working for Brown or Blair? The short answer is yes. It is true that in the loosely licensed clusters of creeps who do this filthy work some go to excesses that embarrass (if not exactly outrage) their master. But protests of innocence from either Brown or Blair do not wash. These briefings have been going on for more than a decade and the two rivals are therefore by now responsible for everything said, even if the most outlandish accusations were not authorised specifically.

What, you might wonder, is the point of tarring Brown with allegations of corruption? The chancellor is unstoppable. No other candidate for the Labour leadership stands a chance. So the only result from tarnishing his reputation is to push the sleaze slick into Brown's administration and help David Cameron's election chances. To judge by the warmth with which the Tory leader was recently greeted in Brussels by Peter Mandelson, the European commissioner, you have to wonder on whose side Blair's friend will be at the general election. Certainly Mandelson's intelligence about Brown, perhaps along with a few suggestions for dirty tricks, could be helpful to the Tory campaign.

There is always a danger of underestimating Blair's ruthlessness. The charm disorients us still after all these years. But he is, in Chaucer's phrase, the smiler with the knife under the cloak. If Lord Levy needs to be sacrificed in the cash for peerages affair to secure Blair's survival (or freedom), he will be just the latest in a long line of businessmen who flew too close to the sun and were burnt.

The possibility of a politician being imprisoned is not unthinkable these days. I have had to visit two of my former colleagues in jail and their cases emphasise what a potent charge obstruction of justice is. Harold Wilson was never accused of any crime but Joseph Kagan, his raincoat maker, whom Wilson ennobled on his departure from Downing Street, subsequently served time.
It is hardly likely that Blair will be locked away. Even President Nixon avoided clink, although he needed a pardon to ensure it.

Indeed the police investigation may be a distraction in judging the prime minister's conduct. I can foresee him on the day that the investigation ends without charges against him claiming that this proves that he did nothing wrong. It will prove nothing of the sort.

Blair recommended four people for peerages, of whom three were ruled unsuitable by the Lords appointments commission, and that was before it became known that they had lent the Labour party money. At least some of them had been asked to convert their offered donations into loans: that is, to change from something that needed to be declared to something that could remain hidden.

Blair has claimed in recent days that the loans were scarcely odd since the men were being nominated for service to the Labour party. In fact they were proposed for their public service. Even if Levy is made a fall guy, we must recall that he did not put the men up for honours. That power rests with the prime minister alone.

I would be content if Blair were made to account to parliament for his actions. I do not demand that he be locked up and the key thrown away. But why should I? After all, I am not a member of the Labour party.



Comment on this Article


Bush Works 3 Hours, Tires Quickly - Taking More Time to Craft Iraq Plan

By DEB RIECHMANN
AP
28 Dec 06

President Bush worked nearly three hours at his Texas ranch on Thursday to design a new U.S. policy in Iraq, then emerged to say that he and his advisers need more time to craft the plan he'll announce in the new year.

Burdened by low approval ratings on his handling of the war, the president is under mounting pressure to come up with a new blueprint for U.S. involvement in Iraq where the execution of Saddam Hussein - perhaps as early as this weekend - could incite further violence.

"We've got more consultation to do until I talk to the country about the plan," Bush said, appearing outside an office building at his ranch.
"Obviously, we'll continue to work with the Iraqi government. The key to success in Iraq is to have a government that's willing to deal with the elements there that are trying to prevent this young democracy from succeeding."

Vice President Dick Cheney, Secretary of State Condoleezza Rice, Gen. Peter Pace, chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff, and Secretary of Defense Robert Gates stood by Bush as he made his three-minute statement, then turned away, ignoring a reporter's question about the pending execution.

He thanked U.S. troops for their service, yet offered no hint that he was poised to send more of them to war.

"As I think about this plan, I always have our troops in mind," Bush said.

The president is considering the so-called surge option: increasing the number of troops in Iraq and embedding more U.S. advisers in Iraqi units in hopes of quelling violence to provide a window of opportunity for political reconciliation and rebuilding.

"I think the debate is really coming down to: Surge large. Surge small. Surge short. Surge longer," said Tom Donnelly, a defense and security expert at the conservative American Enterprise Institute. "I think the smart money would say that the range of options is fairly narrow and driven by the situation on the ground in Iraq."

Initially, White House advisers said Bush would announce a plan before Christmas. Then, they said it was more likely after the first of the year. His speech now is to occur in the early weeks of January.

James Carafano, senior fellow at the conservative Heritage Foundation, said that if Bush is delaying his announcement, it has less to do with events in the United States and more to do with the situation in Iraq.

"If it were just picking a troop number, they'd be done by now," Carafano said. "My guess is that it (Bush's plan) has to synchronize with some kind of Iraqi domestic political situation in Iraq."

Some military experts support a surge in troop levels beyond the 140,000 already on the ground in Iraq. They contend this will provide a window of opportunity for rebuilding and a political reconciliation between the Sunni and Shiite factions.

Democrats and others in the military community say sending more troops only increases the Iraqis' dependence on U.S. forces and allows them to delay making the painful political compromises needed to end the violence. Democrats are calling on Bush to end America's open-ended commitment in Iraq and some want to see Congress put restrictions on funding any large increases in U.S. troops there.

The president's unexpected remarks last week that he backs future expansion of the overall size of the Army and Marine Corps to lessen strain on ground forces was viewed as a possible hint that he plans to send in more troops.

In an action that might also foreshadow an increase in troops, the Pentagon on Wednesday announced that the 2nd Brigade, 82nd Airborne Division, based at Fort Bragg, N.C., will deploy to Kuwait to serve as the reserve force early next year.

Bush said his New Year's resolution is that U.S. troops will be safe and that the United States, in 2007, helps Iraq move closer to being able to sustain, govern and defend itself.

"My resolution is, is that they'll be safe and that we'll come closer to our objective, that we'll be able to help this young democracy survive and thrive and, therefore, we'll be writing a chapter of peace," Bush said.

As he spoke, the administration was preparing for the execution of Saddam as early as this weekend. That prediction was based on information that U.S. officials in Baghdad were receiving from the Iraqi government, according to a senior administration official, who spoke on condition of anonymity because he didn't want to overshadow the president's remarks.

The official said Bush would likely hold another National Security Council session before announcing his new strategy in Iraq in the first few weeks of January.

At the meeting here Thursday, Gates and Pace, who just returned from Iraq, elaborated on the briefing they gave the president at the Camp David presidential retreat in Maryland before Christmas. The bulk of the meeting focused on improving security in Iraq, but the president and his advisers also talked about economic and political issues.

Bush plans to return to Washington on Jan. 1. He and first lady Laura Bush will go immediately from Andrews Air Force Base to the Capitol to pay their respects to former President Gerald R. Ford (nyse: F - news - people ), whose casket will be on public display in the Rotunda.

Copyright 2006 Associated Press.



Comment on this Article


Bush Redefines His Global War to Encompass a New Range of Enemies

Chris Floyd
29/12/2006

Wise man Robert Parry, who has been a light shining in the darkness for decades now, identifies an important - and entirely sinister - change in Bush's description of the "Long War" that he has initiated around the world. This semantic shift portends an even greater level of bloodshed, state terrorism and tyranny than we have yet seen, as it indicates another stage in the inexorable expansion of the "enemies" that the "forces of civilization" must crush by violence.

As Parry notes, this declension into madness has moved from very specific targets ("terrorist groups of global reach") to the more generalized and already impossibly vague "global war on terrorism" to the new formulation: a war against "radicals and extremists" - wherever they might be, however you decide, arbitrarily, to define them, and whether or not they engage in violence against the United States.

And make no mistake: the American Establishment as a whole has bought into the "war on terror" package in one form or another, i.e., viewing the murderous actions of a few bands of criminals not as a law enforcement problem to be tackled within the traditional systems of law and representative politics but as some wholly new, ludicrously overblown existential crisis of civilization that can only be "solved" by indiscriminate military force abroad and the gutting of civil liberties at home. In the Establishment, you will find almost no voice of any substance, reach or power that contests the latter view, although a few might quibble on how best to prosecute this endless war. Thus, the benchmarks that Bush is setting today, the way he is defining the "Long War" and establishing the patterns of executive power to deal with it will have a very large and continuing impact even when he is out of office. Why? Because as Parry shows here, Bush's expanding definitions of this endless war are being accepted by the Establishment - even now, when he is at one of the lowest ebbs of popular support that any president has ever faced.

So you should read Parry's whole piece. It's important not only as a description of what is happening today, but also as a guideline for where we will be heading in the future.

Bush's 'Global War on Radicals' (consortiumnews.com)

Excerpts: The United States will never win the "war on terror," in part, because George W. Bush keeps applying elastic definitions to the enemy, most recently expanding the conflict into a war against Muslim "radicals and extremists."

With almost no notice in Official Washington, Bush has inserted this new standard for judging who's an enemy as he lays the groundwork for a wider conflict in the Middle East and a potentially endless world war against many of the planet's one billion adherents to Islam.

Indeed, it could be argued that the "war on terror" has now morphed into the "war on radicals," allowing Bush to add the likes of Iraqi Shiite cleric Moqtada al-Sadr and the leaders of Syria and Iran to his lengthening international enemies list...

Now, Bush is broadening the war's parameters yet again, depicting the goal of his Middle East policy as defeating "radicals and extremists," categories that are even more elastic than the word "terrorist."

At a joint news conference with British Prime Minister Tony Blair on Dec. 7, Bush said, "I believe we're in an ideological struggle between forces that are reasonable and want to live in peace, and radicals and extremists." Bush has repeated this formulation in other recent public appearances, including at his news conference of Dec. 20 when he portrayed the fight against "radicals and extremists" as a long-term test of American manhood....

In other words, the war against "terrorist groups of global reach," which became the "global war on terrorism," now has morphed into what might be called the "global war on radicals and extremists," a dramatic escalation of the war's ambitions with nary a comment from the U.S. news media.

So, under Bush's new war framework, the enemy doesn't necessarily have to commit or plot acts of international terrorism or even local acts of terrorism. It only matters that Bush judges the person to be a "radical" or an "extremist." While the word "terrorism" is open to abuse - under the old adage "one man's terrorist is another man's freedom fighter" - the definition of "radical" or "extremist" is even looser. It all depends on your point of view.



Comment on this Article



Sheehan arrested near Bush ranch

AP
29/12/2006

CRAWFORD, Texas - Peace activist Cindy Sheehan and four other protesters were arrested Thursday for blocking a road near President Bush's ranch, authorities said.

Sheehan and the others lay or sat in the road for about 20 minutes and didn't heed requests to move, Texas Department of Public Safety Lt. R.T. King said.

"They weren't going unless they were arrested," King told The Associated Press.
Sheehan told the Waco Tribune-Herald that she and others were conducting a "peace surge" to address concerns that Bush may increase U.S. troop numbers in Iraq. Protesters said they had expected to be arrested.

Sheehan and the others were arrested on a misdemeanor charge of obstructing a highway passageway, said a bond clerk at the McLennan County Jail in Waco. She said it was unclear if they would be arraigned Thursday evening. If not, she said, they would have to spend the night in jail.

Among those at the ranch were Vice President Dick Cheney, Defense Secretary Robert Gates and Secretary of State Condoleezza Rice.

The protest briefly delayed state troopers who were to serve in escort motorcades for government officials meeting with Bush, King said.

None of the top advisers at the meeting were held up, Deputy White House press secretary Scott Stanzel said.

Earlier this month in New York, Sheehan was convicted of trespassing for leading a protest across the street from the United Nations.

A judge sentenced her to conditional discharge. Sheehan's attorney, Robert Gottlieb, said Thursday that meant she will not face any punishment as long as they lead a "law-abiding life" for the next year.

"There is nothing to say that what she was arrested for today means that she is not living a law-abiding life," Gottlieb told the AP. "She may in fact be innocent."

He said he didn't think Thursday's arrest would result in any problems in New York.

Sheehan, 49, of Vacaville, Calif., lost her 24-year-old son Casey in Iraq in April 2004. She has since drawn international attention after camping outside Bush's ranch to protest the war.



Comment on this Article


Rise in New York's murder rate reflects new US appetite for guns

29 December 2006
UK Independent

The steady decline in murder rates in America's biggest cities that began in the early 1990s and earned political points for urban leaders like New York's former mayor Rudolph Giuliani appears to be bottoming out, with signs of a sharp rise in urban violence this year.

With a few exceptions, notably in Los Angeles and San Francisco, police departments across the country are recording new increases in homicide rates for 2006. Officials blame gang turf wars, the ubiquity of guns, and a willingness among young people to shoot if they feel they have been shown disrespect.
The trend prompted the Mayor of Philadelphia, John Street, to make a televised address last summer appealing to young people to cease fire. "Lay down your weapons," he pleaded. "Do it now. Choose education over violence." The number of murders in his city will exceed 400 this year for the first time in a decade.

Oakland in California fared worst this year with its homicide rate expected to soar 57 per cent. Less shocking but still worrying upturns in murder numbers are also being reported by cities as diverse as Chicago, Cincinnati, New Haven and Houston. In Houston, officials are pointing to the huge influx of refugees from Hurricane Katrina at the end of 2005.

New York, which has restored its reputation worldwide as a tourist-friendly city partly on the basis of years of falling murder rates, is not immune from the new trend.

As of Christmas Eve, the city had seen 579 murders in its five boroughs, an increase over 2005 of about 10 per cent.

Some neighbourhoods of New York contributed disproportionately to the worsening statistics. Some precincts in Harlem - whichhas undergone significant gentrification after being in the grip of violent crime for years - saw a doubling of murder rates in 2006.

Officials point out, however, that last year's tally of 539 murders in New York was the lowest for 40 years. The increase is partly due also to a reclassification of what counts as murders, by including in the tally a number of people who died from gun and stab wounds suffered in previous years. But even without those, the number would still be up marginally. It is a distressing statistic for Mayor Michael Bloomberg.

His predecessor, Mr Giuliani, has used his record of slashing crime in New York, combined with the plaudits earned for his response to the 9/11 terror attacks, to build a national political platform that may see him seeking the Republican nomination for President. Some believe that the current Mayor could also have presidential ambitions.

Mr Bloomberg has repeatedly complained about a flood of weapons into the city from neighbouring states. Several times this year, the city has sued out-of-state gun shops for selling weapons that are later identified as having been fired in murder cases in New York.

Tackling the mentality of some young people will be difficult. "They're all struggling with this thing about respect and pride," commented Francisco Ortiz, the police chief of New Haven, Connecticut, where murders rose 50 per cent this year. "It's about respect. It's about revenge. It's about having a reputation. It's about turf, and about girls."

On the brighter side, Los Angeles had reported 464 murders by Christmas Eve, a decline over last year of about 3.7 per cent, while in San Francisco the rate is expected to dip by about 15 per cent for the year.

Also seeing a significant improvement is New Orleans, largely due to a two-thirds drop in population in the months after Katrina.



Comment on this Article


Spy vs. Spy


Russia claims Yukos links to ex-spy's murder

Steven Myers in Moscow
Sydney Morning Herald
December 29, 2006

THE RUSSIAN Prosecutor General's Office has produced a new twist in the murder investigation of former KGB agent Alexander Litvinenko, by claiming a link with Yukos oil executives.

In a statement released on Wednesday the prosecutor's office said its investigation showed a connection between the radiation poisoning of Mr Litvinenko and criminal cases under way against former Yukos executives. It singled out Leonid Nevzlin, a main shareholder and partner of the company's jailed chief executive, Mikhail Khodorkovsky.
The accusation is an effort by the Russian Government to tie Mr Litvinenko's death to what it claims is a convoluted web of economic and other crimes that destroyed Yukos, once Russia's richest company. Russia's prosecution of Yukos was widely seen as a Kremlin-led campaign against a company defiant of the President, Vladimir Putin.

A spokesman for Mr Nevzlin, who lives in self-imposed exile in Israel, dismissed the accusations as "ridiculous".

The accusation against Yukos comes as a dispute between Gazprom, the Russian energy monopoly, and Belarus worsened. Gazprom reacted angrily on Wednesday to a suggestion from Belarus that it would pull natural gas out of export pipelines rather than pay a higher price for the fuel.

About 8 per cent of the European Union's gas imports pass through Belarus, which imports natural gas for domestic consumption and transits fuel to markets further to the west. Gazprom warned Poland, Lithuania and Germany of possible supply disruptions.

"We are interdependent," the Deputy Prime Minister of Belarus, Vladimir Semashko, said during an interview on Russian state television. "If I don't have a domestic gas supply contract, Gazprom won't have a transit deal."

About 20 per cent of Gazprom's exports to Europe go via Belarus, and 80 per cent through Ukraine. Mr Semashko brushed aside Gazprom's threat to halt supplies to Belarus. "With Ukraine there was an attempt like this. After two days, everything fell back into place."

A price dispute between Ukraine and Russia at the beginning of the year led to a two-day embargo that caused jitters among Gazprom's European customers.

Gazprom responded to Belarus's defiance by issuing a deadline to shut off the gas.

"You shouldn't expect new year's presents from Gazprom," a company spokesman said. "Gazprom is not Santa Claus."

Mr Nevzlin, meanwhile, who has long evaded Russian attempts at extradition, arrived in the US on Sunday prompting new demands by the Russians that the Americans arrest him.

Mr Nevzlin's name has surfaced in connection with the Litvinenko case before. He met Mr Litvinenko before his poisoning and after his death said Mr Litvinenko had provided him with a dossier that "shed light on most significant aspects of the Yukos affair". The dossier's contents are not known, but Mr Nevzlin said he had handed them to British investigators.



Comment on this Article


How Israel's Master spy was caught and why he still stands to profit

By Joseph C. Goulden
The Washington Times
December 24, 2006

Although perhaps half a dozen books on the Pollard case have been published, Mr. Olive's towers over the pack. He writes with insider knowledge gained as the counterintelligence agent of the Naval Investigative Service (NIS), which led the Pollard investigation, and obtained the confession that left him little choice but to plead guilty. To put it bluntly, the Pollard affair was not the U.S. Navy's most shining moment. But Mr. Olive does detail how the NIS can do superb work once it centers in on a suspect.

Although readers of this newspaper know the thrust of the story, Mr. Olive provides new material on how Pollard finally came to grief. There is a hero in the sordid saga, albeit Mr. Olive leaves him anonymous by his own choice.
The afternoon of Friday, Nov. 8, 1985, a co-worker at the Anti-Terrorist Alert Center in Suitland, Md., noticed Pollard wrapping a thick batch of TS/SCI materials (top secret/special compartmented information), which he said he had received by mistake. He claimed to be preparing to return them to a documents center.

A few minutes later, the co-worker saw Pollard's wife Anne drive up to the headquarters entrance. Pollard emerged carrying the envelope he had said he was returning. Something seemed amiss. On the drive home, the co-worker discussed his suspicions with his own wife, who also had a security clearance. Perhaps there was a legitimate reason for what Pollard was doing? His wife finally told him "that if he felt so strongly there was something wrong, he needed to report it."

Thus was set into motion the chain of events that led to a defiant Pollard eventually admitting to Mr. Olive that he was giving security information to an outsider.

(Predictably, he lied, first claiming the material went to a Washington journalist.) And in due course, the Pollards were arrested outside the Israeli embassy, where they had futilely sought refuge. Mr. Olive says that "to this day, few know [the co-worker's] identity."

A secondary theme of Mr. Olive's engaging book is an account of the utter failure of systems controlling the circulation of classified material. Anyone even vaguely aware of security rules will be appalled to read how Pollard systematically obtained highly-classified documents from intelligence agencies all over the D.C. area, simply by ordering them from repositories maintained by various offices, including the CIA. Pollard had no "need to know" because the bulk of these documents he had acquired had no relevance to his work.

No matter. Internal courier services brought the papers to Pollard in carload lots. He stuffed them under his desk, and then took to his car at his leisure in briefcases. In one episode related by Mr. Olive, in a single evening Pollard lugged enough documents to fill five suitcases stacked in the rear of his car. (My neighborhood branch of the D.C. public library pays more attention to what leaves the building than did the ATAC "guards.")

Each weekend, Pollard lugged the papers to an apartment Israeli agents rented at Connecticut Avenue and Van Ness Street NW, a few blocks from the embassy. High-speed copy machines worthy of a Kinko's churned through the papers -- in 18 months, more than a million pages, enough to fill a 6-by-10-foot room that is 6 feet high.

From his prison cell, an unrepentant Pollard still claims a double-cross by U.S. prosecutors who had promised not to seek a life sentence. Mr. Olive dashes this protest: The government did not recommend the term. It was meted by U.S. District Judge Aubrey E. Robinson Jr., after reading a still-secret memo from Defense Secretary Casper Weinberger detailing the grave damage Pollard caused to national security.

Mr. Olive concludes by summarizing "reforms" intended to prevent pillaging by another Pollard. What is needed, in my view, is a dollop of common sense. Pollard first tried to join CIA. A polygraph operator caught him in a blatant lie: instead of smoking marijuana "on just a few occasions," the true count was about 600 times.

CIA rejected Pollard, who immediately applied for a navy intelligence slot. When the Defense Investigative Service asked CIA for information it might have on Pollard, the agency refused, citing his "right to privacy." Superiors who contemplated revoking Pollard's clearances because of his slip-shod handling of documents and general . . . well, workplace nuttiness . . . were deterred by threats of lawsuits.

I did detect one possible legal reason for keeping Pollard locked up despite the changes in parole laws. As part of his plea agreement, he swore not to disclose any classified material he obtained while working for the navy. Further, he swore not to "provide information for purposes of publication or dissemination" unless it was reviewed by the director of naval intelligence.

To the astonishment of prosecutors and investigators, three weeks before his sentencing, Wolf Blitzer, a correspondent for the Jerusalem Post, wrote a long article stemming from a jail-cell interview with Pollard. It also ran in the Washington Post under the headline, "Pollard: Not A Bumbler, but Israel's Master Spy."

Pollard told Mr. Blitzer what he provided the Israelis: reconnaissance satellite photography of Palestine Liberation Organization (PLO) headquarters in Tunisia, specific capabilities of Libya's air defenses and far more. "In general," Mr. Blitzer wrote, "Pollard gave Israel the pick of U.S. intelligence about Arab and Islamic conventional and unconventional military activity, from Morocco to Pakistan and every country in between. This included both 'friendly' and 'unfriendly' Arab countries." (Mr. Blitzer now works for CNN.)

The U.S. Attorney's Office considered voiding the plea agreement and putting Pollard on trial but decided not to bother, given that the life sentence was at hand. When Pollard comes up for parole, hopefully some government lawyer will dust off the already-violated plea agreement and cite it as a reason to keep him behind bars.

Joseph C. Goulden is writing a book on Cold War intelligence. His e-mail is JosephG894@aol.com.



Comment on this Article


Russia fingers Israeli fugitive in radiation poison probe

Breitbart.com
Dec 28 2006


Moscow says an anti-Kremlin businessman living in Israel could be behind the radiation poisoning of Russian agent Alexander Litvinenko, but the allegation only further complicates a spectacularly bizarre murder case.

The prosecutor general said late Wednesday it had found links between the fatal poisoning of Litvinenko in November and Leonid Nevzlin, a former executive in the Yukos oil company who fled criminal charges in Russia and is now an Israeli citizen.

Without providing details, or explanation, the prosecutor general said that traces of mercury had been found in Moscow and London and that this indicated a link to Nevzlin, who has been accused of using mercury in an alleged 2001 murder attempt against his business partner.

"We are checking out a version in which those who ordered this crime could be the same people who are now on international arrest warrants..., one of whom is deputy Yukos chairman Leonid Nevzlin," the prosecutor said in a statement.

The accusation introduces another colourful and controversial character to a murder enquiry already featuring ex-KGB men, exiled critics of President Vladimir Putin, a mysterious Italian security consultant, and allegedly the world's first use of nuclear material as a murder weapon.

But whether the addition of Nevzlin to the list helps solve the mystery behind Litvinenko's agonising death in a London hospital on November 23 -- a killing that Litvinenko and his friends blame on the Kremlin -- is another question.

Nevzlin, who has been accused of links to several murders in Russia, was one of the key figures in the Yukos oil firm headed by Mikhail Khodorkovsky, formerly Russia's richest man and now serving an eight-year sentence in Siberia for financial crimes.

Israel has refused to extradite Nevzlin to Russia and Nevzlin, like Khodorkovsky himself, claims he is being persecuted for having challenged Putin's increasingly dominating grip on power in Russia.

According to Russian press reports, an attempt is currently underway to extradite Nevzlin from the United States, where he had gone on holiday with his family. Interfax news agency reported he was briefly detained for questioning, but released.

But Alex Goldfarb, an associate of exiled Russian tycoon Boris Berezovsky who was Litvinenko's friend and spokesman, told AFP that the allegation was "total nonsense."

"Accusing Nevzlin, the Kremlin is just trying to cover up," he said. The accusation "just raises the suspicion that the government is trying to hide its responsibility."

So far the Litvinenko investigation has focused on the roles of ex-KGB officer Andrei Lugovoi and former Soviet army officer Dmitry Kovtun.

They met with Litvinenko, a former security services agent who won asylum in Britain, at a London hotel on the day police believe he was poisoned with the deadly radioactive substance polonium-210.

British detectives spent two weeks in Moscow this month trying to unravel the complex web of evidence, which includes traces of polonium in Moscow, Germany, as well as at several locations in London.

Further muddying the waters, Lugovoi and Kovtun have not been seen in public for weeks and are themselves, according to Russian reports, undergoing checks or treatment for radiation poisoning.

Russia's prosecutors classify Kovtun as victim of an attempted murder involving polonium-210, while police in Germany suspect he may have been transporting the deadly material.

The Vremya Novostei newspaper described the linking of Nevzlin to the Litvinenko case as "rather extravagant."

Comment: At least this report gets closer to the real story. See Joe Quinn's Livtinenko article series for a deeper analysis of this case.

Comment on this Article


FBI Says Files In Leak Cases Are 'Missing'

NY Sun
December 27, 2006


SAN FRANCISCO - The FBI is missing nearly a quarter of its files relating to investigations of recent leaks of classified information, according to a court filing the bureau made last week.

In response to a Freedom of Information Act lawsuit, the FBI said it identified 94 leak investigations since 2001, but that the investigative files in 22 of those cases "are missing" and cannot be located.
"There is no physical slip of paper on the shelf which indicates that the file has been charged out to a particular FBI employee, so therefore there is no way of knowing where the file may actually be," an official in the bureau's records division, Peggy Bellando, wrote in a December 22 declaration.
"That's an amazing number," an academic who has studied the FBI's record-keeping procedures, Athan Theoharis of Marquette University, said in an interview yesterday. "These are very sensitive investigations. ... They could be called to account for whether they are monitoring reporters. These are records that should be handled very well."

Over the past decade, the FBI has waged an epic struggle to computerize and automate its records systems. The agency abandoned a $170 million "Virtual Case File" project last year after years of Congressional hearings and critical evaluations led to the conclusion that the system would never be implemented successfully.

One frequent critic of government database programs, Barry Steinhardt of the American Civil Liberties Union, said that record makes it understandable that a substantial proportion of the leak files would be mislaid.

Comment: The FBI should give AIPAC or the ADL a call, they will certainly be able to help with locating the files.

Comment on this Article


School Cameras Spy On Kids In Toilets

Barking and Dagenam Recorder
27/12/2006

CHILDREN as young as four are being filmed in school toilets across Barking and Dagenham.

The Recorder has discovered a number of CCTV cameras have been installed in primary and secondary schools.

Officials at Barking and Dagenham Council claim there is no secrecy around the cameras, but have refused to disclose which schools are involved in the controversial scheme.

Council bosses have in the past vigorously defended pupils' identities and have even refused to name youngsters pictured in Recorder articles - yet questions are sure to be raised about the privacy and rights of pupils being caught on camera.
Despite contacting every school in the borough, the Recorder received no responses. We have therefore been forced to submit an application for the details under the Freedom of Information Act - the response to which will be due on Tuesday, January 23.

The revelations may panic parents worried about the tapes falling into the wrong hands.

Cllr Jeanne Alexander, executive member for children's services, admitted she was unaware of the situation, but said the decision was each school's alone to take.

She said: "It was the place where bullying happened when I was school, and schools have tried all sorts.

"It's down to the heads and governing bodies - our headteachers are sensible people. They wouldn't do this unless there was a problem. There must be a reason for it. CCTV is not cheap. Our schools are sensible and money is so tight.

"Also, pupils often break pipes and cause floods and they put toilet paper in the sinks.

"I think it's going to help. We have to take strong action on bullying.

"There'll be parent governors on the governing body so they should be keeping the other parents informed."

A Barking and Dagenham Council spokesman added: "We do have CCTV in certain school toilets, but we won't specify which schools for obvious reasons - we don't advertise the fact.

"But they are not in the cubicles and pupils will not be filmed in the cubicles.

"They are in various positions facing the wash basin areas.

"There's no secrecy around the cameras - most pupils know because it's for their own safety.

"We have them in primary and secondary schools. We don't want to say how many of the schools they're in. They're there for the safety and security of both pupils and staff.

"We're increasing what schools we have CCTV in. Eventually we want to have them in most schools.



Comment on this Article


Lawyer "falls to death" at hotel

Herald Staff
27/12/2006

Police suspect Paul Sanford "committed suicide"

In what police describe as a "probable" suicide leap, a prominent Monterey Bay Area attorney fell at least nine floors to his death at the Embassy Suites Hotel Monterey Bay in Seaside the morning before Christmas.

Shortly before 9:30 a.m. Sunday, officers found the body of Aptos attorney Paul Sanford in the west end of the hotel lobby, where he had landed on a large ventilation grate. [...]

A passionate believer in "a dynamic Constitution," Sanford always carried a copy of the U.S. Constitution in his pocket, Mills said.

"He was a champion of the downtrodden, he represented homeless people in Santa Cruz, and fought for free speech," Mills said. "He did a run across America. You name it he's done it. This is a real shock and a loss to the community."

Mills said Sanford decided in recent years to add journalism to his many occupations.

Almost immediately, he caused a stir after he joined the White House Press Corps in 2005, making waves as the first reporter to ask then-White House press secretary Scott McClellan whether the leaking of CIA agent Valerie Plame's name might be considered an act of treason.

"There has been a lot of speculation concerning the meaning of the underlying statute and the grand jury investigation concerning Mr. Rove," Sanford asked. "The question is, have the legal counsel to the White House or White House staff reviewed the statute in sufficient specificity to determine whether a violation of that statute would, in effect, constitute treason?"

McClellan was apparently flustered by the question and replied that "those are matters for those overseeing the investigation to decide."
Police Capt. Steve Cercone said horrified guests were eating breakfast in the atrium at the time, and a number of witnesses saw Sanford fall from somewhere between the 9th and 12th floors.

"I'm at a loss for words," said Sanford's friend and business associate, Monterey attorney Shawn Mills. "Paul really had his fingers in a lot of different pies. He was from the East Coast, and I used to call him our 'West Coast Kennedy.'"

In addition to running his criminal defense practice in Capitola, Sanford was active in community organizations and hosted several independent radio shows in Santa Cruz and Monterey counties.

For several years, he was programs supervisor at the Volunteer Center in Santa Cruz and a teacher at the Monterey College of Law, where Mills said Sanford was an alumnus who mentored many students.

Sanford recently purchased his mother's home in Pebble Beach, and Mills said his friend planned to retire there one day.

Sanford was also active in the national arena. He appeared before the U.S. Supreme Court in 2004 beside Elk Grove resident Michael Newdow when he argued unsuccessfully that the words "under God" should be stricken from the Pledge of Allegiance.



The White House incident sparked controversy after Beltway bloggers incorrectly described Sanford as a reporter for the Air America radio network. At the time, he was associated with Watsonville radio station KOMY, an Air America affiliate, and Sanford told reporters he never claimed to work for Air America.

Sanford eventually filed suit against station owner Michael Zwerling after Zwerling was reported as saying Sanford had not been authorized to represent the station as a reporter, a statement Sanford refuted.

Mills represented Sanford in that suit, which was scheduled to begin in Santa Cruz County Superior Court in February. Mills said he did not know if the case will continue after Sanford's sudden death.

Although the dispute with Zwerling caused Sanford a great deal of stress at the time, Mills said his friend was feeling fine about it and believed he would soon be vindicated in court.

Sanford and Mills also have hosted the "Paul and Shawn Show" on Saturdays at Seaside radio station KRXA, where they covered last fall's election and interviewed former Salinas mayor and now Assemblywoman Anna Caballero, Pacific Grove Mayor Dan Cort and others.

In 2002, Sanford inadvertently found himself at the center of a controversy in Santa Cruz County when his independent election fundraising was characterized in the Santa Cruz Sentinel as last-minute "developer" contributions on behalf of supervisor candidate Mark Primack. Primack lost to incumbent Mardi Wormhoudt by fewer than 600 votes.

Friends and associates expressed disbelief at the news of Sanford's death and that it was ruled a suicide, saying Sanford seemed happy and had made many plans for this week and in coming months. Mills said he and Sanford recently decided to open a shared law office to serve Monterey and Santa Cruz counties, something Sanford was looking forward to doing.

He and Sanford spoke on the phone "around four or five times a day," Mills said, and the two had just spoken on Thursday, "tweaking a marketing plan" for their new law practice before Mills went out of town for the Christmas holiday.

"I just don't know what happened since Thursday. There was nothing on the horizon there to know this was going to happen," Mills said. "We were going to get together this week."

Mills said he had spoken to Sanford's wife, Paula, and that she also was in shock. He said Sanford, a father of two, was a devoted family man.

"This is a horrible thing for his family. He would never have intentionally put his family through that trauma. Something's not right, it doesn't make sense."

Police said that before Sanford fell, hotel housekeepers saw him pacing the hallway of an upper floor. Cercone said Sanford's car was parked next to the hotel, and he was not checked in as a guest.

Police declined to state exactly why they ruled the case a suicide.

Mills said he and Sanford often met at Chili's restaurant next to Embassy Suites Hotel Monterey Bay because the KRXA studio was nearby.

Mills said Sanford should be remembered for his volunteer work in the local community. "People don't like to work for free, and Paul worked for ideology. He didn't like the attention a lot. The attention he's going to get now would upset him."

Comment: As suggested in today's editorial by Kurt Nimmo, this was almost definitely a case of "state assisted suicide".

Comment on this Article


Fortune Cookie


China to strengthen military

Last Updated: Friday, December 29, 2006 | 12:59 AM ET
The Associated Press

China said Friday it will strengthen its military to thwart any attempt by Taiwan to push for independence, but vowed that it was committed to the peaceful development of the world's largest army.

A report issued by the State Council, China's Cabinet, also said the country's defense policy will focus on protecting its borders and sea space, cracking down on terrorism and modernizing its weapons.
"China will not engage in any arms race or pose a military threat to any other country," the 91-page white paper said.

"China is determined to remain a staunch force for global peace, security and stability."

The communist nation's 2.3 million-strong military is the world's largest but has been criticized for its lack of transparency about its buildup.

Its reported 2006 budget is $35 billion, but analysts believe the true figure, which doesn't include weapons purchases and other key items, is several times higher. By comparison, U.S. President George W. Bush has signed a bill authorizing $532 billion in defense spending for the 2007 fiscal year that began Oct. 1.

One of Beijing's key short-term goals has been to take a firm stand against any independence efforts by Taiwan, the self-ruled island that the communist mainland claims as part of its territory.

It has hundreds of missiles pointed in its direction across the Taiwan Straits.

China has also spent heavily to beef up its arsenal with submarines, jet fighters and other high-tech weapons.

"The struggle to oppose and contain the separatist forces for Taiwan independence and their activities remains a hard one," the report said.

It indirectly criticized the United States for promising Beijing that it will adhere to the "one-China" policy, "but it continues to sell advanced weapons to Taiwan, and has strengthened military ties with Taiwan."

Washington switched diplomatic recognition from Taipei to Beijing in 1979 but remains Taiwan's major foreign backer, and is committed by law to providing it weapons to defend itself against possible Chinese attack.

China has announced double-digit military spending increases nearly every year since the early 1990s, causing unease among its neighbors.

But despite its huge size, its forces are said to lag well behind those of other major countries. In recent years, leaders have focused on improved training and advanced technology, hoping to close that gap.

"This increase...is compensatory in nature, and is designed to enhance the originally weak defense foundation," the white paper said. "It is a moderate increase in step with China's national economic development."

It said the Army is speeding up upgrades of battle equipment while the Navy is building up its weaponry and troops. The Air Force is giving priority to the development of new fighters as well as air and missile defense weapons, it said. No details were given.



Comment on this Article


U.S. Embassy Is Warning Beijing on Iran Gas Deal

By ELI LAKE
Staff Reporter of the Sun
December 28, 2006

The Bush administration and Congress are warning that a proposed $16 billion deal between a Chinese company and Iran could trigger economic penalties under an American law aimed at starving Iran of funding for terrorism and nuclear weapons.

Officials at the American embassy in China delivered a demarche Saturday in Beijing. They demanded an explanation of the deal from Chinese government officials and warned them that it could trigger a 1996 law, the Iran Libya Sanctions Act. The law prohibits foreign firms that invest more than $10 million in Iran's energy sector from raising capital in American financial markets.
The Democrat from California who will take over next week as chairman of the House International Relations Committee, Tom Lantos, said his panel will "closely examine" the deal next week to see if the sanctions would apply. The ranking Republican on that committee, Rep. Ileana Ros-Lehtinen, a Republican from Florida, said she will also be looking closely at the deal.

The Chinese company involved in the deal, the Chinese National Offshore Oil Corporation, or CNOOC, is state controlled but has some independent directors, including a former vice chairman of Goldman Sachs Asia. It is listed on the New York Stock Exchange. The company attracted American press attention in 2005, when it launched a $18.5 billion bid for the American oil company Unocal that it eventually withdrew amid congressional opposition.

The deal with Iran will test the effectiveness of the recently reauthorized Iran Libya Sanctions Act, which was originally championed by a senator from New York, Alfonse D'Amato. The deal also poses a direct challenge to America's financial war against Iran. For the past year, the Treasury Department has discreetly pressured Japanese and European banks to divest from Iran and end their relations with Iranian companies and banks, warning that such deals could risk the banks' own access to American financial markets.

Because the Iran- China deal was announced on December 22, only a day before the U.N. Security Council unanimously approved new sanctions against Iran's nuclear program, it also signaled China's willingness to soften any economic blow to the new sanctions would inflict on Iran. Others say that the China- Iran deal is driven on the Chinese side not by geopolitical considerations but strictly by economics, as China struggles to find affordable energy to support its booming economic growth.

Yesterday, a State Department official who requested anonymity said Foggy Bottom was trying to determine whether the deal with CNOOC is to purchase liquefied gas or whether it would actually entail CNOOC's investment in new facilities in Iran to liquefy the natural gas for export.

"Obviously, if this would involve some investment in gas liquefication facilities - we don't know that it does - then that would be a violation of the Iran Libya Sanctions Act. A strict purchase raises political concerns, but not legal concerns," the official said. When asked about those political concerns, the official said, "It would mean the Iranians would have another $16 billion for international terrorism and to pursue weapons programs."

Lawmakers were similarly blunt in warning of the consequences of the deal. Mr. Lantos said, "When the Congress convenes next week, the International Relations Committee will closely examine the reported $16 Billion Memorandum of Understanding China's state-owned oil company signed with Iran to develop Iranian gas fields." He added that his committee would specifically examine whether the deal would trigger penalties envisioned under the new Iran sanctions law. " China needs to be warned of the serious penalties it may incur if it pursues implementation of this agreement," he said.

Ms. Ros-Lehtinen said she would examine whether the deal would trigger penalties. "If this investment is confirmed, I will seek to ensure that this Chinese entity is penalized to the fullest extent. Chinese entities have a nefarious history of providing critical assistance to rogue regimes for their missile and unconventional weapons programs, and China also provides an economic lifeline to these threats to global peace and security," she said. "As such, we must carefully review any activity that would indirectly benefit or reward Chinese rogue clients like Iran and Syria."

Despite the tough talk, there is no precedent for enforcing the ten-year-old secondary sanctions that are on the books for foreign investments in Iran's energy sector. When Russia's Gazprom, France's Total and Malaysia's Petronas companies signed a $2 billion deal to develop Iran's South Pars gas field in 1997, the Clinton administration waived any sanctions required by law.

The deputy director of research at the Washington Institute for Near East Affairs, Patrick Clawson, said yesterday that it was unclear whether the Chinese government had approved the deal CNOOC announced last week, noting that Chinese companies in the past have pursued investments without checking with Beijing. But he added that if the deal was approved by the Chinese foreign ministry, it would hurt American efforts to present effective disincentives to Iran for its nuclear program.

"If in fact Chinese companies are prepared to make major investments in Iran, it is going to be more difficult for America to achieve its goals to pressure Iran on weapons of mass destruction and delivery systems," Mr. Clawson said.

The president of the Center for Security Policy, Frank Gaffney, said he was not holding out hope that any government sanctions would be applied to CNOOC. "The president keeps waiving the sanctions on foreign firms," he said. "We have come up with as an alternative approach. Americans investing in companies like CNOOC ought to divest from those companies if they are doing business with our enemies. This is not only inconsistent with the investor's moral values, but inconsistent with the national interest and a fiduciary risk."

One investor in CNOOC is the New York City retirement fund, which owns more than $8 million worth of CNOOC stock. Yesterday, a spokeswoman for New York City comptroller William Thompson said the comptroller's office is looking into those holdings.

The New York State Common Retirement Fund directly owned $5.2 million worth of CNOOC Ltd. as of March 31, according to the fund's annual report.



Comment on this Article


Japan Passes Landmark Patriotism Laws

Washington Post
December 15, 2006

TOKYO, -- Prime Minister Shinzo Abe's government on Friday successfully pushed through landmark laws requiring Japanese schools to encourage patriotism in the classroom and elevating the Defense Agency to the status of a full ministry for the first time since World War II.
Both measures are considered cornerstones of Abe's conservative agenda to bolster Japan's military status and rebuild national pride in a country that had long associated patriotism with its imperialist past. The legislation cleared the upper house of parliament on Friday after winning approval in the lower house last month and will come into effect early next year.

Abe, Japan's first prime minister born after World War II, had made education reform a key issue during his campaign to succeed Junichiro Koizumi in September. His bid to restore patriotism in schools has drawn harsh criticism from Japanese pacifists, who have argued that such a law echoes the state-sponsored indoctrination of children practiced by Japan's past military leaders.

But Abe and other proponents have countered that a renewed embrace of patriotism is an essential step forward for Japan as it gradually emerges from a decades-long sense of guilt over World War II. In recent years, for instance, local municipalities have begun enforcing laws requiring the national anthem to be sung and the Japanese flag flown at certain school ceremonies, despite objections from teachers unions, which remain one of the last bastions of pacifism in Japan.

The education reform law is likely to dramatically increase the number of schools using revisionist textbooks that have been heralded by conservatives here but decried by Japan's wartime victims -- particularly China and South Korea -- as whitewashing its past aggression. Such books, for instance, omit reference to "comfort women," a euphemism for the thousands of Asian women forced into sexual bondage by the Japanese military during the 1930s and 1940s.

"The revision bears the historic significance of clearly showing the fundamental idea of education for a new era," Abe said in a statement lauding the law's passage.

Also approved were a key set of bills upgrading Japan's Defense Agency -- created in 1954 following the end of the American occupation of Japan -- to the status of a full ministry. The move affords greater clout to defense officials in national policymaking and budget decisions, something long considered taboo here in the decades following the war.

The primary mission of Japan's Self Defense Forces -- whose role had long been strictly defined as defense of the home islands -- will now be expanded to include overseas peacekeeping missions. Japan dispatched non-combat troops to Iraq from 2004 until earlier this year, but did so only after Koizumi won special authority from parliament.

The elevation to ministry status also paves the way for the passage of more specific laws that would give Japan greater flexibility to dispatch its forces to international hot spots. More importantly, it could open the door for a larger measure of logistical support by Japan in the event of a regional conflict. Such a move could change the balance of power in East Asia, empowering Tokyo, for instance, to assist the United States in the defense of Taiwan in the event of Chinese aggression. But officials here say it may yet take years before bills that would explicitly permit such actions are drafted and submitted to parliament.

Nevertheless, the upgrading of the defense agency underscores the increasing role of the military establishment in Japan, a nation that, under its pacifist constitution drafted by the United States following World War II, renounced the right to use force to settle international disputes. Japan has largely relied on its security alliance with the United States, which keeps some 50,000 troops in Japan, for deterrence.

But with concerns growing about regional security, particularly as a result of North Korea's pursuit of nuclear weapons, Japan has begun to shed its pacifist shell. Abe has called for the full redrafting of a new constitution that would allow Japan to officially possess a flexible military again.



Comment on this Article


S. Korea Report Calls N. Korea a Threat

By KWANG-TAE KIM
Associated Press
29 Dec 06

South Korea's Defense Ministry said North Korea is believed to have about 110 pounds of plutonium, enough to produce up to seven nuclear weapons.

In its biennial defense report, released Friday, the ministry also said the North is believed to be capable of producing biological weapons, including anthrax weapons, and possesses up to 5,000 tons of toxic agents.
The report described North Korea "as a serious threat, considering the serious nature of its nuclear test and threat of weapons of mass destruction," the ministry said in a statement.

North Korea stoked regional tensions in October when it conducted its first nuclear test, drawing U.N. sanctions and global condemnation.

Last year North Korea pledged to dismantle its nuclear program in exchange for security guarantees and aid. No progress has been made in implementing the agreement because of North Korea's objections to U.S. financial restrictions imposed on the communist regime for its alleged money laundering and counterfeiting.

During nuclear talks last week, North Korea continued to insist that the U.S. lift the sanctions before it would move ahead on dismantling its nuclear program.

The report said North Korea has the capability to launch a surprise attack on South Korea without repositioning its troops because it deploys about 70 percent of its ground forces south of the capital, Pyongyang.

North Korea "is consistently preparing for war for a long period and is likely to keep this military policy in the future," the report said.

North Korea often accuses South Korea of conspiring with the U.S. to attack it, an accusation denied by Washington.

South Korea is trying to strengthen its defense capability as it prepares to regain wartime operational control of its forces, which have been under the command of U.S.-led U.N. forces since the 1950-53 Korean War.

Seoul regained peacetime control of its troops in 1994, but the U.S. is still supposed to control South Korean forces if a war breaks out. South Korea and the U.S. agreed in October that Seoul will retake control of its troops sometime between 2009 and 2012.

South Korean President Roh Moo-hyun, who has pursued a foreign policy that is less dependent on Washington, called for the transfer of command, saying the move is long overdue.

About 29,500 U.S. troops are stationed in South Korea as a deterrent against the North. The presence of the troops is a legacy of the Korean War, which ended in a cease-fire rather than a peace treaty.



Comment on this Article


China defends military rise, says faces threats

By Ben Blanchard
Reuters
29 Dec 06

BEIJING - China's military modernization will focus on strengthening its navy and air force as it faces security threats from border spats, historical disputes and self-ruled Taiwan, a defense white paper released on Friday said.

But China, whose increasing defense spending and military build-up has been a source of friction with the United States, will never engage in an arms race or threaten any other nation, the policy paper said.

"The navy will gradually ... raise its marine combat and nuclear counter-attack capabilities," it said.
"The air force aims at speeding up its transition from territorial air defense to both offensive and defensive operations, and increasing its capabilities in the areas of air strike, air and missile defense, early warning and reconnaissance and strategic projection."

President Hu Jintao this week urged the building of a powerful Chinese navy that was prepared "at any time" for combat.

The report also defended China's rising military spending, pointing out that it spends less per capita than the United States, Britain, France or Russia and saying it was committed to peaceful development.

Describing China's general security situation as good, the 83-page document nonetheless wasted little time in denouncing Taiwan independence moves, saying the island over which Beijing claims sovereignty was a serious threat to regional stability.

"The struggle to oppose and control 'Taiwan independence' splittist forces and their activities is complex and grim," it said.

China and Taiwan have faced off since 1949 when Nationalist forces fled to the island after losing the Chinese civil war to the Communists.

Liu Te-shun, vice chairman of Taiwan's policy-making Mainland Affairs Council, said the release of the white paper raised China's military threat toward Taiwan and cast a cloud over the normalization of cross-strait ties.

"China's 2006 defense white paper still deliberately avoids the world's misgivings about its expanded military and the truthfulness of the increase of its national defense budget," Liu told a news conference in Taipei on Friday.

"It will only increase suspicion among the international community about the rise of China," he said.

Analysts said the report reflected China's primary goal of deterring both Taiwan independence and the prospect of U.S. intervention in the Taiwan Strait.

"China does not want to develop ... the kind of power projection capability that would match the United States in the long term," said Li Mingjiang, an assistant professor at the Singapore Institute of Defense and Strategic Studies.

"Its specific focus is on Taiwan, on the worst-case scenario for Taiwan moving toward independence, then declaring independence and U.S. intervention," he said.

The report also said China was facing threats from other, unnamed neighbors. "The issues of border complexities and sensitive historical problems still have an effect on China's security environment," it said.

China has fought brief border wars with India, Vietnam and the former Soviet Union, and continues to dispute the ownership of islets in the South China Sea with Vietnam, Taiwan, Malaysia, Brunei and the Philippines.

China also remains wary of Japan, which occupied parts of the country between 1931 and 1945 and which called on Beijing earlier this year to be more open about its military.

Japan's Kyodo news agency said on Friday that Tokyo held a joint navy exercise with Washington for the first time last month under the assumption that China had invaded the disputed Senkaku islands -- known as Diaoyus in China -- in the East China Sea.

The report also defended the rise in China's defense expenditure, officially projected to be some $36 billion in 2006, up about 15 percent from the previous year. Many foreign experts believe the real figure is significantly higher.

"This increase is to compensate for topping up basic defense weaknesses," it said.

(Additional reporting by Guo Shipeng and Lindsay Beck in Beijing, Lee Chyen Yee in Taipei and Chisa Fujioka in Tokyo)

© Reuters 2006. All Rights Reserved.



Comment on this Article


I-Racket


Top Ten Iraq Myths for 2006

By Juan Cole
Informed Comment
December 29, 2006

1. Myth number one is that the United States "can still win" in Iraq. Of course, the truth of this statement, frequently still made by William Kristol and other Neoconservatives, depends on what "winning" means. But if it means the establishment of a stable, pro-American, anti-Iranian government with an effective and even-handed army and police force in the near or even medium term, then the assertion is frankly ridiculous.
The Iraqi "government" is barely functioning. The parliament was not able to meet in December because it could not attain a quorum. Many key Iraqi politicians live most of the time in London, and much of parliament is frequently abroad. Prime Minister Nuri al-Maliki does not control large swathes of the country, and could give few orders that had any chance of being obeyed. The US military cannot shore up this government, even with an extra division, because the government is divided against itself. Most of the major parties trying to craft legislation are also linked to militias on the streets who are killing one another. It is over with. Iraq is in for years of heavy political violence of a sort that no foreign military force can hope to stop.

The United States cannot "win" in the sense defined above. It cannot. And the blindly arrogant assumption that it can win is calculated to get more tens of thousands of Iraqis killed and more thousands of American soldiers and Marines badly wounded or killed. Moreover, since Iraq is coming apart at the seams under the impact of our presence there, there is a real danger that we will radically destabilize it and the whole oil-producing Gulf if we try to stay longer.

2. "US military sweeps of neighborhoods can drive the guerrillas out." The US put an extra 15,000 men into Baghdad this past summer, aiming to crush the guerrillas and stop the violence in the capital, and the number of attacks actually increased. This result comes about in part because the guerrillas are not outsiders who come in and then are forced out. The Sunni Arabs of Ghazaliya and Dora districts in the capital are the "insurgents." The US military cannot defeat the Sunni Arab guerrilla movement or "insurgency" with less than 500,000 troops, based on what we have seen in the Balkans and other such conflict situations. The US destroyed Falluja, and even it and other cities of al-Anbar province are not now safe! The US military leaders on the ground have spoken of the desirability of just withdrawing from al-Anbar to Baghdad and giving up on it. In 2003, 14 percent of Sunni Arabs thought it legitimate to attack US personnel and facilities. In August, 2006, over 70 percent did. How long before it is 100%? Winning guerrilla wars requires two victories, a military victory over the guerrillas and a winning of the hearts and minds of the general public, thus denying the guerrillas support. The US has not and is unlikely to be able to repress the guerrillas, and it is losing hearts and minds at an increasing and alarming rate. They hate us, folks. They don't want us there.

3. The United States is best off throwing all its support behind the Iraqi Shiites. This is the position adopted fairly consistently by Marc Reuel Gerecht. Gerecht is an informed and acute observer whose views I respect even when I disagree with them. But Washington policy-makers should read Daniel Goleman's work on social intelligence. Goleman points out that a good manager of a team in a corporation sets up a win/win framework for every member of the team. If you set it up on a win/lose basis, so that some are actively punished and others "triumph," you are asking for trouble. Conflict is natural. How you manage conflict is what matters. If you listen to employees' grievances and try to figure out how they can be resolved in such a way that everyone benefits, then you are a good manager.

Gerecht, it seems to me, sets up a win/lose model in Iraq. The Shiites and Kurds win it all, and the Sunni Arabs get screwed over. Practically speaking, the Bush policy has been Gerechtian, which in my view has caused all the problems. We shouldn't have thought of our goal as installing the Shiites in power. Of course, Bush hoped that those so installed would be "secular," and that is what Wolfowitz and Chalabi had promised him. Gerecht came up with the ex post facto justification that even the religious Shiites are moving toward democracy via Sistani. But democracy cannot be about one sectarian identity prevailing over, and marginalizing others.

The Sunni Arabs have demonstrated conclusively that they can act effectively as spoilers in the new Iraq. If they aren't happy, no one is going to be. The US must negotiate with the guerrilla leaders and find a win/win framework for them to come in from the cold and work alongside the Kurds and the religious Shiites. About this, US Ambassador in Baghdad Zalmay Khalilzad has been absolutely right.

4. "Iraq is not in a civil war," as Jurassic conservative Fox commentator Bill O'Reilly insists. There is a well-established social science definition of civil war put forward by Professor J. David Singer and his colleagues: "Sustained military combat, primarily internal, resulting in at least 1,000 battle-deaths per year, pitting central government forces against an insurgent force capable of effective resistance, determined by the latter's ability to inflict upon the government forces at least 5 percent of the fatalities that the insurgents sustain." (Errol A. Henderson and J. David Singer, "Civil War in the Post-Colonial World, 1946-92," Journal of Peace Research, Vol. 37, No. 3, May 2000.)" See my article on this in Salon.com. By Singer's definition, Iraq has been in civil war since the Iraqi government was reestablished in summer of 2004. When I have been around political scientists, as at the ISA conference, I have found that scholars in that field tend to accept Singer's definition.

5. "The second Lancet study showing 600,000 excess deaths from political and criminal violence since the US invasion is somehow flawed." Les Roberts replies here to many of the objections that were raised. See also the transcript of the Kucinich-Paul Congressional hearings on the subject. Many critics refer to the numbers of dead reported in the press as counter-arguments to Roberts et al. But "passive reporting" such as news articles never captures more than a fraction of the casualties in any war. I see deaths reported in the Arabic press all the time that never show up in the English language wire services. And, a lot of towns in Iraq don't have local newspapers and many local deaths are not reported in the national newspapers.

6. "Most deaths in Iraq are from bombings." The Lancet study found that the majority of violent deaths are from being shot.

7. "Baghdad and environs are especially violent but the death rate is lower in the rest of the country." The Lancet survey found that levels of violence in the rest of the country are similar to that in Baghdad (remember that the authors included criminal activities such as gang and smuggler turf wars in their statistics). The Shiite south is spared much Sunni-Shiite communal fighting, but criminal gangs, tribal feuds, and militias fight one another over oil and antiquities smuggling, and a lot of people are getting shot down there, too.

8. "Iraq is the central front in the war on terror." From the beginning of history until 2003 there had never been a suicide bombing in Iraq. There was no al-Qaeda in Baath-ruled Iraq. When Baath intelligence heard that Abu Musab al-Zarqawi might have entered Iraq, they grew alarmed at such an "al-Qaeda" presence and put out an APB on him! Zarqawi's so-called "al-Qaeda in Mesopotamia" was never "central" in Iraq and was never responsible for more than a fraction of the violent attacks. This assertion is supported by the outcome of a US-Jordanian operation that killed Zarqawi this year. His death had no impact whatsoever on the level of violence. There are probably only about 1,000 foreign fighters even in Iraq, and most of them are first-time volunteers, not old-time terrorists. The 50 major guerrilla cells in Sunni Arab Iraq are mostly made up of Iraqis, and are mainly: 1) Baathist or neo-Baathist, 2) Sunni revivalist or Salafi, 3) tribally-based, or 4) based in city quarters. Al-Qaeda is mainly a boogey man, invoked in Iraq on all sides, but possessing little real power or presence there. This is not to deny that radical Sunni Arab volunteers come to Iraq to blow things (and often themselves) up. They just are not more than an auxiliary to the big movements, which are Iraqi.

9. "The Sunni Arab guerrillas in places like Ramadi will follow the US home to the American mainland and commit terrorism if we leave Iraq." This assertion is just a variation on the invalid domino theory. People in Ramadi only have one beef with the United States. Its troops are going through their wives' underwear in the course of house searches every day. They don't want the US troops in their town or their homes, dictating to them that they must live under a government of Shiite clerics and Kurdish warlords (as they think of them). If the US withdrew and let the Iraqis work out a way to live with one another, people in Ramadi will be happy. They are not going to start taking flight lessons and trying to get visas to the US. This argument about following us, if it were true, would have prevented us from ever withdrawing from anyplace once we entered a war there. We'd be forever stuck in the Philippines for fear that Filipino terrorists would follow us back home. Or Korea (we moved 15,000 US troops out of South Korea not so long ago. Was that unwise? Are the thereby liberated Koreans now gunning for us?) Or how about the Dominican Republic? Haiti? Grenada? France? The argument is a crock.

10. "Setting a timetable for withdrawal from Iraq is a bad idea." Bush and others in his administration have argued that setting such a timetable would give a significant military advantage to the guerrillas fighting US forces and opposed to the new government. That assertion makes sense only if there were a prospect that the US could militarily crush the Sunni Arabs. There is no such prospect. The guerrilla war is hotter now than at any time since the US invasion. It is more widely supported by more Sunni Arabs than ever before. It is producing more violent attacks than ever before. Since we cannot defeat them short of genocide, we have to negotiate with them. And their first and most urgent demand is that the US set a timetable for withdrawal before they will consider coming into the new political system. That is, we should set a timetable in order to turn the Sunni guerrillas from combatants to a political negotiating partner. Even Sunni politicians cooperating with the US make this demand. They are disappointed with the lack of movement on the issue. How long do they remain willing to cooperate? In addition, 131 Iraqi members of parliament signed a demand that the US set a timetable for withdrawal. (138 would be a simple majority.) It is a a major demand of the Sadr Movement. In fact, the 32 Sadrist MPs withdrew from the ruling United Iraqi Alliance coalition temporarily over this issue.

In my view, Shiite leaders such as Abdul Aziz al-Hakim are repeatedly declining to negotiate in good faith with the Sunni Arabs or to take their views seriously. Al-Hakim knows that if the Sunnis give him any trouble, he can sic the Marines on them. The US presence is making it harder for Iraqi to compromise with Iraqi, which is counterproductive.

Think Progress points out that in 1999, Governor George W. Bush criticized then President Clinton for declining to set a withdrawal timetable for Kosovo, saying "Victory means exit strategy, and it's important for the president to explain to us what the exit strategy is."

Juan Cole is a professor of history at the University of Michigan and maintains the popular blog Informed Comment.



Comment on this Article


Many soldiers say troop surge a bad idea

By WILL WEISSERT
Associated Press

BAGHDAD, Iraq (AP) -- Many of the American soldiers trying to quell sectarian killings in Baghdad don't appear to be looking for reinforcements. They say the temporary surge in troop levels some people are calling for is a bad idea.

President Bush is considering increasing the number of troops in Iraq and embedding more U.S. advisers in Iraqi units. White House advisers have indicated Bush will announce his new plan for the war before his State of the Union address Jan. 23.

In dozens of interviews with soldiers of the Army's 5th Battalion, 20th Infantry Regiment as they patrolled the streets of eastern Baghdad, many said the Iraqi capital is embroiled in civil warfare between majority Shiite Muslims and Sunni Arabs that no number of American troops can stop.
Others insisted current troop levels are sufficient and said any increase in U.S. presence should focus on training Iraqi forces, not combat.

But their more troubling worry was that dispatching a new wave of soldiers would result in more U.S. casualties, and some questioned whether an increasingly muddled American mission in Baghdad is worth putting more lives on the line.

Spc. Don Roberts, who was stationed in Baghdad in 2004, said the situation had gotten worse because of increasing violence between Shiites and Sunnis.

"I don't know what could help at this point," said Roberts, 22, of Paonia, Colo. "What would more guys do? We can't pick sides. It's almost like we have to watch them kill each other, then ask questions."

Based in Fort Lewis, Wash., the battalion is part of the 3rd Stryker Brigade Combat Team of the 2nd Infantry Division. Deployed in June, its men were moved to Baghdad from Mosul in late November to relieve another Stryker battalion that had reached the end of its tour.

"Nothing's going to help. It's a religious war, and we're caught in the middle of it," said Sgt. Josh Keim, a native of Canton, Ohio, who is on his second tour in Iraq. "It's hard to be somewhere where there's no mission and we just drive around."

Capt. Matt James, commander of the battalion's Company B, was careful in how he described the unit's impact since arriving in Baghdad.

"The idea in calling us in was to make things better here, but it's very complicated and complex," he said.

But James said more troops in combat would likely not have the desired effect.

"The more guys we have training the Iraqi army the better," he said. "I would like to see a surge there."

During a recent interview, Lt. Gen. Nasier Abadi, deputy chief of staff for the Iraqi army, said that instead of sending more U.S. soldiers, Washington should focus on furnishing his men with better equipment.

"We are hoping 2007 will be the year of supplies," he said.

Some in the 5th Battalion don't think training will ever get the Iraqi forces up to American standards.

"They're never going to be as effective as us," said 1st Lt. Sean McCaffrey, 24, of Shelton, Conn. "They don't have enough training or equipment or expertise."

McCaffrey does support a temporary surge in troop numbers, however, arguing that flooding Baghdad with more soldiers could "crush enemy forces all over the city instead of just pushing them from one area to another."

Pfc. Richard Grieco said it's hard to see how daily missions in Baghdad make a difference.

"If there's a plan to sweep through Baghdad and clear it, (more troops) could make a difference," said the 19-year-old from Slidell, La. "But if we just dump troops in here like we've been doing, it's just going to make for more targets."

Sgt. James Simons, 24, of Tacoma, Wash., said Baghdad is so dangerous that U.S. forces spend much of their time in combat instead of training Iraqis.

"Baghdad is still like it was at the start of the war. We still have to knock out insurgents because things are too dangerous for us to train the Iraqis," he said.

Staff Sgt. Anthony Handly disagreed, saying Baghdad has made improvements many Americans aren't aware of.

"People think everything is so bad and so violent, but it's really not," said Handly, 30, of Bellingham, Wash. "A lot of people are getting jobs they didn't have before and they're doing it on their own. We just provide a stabilizing effect."

Staff Sgt. Lee Knapp, 28, of Mobile, Ala., also supported a temporary troop surge, saying it could keep morale up by reducing the need to extend units past the Army's standard tour of one year in Iraq.

"It could help alleviate some stress on the smaller units," he said. "It could help Baghdad, but things are already getting better."

Sgt. Justin Thompson, a San Antonio native, said he signed up for delayed enlistment before the Sept. 11 terror attacks, then was forced to go to a war he didn't agree with.

A troop surge is "not going to stop the hatred between Shia and Sunni," said Thompson, who is especially bitter because his 4-year contract was involuntarily extended in June. "This is a civil war, and we're just making things worse. We're losing. I'm not afraid to say it."

© 2006 The Associated Press.



Comment on this Article


Prominent cleric warns against West's plot to divide Shia-Sunni

Tehran, Dec 29, IRNA

Tehran's Substitute Friday prayers leader Ayatollah Emami Kashani warned Muslims against plots made by the West to sow discord among the Shia and Sunni.

"The enemy is preparing a massive plan for the Islamic world and for the entire region," said the cleric addressing the worshipers at Tehran University campus.
He stressed that after the Western states were obliged to admit the defeat of their policies in Iraq, Lebanon and Afghanistan, they have decided to set up new plans.

"Shia-Sunni division is a dirty lesson taught by the world arrogance in Muslim countries," Ayatollah Kashani said regretting that the lesson was used by some of the Muslim states.

The cleric urged Muslims countries to stay united and close their ranks further in order "to disappoint enemies of the Islamic world." Referring to adoption of the anti-Iran Resolution 1737 by the United Nations Security Council, the ayatollah said that West has "falsely portrayed Iran as a country which threatens international security by developing nuclear weapons."

"Those who produce atomic arms and kill other human beings by giving such arms to other countries are now accusing Iran of developing nuclear weapons," Ayatollah Kashani said.

He added that the West was to question Iran's political and economic place by introducing it as threat to the world security.

"Iran is committed to its international obligations and favors negotiations," said the cleric reassuring that Tehran was not pursuing any program to develop nuclear arms.

However, he stressed, Iranian nation would not give up its efforts to achieve its scientific goals.

Stressing that the issue of Iran's peaceful nuclear activities was politicized, the cleric said "it is now considered as a cold war."



Comment on this Article


Iran ready for comprehensive assistance to Iraqi nation - Rafsanjani

Tehran, Dec 27, IRNA

Expediency Council Head Akbar Hashemi Rafsanjani said here Wednesday Iran is ready for offering any kind of assistance to Iraqi nation, Expecting nothing in return.

The newly re-elected IRI Leadership Experts Assembly member made the comment in a meeting with visiting Iraqi Treasure Minister Baqer Bayan Jabr al-Zubaidi, adding, "Under favorable conditions for cooperation, Tehran can fulfill requirements of the Iraqi nation, particularly in service sector."
Rafsanjani pointed out that strengthening Tehran-Baghdad economic ties can save both nations' interests, adding, "Lingering insecurity in Iraq is an obstacle in the way for your country's development and advancement."
He added, "Restoration of peace and stability in Iraq is possible relying on effective assistance of Iraq's neighbors and the evacuation of the occupiers, so that the entire region would enjoy security once again."

Rafsanjani described the Iraqi nation's movement towards taking the lead of their destiny as "fruitful", adding, "Unity of the Iraqi nation is an effective factor in their growth and blossoming." The Iraqi Treasure Minister, too, during the meeting said that expansion of economic ties between the two nations is a good beginning for the expansion of comprehensive cooperation, adding, "Construction is the Iraqi nation's need of the day."

Al-Zubaidi added, "We would try to proceed on that path through the establishment of peace and stability."

He said that detainment of the Iranian guests of the Iraqi President by US forces is an undiplomatic move, adding, "The Iraqi officials would do their best to settle the unfortunate incidence as soon as possible.



Comment on this Article


Katrina Kapers


Seven US cops indicted in post-Katrina shooting deaths

Associated Press
29 Dec 06

NEW ORLEANS, Louisiana - A New Orleans grand jury on Thursday indicted seven police officers of murder and attempted murder in two shooting deaths last year during the violent aftermath of Hurricane Katrina.

In the September 4, 2005, incident, police responding to a report of gunfire confronted two families on a bridge and opened fire, killing two people and wounding four others.

One of the fatalities was mentally handicapped Ronald Madison.
The officers encountered the Bartholomew family at the base of the Danziger Bridge and the Madison family near the top of the bridge, Orleans Parish District Attorney Eddie Jordan said in a news release.

"These officers shot and killed two people and critically wounded four people," Jordan added.

After the shooting Ronald Madison's brother, Lance, was arrested and charged with numerous offenses including attempted murder, but the grand jury refused to indict Madison for any crime.

After devastating floods triggered by Katrina in August-September 2005 forced tens of thousands of people from their homes, the streets of New Orleans became a lawless haven for looters, criminals, rogue cops and armed civilians intent on protecting their property.

The incident on Danziger Bridge drew attention to the lack of control and confusion prevalent among the few law enforcement officers who stayed behind in the crippled city.

"We cannot allow our police officers to shoot and kill our citizens without justification like rabid dogs. The rules governing the use of lethal force are not suspended during a state of emergency. Everyone, including police officers, must abide by the law of the land," Jordan said.



Comment on this Article


Katrina: Tale of Two Sisters

By Bill Quigley.
12/28/06 "ICH'

Gloria Williams and her twin sister Bobbie Jennings are 60 years old. They are two of the over 4000 families who lived in public housing in New Orleans before Katrina struck who are still locked out of their apartments since Katrina. Their apartments are two of 4534 apartments that the U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development (HUD) has announced plans to demolish. Demolition is planned even though it will cost more to demolish and rebuild many fewer units than it does to fix them up and open them. Ms. Williams and Ms. Jennings, and thousands of families like them, are fighting HUD, they want to return.
Gloria and Bobbie started working early. As children they picked cotton, strawberries, snap beans and pecans before and after grade school every day in rural Louisiana. "We were raised up to work," they said.

They moved to New Orleans after their father drowned. Their home was marked by regular domestic violence. A few years later, their mother was murdered by a boyfriend.

As teens they moved in with an abusive relative. They ran away, came back, and stayed with other relatives. They can even remember nights when they slept under their aunt's bed in a hospital while waiting for her to recuperate.

As young women they continued working. They worked in restaurants before starting careers as Certified Nursing Assistants. Then they worked for years in nursing homes and in private homes caring for the elderly and disabled. They fed people, cleaned people, bathed people, cared for people. Each married and raised children and grandchildren. Like 25% of the households in New Orleans, neither owned a car.

Both sisters are now 60. In the past few years, their years of physical work took its toil and they could not longer work. Ms. Jennings had back surgery and suffers with high blood pressure. Ms. Williams has heart and lung problems, high blood pressure, and clots in her legs that prevent her from standing or walking for long periods. Each lives solely on about $600 a month from disability. No pensions.

When Katrina hit, they had been living in the C.J. Peete apartments for years. Ms. Bobbie Jennings had been there for 34 years. Her twin sister, Ms. Gloria Williams lived there for over 18 years.

Their combined families, 18 in all, evacuated to Baton Rouge to ride out the storm. When it was clear they would not be going home any time soon, their host family told them it was time to move on. In September 2005, the family of 18 moved into one daughter's damaged home in Slidell, about 30 miles away from New Orleans - all sleeping on the first floor because the roof was still damaged.

One of their sisters, Annie, was in the hospital with cancer when Katrina hit. It took the family weeks before the finally found her in a hospital in Macon, Georgia.

When the city opened, they got rides into town and checked on their apartments. No water had entered their apartments at all. But their doors had been kicked down and all their furnishings were gone. The housing authority told them they could not move back in for a couple more months while their apartments were secured and fixed up. The housing authority started fixing up and painting apartments in her complex, but abruptly stopped after a few weeks.

Slidell was getting tight, so they accepted an offer to relocate to California. After a month, they returned. Being 3000 miles apart from family was too heartbreaking. A four day bus ride brought them back to Slidell in January 2006. After hitching rides into New Orleans, Ms. Williams found a subsidized apartment. The only way the landlord would accept her, though, was if she paid him an extra $400 under the table. Otherwise, he would rent it to someone else who would.

So Ms. Williams paid the extra money and moved in with her grandchildren while she waited for her old apartment to reopen. She used FEMA money to buy new furniture.

In late February 2005, Ms. Williams was hospitalized for three weeks for surgeries on her legs.

In June 2005, HUD announced they were not going to let any residents back in her apartment complex and three others (Lafitte, St. Bernard and BW Cooper) because they were going to be demolished. Over one hundred maintenance and security workers for the housing authority were let go. HUD took over the local housing authority years ago and all these decisions are being made in Washington DC.

The demolished buildings would make way for much newer and many fewer apartments which would be built by private developers. The demolition and private development would be financed by federal funds and federal tax breaks designed to help Katrina victims!

Nearly $100 million in Community Development Block Grant (CDBG) funds were designated for the private developers. Another $34 million in Katrina Go-Zone tax credits were also donated to the developers.

In July 2005, Ms. Williams apartment caught fire and again she lost everything. Her landlord did not want to let her out of her lease. He told her that she and her grandson could still live there, all they had to do was clean the soot off the walls and ceilings.

At this, Ms. Williams broke down and went back into the hospital.

Ms. Jennings got an apartment and allowed her daughter and her grandchildren to live there because they have no place to stay. She also took her in her little sister, Annie, who was dying of cancer. Annie died on August 17, 2005.

Both sisters have severe problems every month making ends meet. Utility bills eat up most of their monthly checks. With no car and their apartments across the river from New Orleans, they cannot get to the doctor.

Christmas was very tough. Ms. Williams said "We didn't have a Christmas. We didn't have food to put on the table." Her grandson went to her sister's house to get a peanut butter and jelly sandwich.

Ms. Jennings cried as she said "Behind Katrina and my little sister dying, my life just stopped. This is the second year we didn't have a Christmas. It is so hard to try to start over. I let my daughter and her two grandchildren sleep on the bed. I sleep on a pallet on the floor. Before Katrina I was on blood pressure medicine once a day. Now I take 4 blood pressure pills three times a day. I also take pills for depression, nerves and stress."

"We just want to go home," Ms. Williams said. "People knew us in our neighborhood. They never messed with us. I could leave my back door open when I went to the grocery. People don't understand that was our home. We want to go home."

Why would people want to go back into public housing? Aren't the developments dangerous and crime-ridden? Isn't this an opportunity to start over and make something better?

Public housing residents know full well the problems of public housing, but still they want to return.

Why? Start with the fact that New Orleans is in the worst affordable housing crisis since the Civil War. Tens of thousands of houses still remain in ruins after Katrina. Rents for the rest have gone up 70-80 percent since Katrina. Even before Katrina, there was a waiting list of 18,000 families seeking to get into public housing - now it is much, much worse.

HUD's demolition plans target 4,534 apartments of public housing in the community. They plan to demolish 1546 apartments in BW Cooper, 723 in C.J. Peete, 1400 in St. Bernard, and 865 in Lafitte.

These are not the dense high-rise towers. Public housing in New Orleans is made up of development clusters of mostly two and three story buildings with six to eight apartments in each.

New York Times Architecture critic Nicolai Ouroussoff, criticized plans to demolish these apartments, saying on November 19, 2006: "Modestly scaled, they include some of the best public housing built in the United States....Solidly built, the buildings' detailed brickwork, tile roofs and wrought-iron balustrades represent a level of craft more likely found on an Ivy League campus than in a contemporary public housing complex."

Most of the public housing apartments rented for very modest rents tied to the resident's incomes. Most did not pay separate utility charges. Leases were essentially for life, unless someone in the family was caught breaking the law.

HUD initially said they had to demolish because the buildings were so damaged they were dangerous to the residents.

That was not true.


John Fernandez, an Associate Professor of Architecture at MIT, inspected 140 of these apartments and concluded in papers filed in court that "no structural or nonstructural damage was found that could reasonably warrant any cost-effective building demolition...Therefore, the general conclusions are: demolition of any of the buildings of these four projects is not supported by the evidence of the survey, replacement of these buildings with contemporary construction would yield buildings of lower quality and shorter lifetime duration; the original construction methods and materials of these projects are far superior in their resistance to hurricane conditions than typical new construction and with renovation and regular maintenance, the lifetimes of the buildings in all four projects promise decades of continued service that may be extended indefinitely."

Residents promise to fix up their apartments themselves if given the chance. "I clean for a living," said one young woman resident at a recent public hearing where 100% of the residents opposed demolition. "I clean for a living and I am proud of it. I clean every body else's houses, I will sure clean up my own house - just let me back in to do it!"

After it the public understood that the buildings were not actually in such bad shape, the authorities then said it would cost much more to repair the buildings than to demolish and start over.

That too was not true.


The housing authority's own documents show that Lafitte could be repaired for $20 million, even completely overhauled for $85 million while the estimate for demolition and rebuilding many fewer units will cost over $100 million. St. Bernard could be repaired for $41 million, substantially modernized for $130 million while demolition and rebuilding less units will cost $197 million. BW Cooper could be substantially renovated for $135 million compared to $221 million to demolish and rebuild less units. Their own insurance company reported that it would take less than $5000 each to repair each of the CJ Peete apartments.

HUD suggests that less-dense "mixed income" communities are the way to go.

But residents and the community knows that if HUD has its way, only about 20% of the families who lived in these developments will be allowed to return.

New Orleans has suffered through the experience of HUD's "mixed income" policies before. The St. Thomas housing development, once home to 1510 families, was demolished with promises that people would be returning to a beautiful redeveloped community. Instead, there is now a Wal-Mart on the site and hundreds of cute gingerbread pastel houses. How many of the 1510 families who used to live in St. Thomas have been allowed to move back in? About a hundred. A few of these families have had to force their way in with litigation by the Greater New Orleans Fair Housing Action Center. The demolition of St. Thomas is hailed as a mostly-good outcome by nearby developers and some of the young professionals who moved into the surrounding neighborhood knowing what was coming. What do the 1400+ families who were moved out and not allowed to return think? Don't ask - no one else is.

HUD has the same plans for the neighborhoods where they are trying to demolish housing. According to documents filed with the Louisiana Housing Finance Agency:
St. Bernard will go from 1400 apartments to 595 apartments, only 160 of which will be for low-income public housing residents. There will be 160 tax credit mixed income and 145 market rate units;
CJ Peete will go from 723 units to 410, 154 will be public housing eligible, 133 mixed income and 123 market rate;
BW Cooper will go from 1546 to 410, 154 public housing eligible, 133 tax-credit mixed income, and 123 market;
And Lafitte will downsized in the same way.


As a result HUD plans to spend tens of millions of Katrina assistance funds to end up with far fewer affordable apartments.

The new Congress is looking into this. Representatives Barney Frank and Maxine Waters chair the committee and subcommittee with oversight of HUD. There is also a federal class action lawsuit filed by the Advancement Project, Jenner & Block, and local attorneys.

Residents of the St. Bernard housing development and their allies plan are not waiting any more. On Martin Luther King day, January 15, 2007, they are going in with or without permission. "What better way to celebrate Martin Luther King day than to risk going to jail for justice?" says Endesha Jukali, a neighbor who lived and worked in St. Bernard for years.

But the clock is still ticking. HUD, who has not "officially approved" its own announcement, says the demolition needs to get started to take advantage of the Katrina tax credits. Neither the Congress nor the federal courts have yet stepped in to stop the demolitions.

What do the sisters think about this? Ms. Jennings says: "I lived there for 34 years. That is my home. I just cannot afford to live outside the development. I don't know how else to explain it. I have the tears, but I do not have the words." Her twin sister, Ms. Williams cries and says: "That was my home for over 18 years. I never gave them no trouble. My home never flooded. I will clean it myself, just please let me back in. I wish I could make people understand. I just want to go home."

For more information about this matter see www.justiceforneworleans.org or contact the Advancement Project at (202) 728-9557.

Bill is a human rights lawyer and law professor at Loyola University New Orleans. Bill is one of the lawyers representing thousands of families who want to return to their apartments in New Orleans. You can contact him at Quigley@loyno.edu



Comment on this Article


7 police officers indicted in Katrina bridge shootings

Last Updated: Thursday, December 28, 2006 | 9:37 PM ET
CBC News

A grand jury looking into the shooting deaths of two men during the aftermath of hurricane Katrina has indicted seven police officers, the U.S. district attorney's office said Thursday.

The seven were indicted on murder or attempted murder charges and have been given 24 hours by a judge to turn themselves in.
Reports arose last year that police had shot at least six contractors on the Danziger Bridge days after the storm hit New Orleans because they believed the people were looters.

Ronald Madison, a 40-year-old mentally disabled man, and James Barsett, 19, died in the shooting.

It was originally believed both men were killed in a shootout, but details were confused in the chaotic days following Katrina, which hit the city on Aug. 29, 2005.

The Danziger Bridge incident occurred six days after the hurricane.

Defence lawyers urged caution with regard to the case.

"As a wise man once said, a district attorney can get a grand jury to indict a ham sandwich," said Franz Zibilich, attorney for officer Robert Faulcon, who is charged with murder and attempted murder.

"They heard only one side of the story."



Comment on this Article


Condi's Capers


War Whore Rice still struggling for success after two years as top US diplomat

by David Millikin
AFP
29 Dec 06

Rice's globe-trotting -- 37 overseas trips totalling nearly 500,000 miles (800,000 kilometers) -- has yielded little concrete success, with her few diplomatic victories clouded by poor or no follow-up.
WASHINGTON - Condoleezza Rice wraps up her first two years as secretary of state with few diplomatic successes to show for her efforts and fewer signs she plans to change course to improve the record.

And yet, as Rice heads into 2007, the 52-year-old former academic should be at the top of her game for the last two years of President George W. Bush's administration.

She has seen off her longtime rival for Bush's ear, former defense secretary Donald Rumsfeld.

And the Bush administration is under pressure from all sides to use more diplomacy and less bluster in its foreign policy, a shift which should place Rice at the epicenter of decision-making.

But since she took over as America's top diplomat on January 26, 2005 with an agenda to promote freedom and democracy around the globe, Rice has been shadowed by the failure of that plan on its biggest stage: Iraq.

The violence in Iraq, and the Bush administration's refusal to bring rivals Syria and Iran into efforts to stabilize the country, are widely blamed for the broader failure of US policy in the Middle East -- where Lebanon teeters on the brink of civil war and Israeli-Palestinian peace efforts languish.

Elsewhere, Rice's globe-trotting -- 37 overseas trips totalling nearly 500,000 miles (800,000 kilometers) -- has yielded little concrete success, with her few diplomatic victories clouded by poor or no follow-up.

A UN Security Council resolution imposing sanctions on
North Korea after it exploded its first nuclear device in October was one major success -- rushed to a vote with unusual speed and unequaled cooperation from a China long loath to punish its client state.

The sanctions, and Chinese pressure, managed to coax North Korea back to disarmament negotiations this month.

But the five-day session ended in deadlock, with US diplomats admitting there was no real indication Pyongyang intends to give up its nuclear mantle.

Rice also succeeded in pushing through a UN resolution slapping sanctions on Iran over its suspect nuclear program.

But the measure passed only after months of wrangling with Russia and China knocked most of the teeth out of the sanctions package and left little prospect of Washington being able to obtain tougher follow-up action that will almost certainly be needed to force Iran to back down.

Efforts to halt what Washington has branded genocide in Sudan's Darfur region have fared no better, with the government of President Omar al-Beshir defying US-backed demands for UN peacekeepers to halt nearly four years of ethnic cleansing.

And most recently in Somalia, weak US support for negotiations on a power-sharing deal between the Western-backed government and Islamist militia left the door open for a military offensive by US ally Ethiopia, which is pushing another country towards civil war.

US foreign policy experts said Rice must shoulder much of the blame for the lackluster diplomacy.

"Great secretaries of state have compelling views of the world and/or are effective negotiators -- Secretary Rice has so far demonstrated neither," said Aaron Miller, who advised six secretaries of state before joining the Woodrow Wilson Center think tank in Washington.

Even staunch supporters acknowledge that Rice, weighed down by the failed policy in Iraq, has little that is positive to show for her work so far.

"I don't know that there have been concrete advances" under Rice's diplomacy, said Joshua Muravchik of the conservative American Enterprise Institute, though he nevertheless went on to give her "high grades" for faithfully implementing Bush's policy agenda.

Rice has steadfastly rebuffed demands, most forcefully put forward by the high-powered Iraq Study Group, that she adopt a more flexible style of diplomacy that includes dealing with hostile players like Syria and Iran.

Whether or not she eventually follows that advice, Rice's best shot at achieving a major success in her remaining time as secretary of state is likely to focus on the deadlocked Israeli-Palestinian peace process.

Her first trip in the new year will be to
Israel and the Palestinian territories, as part of a new US initiative expected to be built around boosting moderate Palestinian leader Mahmud Abbas and gaining Arab support for fast-tracking the declaration of a Palestinian state.

Progress on the Middle East's most intractable conflict could be enough to save Rice's diplomatic reputation.

"Her challenge in the next two years is to find one consequential issue such as the Arab-Israeli peace process and make it work," said the Wilson Center's Miller.

"That alone would make her an effective and successful secretary."



Comment on this Article


Foreign Policy 101 With Condoleezza Rice

Condoleezza Rice
whitehouse.org

Are you a clear-thinking, sensible citizen with a good command of history and world events? Do you generally get along with people, even if your interests are opposed? Do you have good leadership skills, and acknowledge that up is up and left is, in fact, left? If so, today's U.S diplomatic corps may NOT be for you. But if you possess the essential skills of metaphorical bridge burning, selective rationality, arrogant provincialism, and regurgitating laughably nonsensical talking points ad nauseum, then you're a perfect candidate for a career at the US State Department!
I'm Condoleezza Rice, and although my tenure as Secretary of State has been noteworthy primarily for my penchant for dressing up like Catwoman at a BDSM convention, I'm proud to offer this comprehensive lesson on the foreign policy dos and don'ts which help me make America so intensely beloved all over the world!

Lesson #1:
A centuries-old blood feud between Jews and Muslims threatens to spiral out of control, engulfing the entire Middle East in vicious bloodshed, and culminating in the eruption of an all-out nuclear World War III.

* DO: Totally ignore the building crisis for a minimum of five years, thereby setting the stage for religious extremists on both sides of the abyss to seize political power and foment radicalism and hatred.

* DO: Gaze on in perplexed wonder as the situation deteriorates into a multi-front regional war, then demonstrate your moral authority to negotiate peace by subsidizing the sale of highly sophisticated weaponry to the side that is predisposed to launching wildly disproportionate retaliatory attacks.

* DO NOT: Sully the spirit and effectiveness of Bush-era diplomacy by actually stooping to engage in dialogue with all parties involved. Everyone knows that conversing with persons with whom you disagree is tantamount to publicly deep-throating a succession of fat homo cocks.

Lesson #2: A mustachioed Middle Eastern leader and former CIA puppet spends his days writing romance novels after decades of war and U.N. sanctions have rendered his once-formidable army a harmless shambles and reduced his people to abject poverty.

* DO: Build him up in the media as an evil genius with his finger on the button of a Nukepox Laser Deathray set to sizzle every last American suburban stripmall, and convince the heartland that a vile horde of swarthy A-rabs is rowing their way to American shores intent on double-penetrating their blond-haired Christian daughters.

* DO: Invoke theatrical imagery such as mushroom clouds and smoking American cities in order to frighten voters enough to endorse the President's plan to march a never-ending stream of still-pubescent teens into the voracious gaping maw of the military industrial complex meat grinder.

* DO NOT: Demand that sanctions be dropped and the U.N. inspectors be permitted to continue their successful efforts to keep WMDs out of said leader's hands, or remind the public that your boss is nursing a personal vendetta against said defenseless figurehead on account of that mean old Arabiac once tried to hurt his daddy.

Lesson #3: The leader of a country whose people look like Chineses (and speak in a similar-sounding gobbledy-gook) possesses an arsenal of long-range ballistic missiles, equipped with nuclear warheads, that are pointed at the U.S. and ready for launch at a moment's notice.

* DO: Summarily ignore the deranged and aggressive tyrant for over half a decade. When he threatens to level an American city in a nuclear inferno, respond with milquetoast language and vague assurances that such a catastrophic attack "would be taken with utmost seriousness."

* DO: Entangle American troops in an intractable quagmire in the aforementioned mustachioed leader's country, allowing said Chinese-looking leader to expand his nuclear weapons program unchecked. This will enable America to avoid ever setting the unimaginably foolish precedent of provoking an unwinnable war in Southeast Asia.

* DO NOT: Assemble a bona fide multinational coalition to delicately yet firmly negotiate a nonproliferation treaty using a combination of carrots and sticks. Everyone knows that real diplomacy is for pussies.

Lesson #4: A series of top-secret intelligence memos reveal that a prominent international terrorist is actively planning to strike the United States sometime after the summer of 2001 - likely using commercial airliners - from his base of operations in Afghanistan.

* DO: Denounce the previous President's proactive bombings on said Afghanistan terror camps as a cheap political stunt to distract the public from its protracted and lusty gazing at his crotch.

* DO: Prepare a speech for delivery on the day of the attack which addresses the mega-important issue of relaunching President Reagan's anti-Soviet "Star Wars" initiative. Later, pooh-pooh the significance of the memos during Congressional testimony.

* DO NOT: Direct America's military to discontinue preparations to attack the aforementioned mustachioed eunuch, or change your own plans to follow the President's lead by promptly departing for a month-long summer vacation.

Lesson #5: The popular socialist leader of a major South American oil producing country has been rattling the President for years, ridiculing him at every turn. To make our Godly President look bad, this Latino-Rican madman even had the nefarious audacity to offer free heating oil to overtaxed poor Americans during the winter.

* DO: Portray him as a threat to global stability, to be dealt with harshly just as soon as our military is no longer stretched past the breaking point - which could be any day now.

* DO: Continue to publicly purport America's steadfast belief in Democracy, while simultaneously exploring options to run that uppity spic's ass out of town by staging a CIA black-ops coup.

* DO NOT: Indicate any knowledge of any assassination plot, even when it's indiscreetly revealed by one of your most fervent McJesus Taliban supporters.



Comment on this Article


Governments Lie, People Lie


What a tangled web we weave: high-tech lying

Last Updated: Thursday, December 28, 2006 | 3:15 PM ET
CBC News

Technological tools such as BlackBerrys, cellphones and e-mail are often cited for the convenience they offer. A new study suggests they also make it easier for people to lie.

Some 81 per cent of the 1,487 people surveyed for the online poll released on Wednesday admit to telling white lies at least once a day, and 72 per cent confess they use technological means to do so.
The poll, conducted in November for British financial services group Friends Provident PLC, found that 74 per cent of people believe technology makes it easier to lie, and 51 per cent of respondents said they felt less guilty using technology to lie than they do face-to-face.

"With gadgets likely to have topped the nation's shopping lists this Christmas, it seems as though Britons will have plenty of new toys to fuel this trend," the company said in a written statement.

Some of the respondents used multiple means for their "techno treachery," according to the researchers at British polling firm 72 Point Ltd., which was commissioned to produce the study.

Some 18 per cent of those surveyed used cellphones in their deceptions, 27 per cent sent mendacious text messages, and e-mail led the pack of lies with 27 per cent.

The most common use of technology to lie was related to the workplace. More than two-thirds, or 67 per cent of respondents, said they had told a white lie at work, with 43 per cent saying they had claimed they were ill, 23 per cent pretended work was done and 18 per cent masked a major error.

But work wasn't the only domain affected by dishonest use of devices. About 41 per cent of the survey's participants said they had deceived their families or partners. Some 29 per cent said the worst white lie to a partner would be about where they had been or what they were doing, and 27 per cent found flirting with someone else the worst.

Asked what they were likely to lie about, the people surveyed seemed to focus on appearances. They ranked buying new clothes or their cost first, at 37 per cent, followed by how good clothes look on a friend or partner at 35 per cent. What they ate tied for second place at 35 per cent, appropriately followed by how much they weigh at 32 per cent, and finally 31 per cent said they would fib about how much they had had to drink.

The survey found that 84 per cent of people believed the occasional white lie caused no one any harm.



Comment on this Article


What freedom of information? Ministers are accused of scuppering right-to-know legislation

By Robert Verkaik, Law Editor
28 December 2006

Labour's flagship freedom of information laws are being blocked by ministers who are increasingly refusing to answer routine inquiries about government policy, new figures show.

Seven government departments, including the department in charge of monitoring the new powers, are identified in a Whitehall report as refusing to give answers to more than half of all requests made by the public.

The Foreign Office has the worst record by claiming exemptions for 70 per cent of all requests it has received. In total, of the 62,852 requests made to central government since 1 January 2005, 26,083 have not been granted. And of those questions the Government considers properly resolved many have not been answered to the questioner's satisfaction.
The report also shows that public requests for information have fallen to the lowest number since the laws were implemented.

The Department for Constitutional Affairs, which has responsibility for implementing the "right to know" laws, has the second worst record, by only providing full answers to 39 per cent of all requests.

Next month the Government is to go to court to try to prevent the public using the Freedom of Information Act to obtain even innocuous information about "the formulation" of policy after the Information Commissioner, the legislation's watchdog, ruled that ministers must reveal material that does not harm policy-making. Government lawyers are to appear before the Information Tribunal in an attempt to have the commissioner's decision overturned by arguing that all policy-related information must be withheld.

The legal challenge will be followed by the introduction of regulations designed to stop the media from making full use of the new powers. These regulations represent a direct attack on the spirit of the law, once heralded by Labour as the end of the culture of Whitehall secrecy. The media and other organisations will be restricted to a handful of requests a year, while the time taken by officials and ministers to consult and consider requests will now be counted when calculating whether people should be charged for any disclosure.

Figures released by the Department for Constitutional Affairs reveal requests to central government fell to a low of 7,641 between July and September, compared with 13,603 in the first three months after the law came into force. Freedom of information campaigners warn that this might be evidence that the public have become frustrated with their failure to get answers.

Overall, the success rate for requests across all departments has fallen by 2 per cent to 60 per cent in the past six months.

While Labour has been happy to release documents embarrassing the previous Tory administration over its handling of "Black Wednesday" - Britain's forced withdrawal from the ERM - ministers have been less willing to let the public use the Act to shed light on Labour's own political controversies.

For example, ministers are still refusing to release earlier drafts of the Attorney General's advice on the legality of the war with Iraq.

At the heart of its strategy is the Orwellian-sounding Central Clearing House where all sensitive or difficult requests are sent. Set up by ministers before the introduction of the laws, the unit employs 12 staff to monitor the public's use of the legislation.

Maurice Frankel, the director of the Campaign for Freedom of Information, says the Government's approach "strikes at the very heart" of the legislation. Michael Smyth, the head of public policy at the law firm Clifford Chance, said that while he acknowledged the Freedom of Information Act had opened up government, the regulations, due to come into force in April, will "emasculate" the media. "The Government dined out on the mantra that the FoI Act was to be motive-blind ... but these bizarre proposals will turn FoI requests into something where motive will become relevant," Mr Smyth said.

Requests, officially denied

Can you please disclose the public cost of guarding Charles and Camilla?

The Royal Family is exempt from the Freedom of Information Act. It would not be in the public interest to reveal information not covered by this exemption because of the potential threat to royal security.

Would you reveal the discussions relating to the Home Office's original decision to reclassify cannabis?

We believe that disclosure would lead to reluctance on the part of officials, ministers and others to provide frank advice in future.

Can we see the documents and briefing papers for Lord Levy's meetings with American diplomats over the Middle East crisis?


It is not in the public interest to disclose any of this material. Such a revelation would also harm international relations.

Please disclose the correspondence between the Food Standards Agency and Cadbury Schweppes in respect of the chocolate bar salmonella scare earlier this year.

Disclosure of some of the information held would prejudice any possible prosecution and may prejudice the commercial interest of Cadbury's.

Can we see the report into the links between MRSA rates and bed occupancy written by the Department of Health's chief economic adviser?

This would be detrimental to the future formulation of government policy.

How about Tony Blair's Christmas card list?

Many of the addressees are foreign dignitaries. This information would be harmful to international relations.

Could you send us all the written evidence given by police forces to the Government's 2004 public consultation on prostitution?


Disclosure might harm police efforts to prevent and detect crime.

Please disclose the minutes of Margaret Thatcher's last cabinet meeting.


It is important that ministers' discussions in cabinet are full and frank. To arrive at agreed policy positions and plans for actions, discussion needs to be free and uninhibited.

Can we have a look at the correspondence and documents relating to Alastair Campbell's decision to resign as director of communications?

This is personal information given in confidence.

OK then, can we see the correspondence and documents relating to Alan Milburn's resignation?


This is also personal information given in confidence.

Please disclose any Ministry of Defence research that has not already been published.

This request is too widely framed so that it would incur disproportionate costs.

What are the highest fees paid by the BBC and who earns them?


This is privileged and personal information.

You've already published the names of the guests who attended Chequers with Tony and Cherie Blair in 2004 so can we now see the guest list for last year?


We may want to publish this information at a later date so we can't give it to you now.

Can we see all the documents, memos and e-mails supporting the Attorney General's advice on the legality of the war in Iraq?

The Government finally published the written advice earlier this year after it was leaked to the media. But some of the other documents have been withheld on the grounds of professional legal privilege which protects disclosure of advice between the Attorney General and his client, in this case the Government.

Can we see Home Office reports on the impact of its plans for compulsory ID cards?

Disclosure would harm the formulation and development of government policy.

Would you tell us a little more about the sweater given to George Bush by Tony Blair?

This information is not in the public interest.

Please disclose all papers concerning the role of the British Government in the arrest and continued detention of the UK residents in Guantanamo Bay.


These documents are covered by privilege and would be exempt because of national security and harm to international relations.

Can we see the documents relating to the policy discussions for the future funding of Britain's schools?


Although this information may be innocuous it could inhibit the free and frank provision of advice and exchange of views for the purposes of deliberation.

Please give us information about the cases referred to the secretive unit, known as the 'clearing house', which fields tricky or potentially embarrassing questions made under the terms of the Freedom of Information Act?

Such information would prejudice the effective conduct of public affairs.



Comment on this Article


South of the Border


Drug gangs ravage Rio; 9 civilians, 3 police die

www.chinaview.cn 2006-12-29 17:19:20

BEIJING, Dec. 29 (Xinhuanet) -- In what Rio de Janeiro's top law enforcement official labeled a show of force prior to the swearing-in of a new governor, drug gangs roamed the city Thursday night setting fire to buses and firing on police stations in a spate of violence that killed 19 people.
Seven people in buses were burned to death, three policemen were shot to death, and two other civilians died in a crossfire during a shootout in Rio's Botafago District. Seven alleged gang members were also slain.

Roberto Precioso, head of Rio's Public Safety Department, said gang members used handguns, machine guns and grenades in 12 attacks against police stations and outposts that began in the early morning. Fourteen civilians and seven police officers were injured, he added.

He said police intelligence had warned the gangs were planning to stage the attacks for some time. Precioso said the attacks were apparently ordered from inside a state prison, but did not elaborate.

The attacks began shortly after midnight on the Washington Luiz highway that links Rio de Janeiro with the nearby mountain resort of Petropolis where alleged gang members set fire to two interstate buses. Four city buses were later set afire, Rio's Public Safety Office said.

Most of the violence occurred on Rio's poor north side, although a policeman was killed in the upscale Lagoa district and a woman was killed in an attack on a police booth in Botafogo.

Rio Mayor Cesar Maia said gangs appeared to be retaliating against militias -- reportedly run by off-duty police officers -- that in recent months have been battling the drug gangs in slums and charging residents for protection.

"The reason for what's happening is that militias have grown and the drug gangs are leaving,"' Maia told reporters. "To maintain their income, the gangs are increasing crime on the street."

Precioso said police were working to contain ongoing attacks and they did not present a danger to the millions expected to ring in the new year on Rio's beaches.

But he declined to answer a reporter's question about whether the police are prepared to handle security during the 2007 Pan American Games that will take place here.

Rio de Janeiro is one of the most violent cities in the world, with an annual murder rate of about 50 per 100,000 residents.



Comment on this Article


Sandinistas Serious on Poverty, IMF

Managua, Dec 29 (Prensa Latina)

Sociologist Orlando Nunez, who will direct the Commission against Poverty starting January 10, assured that the future Sandinista government would assume a critical position against the International Monetary Fund.

"We have criticized the IMF and will continue to do so, not only on behalf of the government but also as a society," declared Nunez to La Primerisima Radio Station on Thursday.
The future official of the administration of President-elect Daniel Ortega confirmed they ratified that position in their recent meetings with the international financial organisms.

"We clarify that poverty is our priority," he stressed and added that they would stop the privatization encouraged by the neoliberal executives in power since 1990.

According to Nunez, the IMF, the World Bank, the Inter American Development Bank and other financial entities are just waiting for the establishment of the Sandinista Front to sit and negotiate.

However, the Sandinista government will trust not only in the IMF and will seek financial support from other entities outside Washington, he remarked.



Comment on this Article


What? Me Worry?!


Top Ten U.S. Disaster Threats for 2007 and Beyond

LiveScience
29 Dec 06

Government officials are evaluating and revising disaster plans around the United States in the wake of Hurricane Katrina, just as they did after the Sept. 11 terrorist attacks. While war and automobiles kill more people than nature, here is the list of the natural disasters that top scientists' worry lists.

10. Pacific Northwest Megathrust Earthquake

Geologists know it's just a matter of time before another 9.0 or larger earthquake strikes somewhere between Northern California and Canada. The shaking would be locally catastrophic, but the biggest threat is the tsunami that would ensue from a fault line that's seismically identical to the one that caused the deadly 2004 tsunami in Indonesia.
9. New York Hurricane

Major hurricanes have made direct hits on the boroughs before, but the interval between them is so long that people forget, and officials fear they might not take evacuation orders seriously. The larger problem: It would take nearly 24 hours to make a proper evacuation of New York City, but hurricanes move more swiftly as they race north, so real warning time could be just a few hours.


8. Asteroid Impact

Scientists can't say when the next devastating asteroid impact will occur. Odds are it won't be for decades or centuries, but an unknown space rock could make a sucker punch any time. Many experts say planning to deal with a continent-wide catastrophe should begin now.

7. Los Angeles Tsunami

An earthquake fault just off Southern California could generate a major quake and a $42 billion tsunami that would strike so fast many coastal residents would not have time to escape. Add to that the unprecedented destruction from the earthquake's shaking, and the situation would be reminiscent of Hurricane Katrina.

6. Supervolcano

It probably won't happen for hundreds or possibly even millions of years, but nobody really knows when Yellowstone will blow again, destroying life for hundreds of miles around and burying half the country in ash up to 3 feet (1 meter) deep.

5. Midwest Earthquake

It has been nearly two centuries since a series of three magnitude-8 quakes shook the then-sparsely populated Midwest, centered near New Madrid, Missouri. Another big one is inevitable. Now the region is heavily populated, yet building codes are generally not up to earthquake snuff. What's more, geology east of the Rockies causes quakes to be felt across a much wider region. Shelves would rattle from Boston to South Carolina. Some homes along the Mississippi would sink into oblivion.

4. Heat Waves

Heat waves kill more U.S. residents than any other natural disaster. As many as 10,000 people have died in past events. As urban areas get hotter, electricity systems are strained and the population ages, the risk grows.

3. East Coast Tsunami

It seems no coast is immune to the threat of tsunami. For the Eastern United States, the likeliest scenario is waves kicked up by an asteroid splashing into the ocean. Astronomers already have their eye on one rock that could hit in the distant future, but the cosmos could hold a surprise, too.

2. Gulf Coast Tsunami

A fault line in the Caribbean has generated deadly tsunamis before. Up to 35 million people could be threatened by one in the not-to-distant future, scientists say.

1. Total Destruction of Earth

Okay, so nobody is spending too much time worrying about what to do if the planet is annihilated, but at least one person has seriously pondered whether and when it could happen. From being sucked into a black hole to being blown up by an antimatter reaction, there are scientifically plausible risks of an event that would render this whole list moot.



Comment on this Article


Tsunami-Generating Earthquake Near U.S. Possibly Imminent

By Robin Lloyd
Special to LiveScience
03 January 2005

There are only two places in the United States where colliding tectonic plates could cause a major tsunami, and new studies show a new earthquake in at least one of these locations could be imminent.

The Cascadia subduction zone, a 680-mile fault that runs 50 miles off the coast of the Pacific Northwest -- from Cape Mendocino in California to Vancouver Island in southern British Columbia -- has experienced a cluster of four massive earthquakes during the past 1,600 years. Scientists are trying to figure out if it is about to undergo a massive shift one more time before entering a quiescent period.

"People need to know it could happen," said U.S. Geological Survey geologist Brian Atwater.
The historical record for this zone, which has the longest recorded data about its earthquakes of any major fault in the world, shows that earthquakes occur in clusters of up to five events, with an average time interval of 300 years between quakes, said Chris Goldfinger, a marine geologist at Oregon State University. Goldfinger and other scientists have been studying this subduction zone for many years.

The two most recent quakes on this fault occurred in the year 1700 (a magnitude 9 event) and approximately the year 1500. It has now been 305 years since the last event. So is the Cascadia subduction zone finished for now or on the brink of event number five?

"We know quite a bit about the periodicity of this fault zone and what to expect," he said. "But the key point we don't know is whether the current cluster of earthquake activity is over yet, or does it have another event left in it."

The Cascadia subduction zone occurs where the relatively thin Juan de Fuca plate moves eastward and under the westward-moving North American Plate. When that collision results in a rupture, massive earthquakes occur. The other active subduction zone capable of producing a major earthquake-tsunami sequence is in Alaska, the site of a giant earthquake and subsequent tsunami in 1964.

Scientists say a rupture along the Cascadia fault would cause the sea floor to bounce 20 feet or more, setting off powerful ocean waves relatively close to shore. The first waves could hit coastal communities in 30 minutes or less -- too rapidly for the current warning systems to save lives.

A tsunami along the Atlantic Coast is considered extremely unlikely.

Tsunamis are the result of sudden rises or falls in a section of the earth's crust under or near the ocean, usually caused by earthquakes, volcanic activity or landslides. Earthquakes at subduction zones (rather than at other types of faults such as thrust faults) produce the highest energy tsunamis, especially when they occur in deep water. The seismic activity displaces sea water, creating a rise or fall in the level of the ocean above. This rise or fall in sea level initiates the formation of a tsunami wave. The wave's height increases in shallower water.

Geologists can track earthquakes back in time by radiocarbon dating deposits of sand called turbidites, which come from undersea landslides.

Major studies on the Cascadia fault zone have identified 19 to 21 major earthquake events during the past 10,000 years. During at least 17 of these events, the entire fault zone probably ruptured at once, causing an earthquake around magnitude 9 and major tsunamis, such as those which savaged East Asia last week.

The Asian event happened where the India plate was subducted beneath the Burma microplate. It ruptured, for the first time since 1833, along a 600-mile front just about the same length as the Cascadia Subduction Zone.

The Asian event may provide a shocking demonstration of the geologic future of the Pacific Northwest, Goldfinger said. For hundreds of years, subduction zone plates remain locked in place, releasing little tension. Every few centuries, in a few minutes of violence, forces are released as the upper plate moves seaward, producing a massive tsunami following earthquake shaking.

"In the case of the Cascadia Subduction Zone, you could have an area of ocean floor that's 50 miles wide and 500 to 600 miles long suddenly snap back, causing a huge tsunami," Goldfinger said. "At the same time, we could expect some parts of the upper, or North American, plate to sink one to two meters. These are massive tectonic events. Subduction zones produce the most powerful earthquakes and tsunamis in the world."

The question is not whether, but when the Cascadia Subduction Zone will break again.

"One possibility is that we could be done with this cluster and looking at a period of many hundreds of years before the next earthquake," Goldfinger said. "The other distinct possibility is we could still be in a cluster of events. If that's the case, the average time interval between earthquakes within a cluster is already up. We would be due just about any day."

The Associated Press contributed to this report



Comment on this Article


History Reveals Hurricane Threat to New York City

By Robert Roy Britt
LiveScience
01 June 2005

[In 2004], Florida took the brunt of nature's summer fury, when four hurricanes slammed into the state. While the four-part pummeling was unusual, Florida has been hit nearly twice as often as any other state as long as records have been kept.

Residents in Florida know what to do. You've seen the lines of traffic lumbering away from the coast hours and even days before a storm hits.

But what would happen if a major hurricane struck New York City?



With another hurricane season officially underway and lots of activity expected, forecasters are armed with more data and more powerful computer models than ever before. There would be some warning.

Because of the population density, a successful evacuation of vulnerable low-lying areas in and around New York City and metropolitan New Jersey would actually have to start sooner than what is typically ordered in Florida and elsewhere, officials have determined based on studies by the Army Corps of Engineers.
But hurricanes move more quickly and become very difficult to predict when they head north of the Carolinas. In a likely scenario, experts say, there might only be hours of warning.

History reveals that New York and the Northeast have been hit hard before, and with little warning. Scientists say the next major hurricane to strike the city is a question of when, not if.

History forgotten

Late in the summer of 1938, a wave of energy moved off the coast of Africa. Winds were sucked into the atmospheric depression and curved by the Earth's spin into a counterclockwise rotation.

The storm churned unnoticed across the open sea, gathering strength from warm tropical waters. On Friday, Sept. 16, a Brazilian freighter reported the storm.

Gordon Dunn and Grady Norton, U.S. Weather Bureau forecasters in Florida, issued a hurricane warning for Miami, expecting the storm to hit Tuesday. Miami residents stockpiled supplies, boarded windows, secured boats.



But on Monday evening, the storm turned north and sped up to 20 mph, a swift forward speed that scientists of the time knew little about. It followed a typical path of recurvature -- resembling a giant C -- around the Bermuda High, an area of high atmospheric pressure in the mid-Atlantic that pushes air outward from its center, bouncing hurricanes off its edges like bubbles.

Dunn and Norton lost track of the storm off Cape Hatteras, North Carolina, and assumed it would curve eastward. The national weather map for Wednesday, Sept. 21, showed no hurricane, only a storm moving out to sea.

But winds had increased to 140 mph inside the beast. It moved north and picked up more forward speed.

The Bermuda High had moved to 44 degrees North latitude -- from its normal September position of thirty to thirty-five degrees -- blocking the hurricane's path and deflecting it northward. Abnormally warm water fed the storm as its forward speed increased to 60 mph! Waves tore up boardwalks in New Jersey.

No warnings were issued. It had been 117 years since the last great storm hit New York, on Sept. 23, 1821. History had been forgotten.

The 'fog bank'

By Wednesday afternoon, shingles were flying from roofs on Long Island. The sky grew dark. Trees were uprooted and telephone poles snapped like matchsticks. Three hours before high tide, residents reported a thick bank of gray fog, twenty-five to forty feet above the water, rolling in toward the south-facing coast.

Some residents fled to relative safety across the bridge. Many did not. Most of them died as the "fog bank" turned out to be a wall of water known as a storm surge.

Created partly by the vacuum of reduced atmospheric pressure and more so by the wind blowing over the water, the storm surge was highest in an area just east of the eye -- the right side of the storm when looked at from above. There, in the right-side eyewall, the counterclockwise winds combined with the storm's forward speed to create gusts exceeding 200 mph.

The eye of the hurricane passed some 55 miles east of Manhattan, a near miss in meteorological terms. Had it been a few miles west of Manhattan, forensic hurricanologists agree it would have devastated the island.

Drowned at work

The storm marched north. In Rhode Island, residents joked about putting up storm shutters. Finally, at least a warning had been issued. But the ferocity of the hurricane was no match for any last-minute preparations that might have been made.

At the head of Narragansett Bay, 30 miles from the Atlantic, the city of Providence awaited a fate its inhabitants could not have imagined. As the hurricane barreled toward the city, it pushed a surge of water up the bay. As the channel narrowed and became more shallow, the storm surge had nowhere to go but up.

The mountain of water carried boats and houses into the capital, flooding the first floor of buildings in downtown, where workers were just preparing to go home. Having no idea what a storm surge was, many of them were trapped and drowned where they worked. The surge of water caused tides (and even non-tidal sections of rivers) to rise 30 feet and more above normal levels.

Later that night, the Great New England Hurricane reached Canada, weakened but still potent enough to cause damage.

Over a four-day period, the 1938 storm dropped an average of 11 inches of rain over a 10,000-square-mile area, according to the National Weather Service. Flooding inflicted major damage through Connecticut, Massachusetts, New York, and Vermont, causing more than $300 million in losses.

In all, 600 people died. Ten of those deaths were in New York City. Flooding knocked out electrical power in all areas above 59th Street in Manhattan and in all of the Bronx. A hundred large trees in Central Park were destroyed.



Comment on this Article


Catastrophe Calculator: Estimate Asteroid Impact Effects Online

By Robert Roy Britt
Senior Science Writer
12 April 2004

The history of Earth's encounters with asteroids remains largely mysterious to scientists. They can't even agree whether a huge space rock that hit Mexico's Yucatan Penninsula 65 million years ago killed off the dinosaurs or not.

Nor can astronomers say when the next catastrophic impact will occur. They only know that it will happen, sooner or later.

However, now anyone with a passing interest in the fate of the planet can remove some of the mystery regarding the effects of the next collision. A new University of Arizona web page allows visitors to plug in a hypothetical space rock's size, the visitor's distance from the impact site, and other parameters to generate an outline of devastation.

But be warned: Removing the mystery invites a bit of terror over the hypothetical slams, bangs, fireballs, falling skies and rushing winds generated by a giant impact.

Prepare to be scared
Being somewhat of a voyeur when it comes to natural catastrophe, I couldn't resist running some scenarios through the new catastrophe calculator.

If you read on, please keep in mind that the odds of a serious impact occurring in any year are extremely low. A civilization-ending impact, while possible, almost surely won't happen within our lifetimes (90 percent of all asteroids big enough and close enough to do the job will be found by 2008) and is extremely unlikely even over the next millennium.

But hurling big virtual rocks at the planet is admittedly kind of fun. And in this case it's at least more scientifically meaningful than the average video game. I started by dropping a 9.3-mile-wide (15-kilometer) asteroid -- the estimated size of the suspected dinosaur killer -- on San Francisco.

The Bay Area doesn't do so well.

The resulting crater, at 113 miles (181 kilometers) wide, pretty much tells the story. The entire metropolis vanishes faster than you can say where you left your heart. What isn't consumed is knocked over in an earthquake of magnitude 10.2, bigger than any in recorded history. Heat from a scorching fireball would turn much of the state, and parts of others, into toast.

The quick end to the Bay Area turns out to be a blessing compared to what Los Angeles residents face.

About 10 seconds after impact, radiation from the fireball sears Southern California, igniting clothing and even plywood. Within two minutes the ground under Hollywood begins to shake. Weak brick structures crumble. Concrete irrigation ditches are damaged. Frame houses not properly bolted to their foundations are knocked off. Even tree branches fall.

And then it gets nasty.

'Bad things happen'

Six minutes after impact, much of earth that used to be under San Francisco has soared high into the atmosphere and begins to fall on the City of Angels (and just about everywhere else). Ultimately, a blanket of ejected material nearly 18 feet (5.5 meters) deep is deposited in and around LA.

Within a half-hour of the initial cosmic impact, on comes a 66-mph (30 meters per second) wind to rake what's left of Los Angeles.

"If you're close to the site of a major impact, some pretty bad things happen," said Jay Melosh, an expert in impact cratering at the University of Arizona.

Melosh oversaw the computer program's development. It's intended to help scientists further their research and journalists to report on the risks of asteroid impacts. "We could have put in some worse stuff, but it started getting grisly," he told SPACE.com .

I continued with my West Coast disaster scenario by heading across the country. Denver, about a third of the way over, is coated with nearly a foot of ejected material, called ejecta. Winds reach 22 mph.

New York City residents are spared enough that they can at first sit comfortably and watch all this on TV (to the extent there are any video feeds). Still, about 13 minutes after impact, windows and doors rattle in the East. After about 21 minutes, stuff shot out from the world's largest new crater starts to rain down on the East, depositing a half-inch blanket across the city. About 3-1/2 hours later an 8-mph wind arrives.

Object as big as the one that presumably wiped out the dinosaurs -- some investigators aren't convinced it was the sole cause -- are extremely rare, slamming into the planet perhaps just once every 300 million years.

Presently there are no asteroids known to be on a collision course with Earth. And experts agree that one this big would almost surely come with decades or centuries of warning time, being fairly easy to spot well before it becomes an imminent threat. By then, experts hope, methods will be developed to divert or destroy such a rock.

More likely scenarios

But what about something the size of the asteroid that dug out Meteor Crater in Arizona? That 600-foot-deep (180-meter) hole in the ground, popular now with tourists, is less than 50,000 years old and was created by a space rock so small that another one like it might not be noticed until it hits.

The Arizona culprit was only about 66 feet (20 meters) wide. But instead of fragile stone, it was composed mostly of iron. Examples linked with the online impact-effect program show how to specify this harder, more destructive material. A rock this size (though not of this density) is thought to hit Earth every 158 years, on average.

I duplicated the Meteor Crater script in Newark, New Jersey, 10 miles (16 kilometers) from Manhattan as the crow flies.

Location, of course, is everything. A nearly mile-wide crater is dug in New Jersey. A moderate earthquake of magnitude 4.7 rattles the region. New York City has handled such temblors in the past and largely endures. No significant ejecta hits Manhattan, and winds reach an insignificant 3.7 mph.

So I cranked it up a bit.

An asteroid the size of two football fields, even if stony in nature, is another story. It carves a crater in New Jersey that's 2 miles wide (3.4 kilometers). The resulting earthquake is magnitude 6.4, enough to frighten the pants off New York City emergency planners. A rock this size hits the planet about every 14,000 years.

Just estimates

Melosh developed the program along with fellow researcher Gareth Collins and undergraduate Robert Marcus. Melosh said the program should prove valuable to scientists who otherwise would have to wade through complicated calculations to generate impact scenarios for their research.

It's important to point out that what actually happens when an asteroid crashes into the surface is not well known, because scientists have never actually witnessed an impact event of any scale. But they have used computer models to explore the probable effects of impacts, and they have some craters to study on Earth.

Researchers assume the blast of heat generated by a cosmic collision would be similar to nuclear bomb detonations. So for these thermal radiation effects, Melosh's team relied on a 1977 publication, "The Effect of Nuclear Weapons," by the U.S. Defense Department and the Department of Energy.

"We determine at a given distance what type of damage the radiation causes," said Marcus, who did most of the grunt work developing the computer program. "We have descriptions like when grass will ignite, when plywood or newspaper will ignite, when humans will suffer 2nd or 3rd degree burns."

For earthquake predictions, the researchers culled data from actual California events and knowledge of how earthquakes propagate like sound waves through the planet.

The global effects of an asteroid impact are harder to predict. Many scientists think the larger impacts throw so much dust into the atmosphere that a global winter would ensue, lasting for months or years. Melosh is skeptical about the dust.

"Nuclear explosions are good at raising dust that's already there, but they're not good at creating it," Melosh said. He figures most of the ejected material is melted and then hardens into tiny, hardened and almost microscopic spheres. "Most of the ejecta comes down within an hour." He calls the massive dust creation "a media myth."

More to come

There is much left out of the new online impact program. Melosh wanted it to be practical to use, and he's open to suggestions for improvement.

Important details of an impact -- exactly how it penetrates the atmosphere and the surface, are simplified. And one major effect is not considered: the tsunami that would result from an ocean impact (Earth's surface is two-thirds water). In addition, the results of a user's input do not mention that a rush of wind can't blow down a tree that's buried under ejecta, nor does either matter if the tree were already burned to a crisp.

Minor and major revisions to the program may be made based on input from other scientists, Melosh said. And in coming weeks, his group will post background information explaining the complex calculations behind the program.

The Impact Effects program.



Comment on this Article


Potential Southern California Tsunami Could Cost up to $42 Billion

By LiveScience Staff
31 March 2005

The warning system covering the Pacific Ocean might save many lives if a tsunami strikes Southern California. But nothing can stop the destruction.

A new study puts the price tag for a worst-case scenario at $42 billion, and that does not include billions of dollars in additional damage caused directly by an earthquake that is pegged as the likely source of a potentially devastating tsunami.

Waves could inundate parts of the ports of Los Angeles and Long Beach. Many beach cities and smaller communities in Los Angeles and Orange County would suffer.

And there might not be enough time for a warning to be very useful.

The one-minute warning

The scientists say an underwater landslide just offshore, triggered by an earthquake, could generate a tsunami whose tallest waves would arrive "only one minute after the slide."

Other studies have the Pacific Northwest could be hit swiftly by devastating tsunamis, too. And researchers recently warned of a similar danger to Gulf Coast states. Prior to the tsunami last December, other geologists warned of the risk of mega-tsunamis around the entire Pacific basin from underwater landslides.

The new research was done by geologists, tsunami experts, engineers and urban planners at the University of Southern California. It is detailed in April edition of Civil Engineering magazine.

The group cites recent studies that suggest a large earthquake under the ocean off Los Angeles is likely at some point in the future. And it does not take a 9.0 "great quake," such as the one last December in Indonesia, to do the trick. A magnitude 7.0 earthquake near Papua New Guinea in 1998 generated deadly waves thought to be caused by a submarine landslide, which the earthquake triggered.

"The shaking from an earthquake of magnitude 7 or greater on an offshore thrust or reverse fault would undoubtedly be damaging to coastal communities [in Southern California], and its effect could be greatly magnified if it were to generate a tsunami," the scientists write.

Repeating history

The conclusions draw on evidence from several locally generated small tsunamis that have been recorded over the past 200 years. A Santa Barbara earthquake in 1812 spawned a moderate tsunami that affected more than 37 miles (60 kilometers) of coastline. Evidence of prehistoric events suggest submarine slumps that could have generated tsunamis up to 66 feet (20 meters) tall.

"There will be others," the researchers say, though of course they don't know when or how tall any tsunami might be.

Various scenarios in the study generate loss estimates of between $7 billion and $42 billion directly related to the tsunami. Costs include direct damage as well as the economic costs of lost shipping opportunities and traffic delays owing to damaged freeways.

"We chose not to model fatalities because we were being deliberately conservative, and because we wanted to avoid contentious assumptions about the economic value of life," said study member James Moore II. "The Papua New Guinea tsunami of 1998 was generated by a mechanism similar to the one modeled here, and that event cost over 2,000 lives. The toll here could be much higher."



Comment on this Article


Super Volcano Will Challenge Civilization, Geologists Warn

By Robert Roy Britt
LiveScience Senior Writer
08 March 2005



The eruption of a super volcano "sooner or later" will chill the planet and threaten human civilization, British scientists warned Tuesday.

And now the bad news: There's not much anyone can do about it.

Several volcanoes around the world are capable of gigantic eruptions unlike anything witnessed in recorded history, based on geologic evidence of past events, the scientists said. Such eruptions would dwarf those of Mount St. Helens, Krakatoa, Pinatubo and anything else going back dozens of millennia.
"Super-eruptions are up to hundreds of times larger than these," said Stephen Self of the United Kingdom's (U.K.) Open University.

"An area the size of North America can be devastated, and pronounced deterioration of global climate would be expected for a few years following the eruption," Self said. "They could result in the devastation of world agriculture, severe disruption of food supplies, and mass starvation. These effects could be sufficiently severe to threaten the fabric of civilization."

Self and his colleagues at the Geological Society of London presented their report to the U.K. Government's Natural Hazard Working Group.

"Although very rare these events are inevitable, and at some point in the future humans will be faced with dealing with and surviving a super eruption," Stephen Sparks of the University of Bristol told LiveScience in advance of Tuesday's announcement.

Supporting evidence

The warning is not new. Geologists in the United States detailed a similar scenario in 2001, when they found evidence suggesting volcanic activity in Yellowstone National Park will eventually lead to a colossal eruption. Half the United States will be covered in ash up to 3 feet (1 meter) deep, according to a study published in the journal Earth and Planetary Science Letters.

Explosions of this magnitude "happen about every 600,000 years at Yellowstone," says Chuck Wicks of the U.S. Geological Survey, who has studied the possibilities in separate work. "And it's been about 620,000 years since the last super explosive eruption there."

Past volcanic catastrophes at Yellowstone and elsewhere remain evident as giant collapsed basins called calderas.

A super eruption is a scaled up version of a typical volcanic outburst, Sparks explained. Each is caused by a rising and growing chamber of hot molten rock known as magma.

"In super eruptions the magma chamber is huge," Sparks said. The eruption is rapid, occurring in a matter of days. "When the magma erupts the overlying rocks collapse into the chamber, which has reduced its pressure due to the eruption. The collapse forms the huge crater."

The eruption pumps dust and chemicals into the atmosphere for years, screening the Sun and cooling the planet. Earth is plunged into a perpetual winter, some models predict, causing plant and animal species disappear forever.

"The whole of a continent might be covered by ash, which might take many years -- possibly decades -- to erode away and for vegetation to recover," Sparks said.

Yellowstone may be winding down geologically, experts say. But they believe it harbors at least one final punch. Globally, there are still plenty of possibilities for super volcano eruptions, even as Earth quiets down over the long haul of its 4.5-billion-year existence.

"The Earth is of course losing energy, but at a very slow rate, and the effects are only really noticeable over billions rather than millions of years," Sparks said.

Human impact

The odds of a globally destructive volcano explosion in any given century are extremely low, and no scientist can say when the next one will occur. But the chances are five to 10 times greater than a globally destructive asteroid impact, according to the new British report.

The next super eruption, whenever it occurs, might not be the first one humans have dealt with.

About 74,000 years ago, in what is now Sumatra, a volcano called Toba blew with a force estimated at 10,000 times that of Mount St. Helens. Ash darkened the sky all around the planet. Temperatures plummeted by up to 21 degrees at higher latitudes, according to research by Michael Rampino, a biologist and geologist at New York University.

Rampino has estimated three-quarters of the plant species in the Northern Hemisphere perished.

Stanley Ambrose, an anthropologist at the University of Illinois, suggested in 1998 that Rampino's work might explain a curious bottleneck in human evolution: The blueprints of life for all humans -- DNA -- are remarkably similar given that our species branched off from the rest of the primate family tree a few million years ago.

Ambrose has said early humans were perhaps pushed to the edge of extinction after the Toba eruption -- around the same time folks got serious about art and tool making. Perhaps only a few thousand survived. Humans today would all be descended from these few, and in terms of the genetic code, not a whole lot would change in 74,000 years.

Sitting ducks

Based on the latest evidence, eruptions the size of the giant Yellowstone and Toba events occur at least every 100,000 years, Sparks said, "and it could be as high as every 50,000 years. There are smaller but nevertheless huge eruptions which would have continental to global consequences every 5,000 years or so."

Unlike other threats to mankind -- asteroids, nuclear attacks and global warming to name a few -- there's little to be done about a super volcano.

"While it may in future be possible to deflect asteroids or somehow avoid their impact, even science fiction cannot produce a credible mechanism for averting a super eruption," the new report states. "No strategies can be envisaged for reducing the power of major volcanic eruptions."

The Geological Society of London has issued similar warnings going back to 2000. The scientists this week called for more funding to investigate further the history of super eruptions and their likely effects on the planet and on modern society.

"Sooner or later a super eruption will happen on Earth and this issue also demands serious attention," the report concludes.

Click HERE to see image of the effects of a supervolcano.



Comment on this Article


Central U.S. Warned of Larger Earthquakes to Come

By Robert Roy Britt
LiveScience Senior Writer
10 February 2005

A moderate earthquake that rattled parts of Arkansas and Tennessee Thursday [Feb. 2005] should serve as a wake-up call to the central United States about the potential for much stronger events, experts said.

The temblor, preliminarily put at magnitude 4.1, shook eastern Arkansas and western Tennessee early in the morning. It was centered 47 miles north-northwest of Memphis.

There were no reports of significant damage.

"Although today's earthquake was what we characterize as 'light,' this area is capable of producing an earthquake that can result in significant loss of life and property damage," said Charles "Chip" Groat, director of the U.S. Geological Survey.

Groat pointed out that the region was host to the strongest earthquake on record in the lower 48 United States.

Midwest record-setters

The infamous series of three New Madrid quakes in 1811-1812 occurred a few weeks apart, from Dec. 16 to Feb. 7. They measured 8.1, 8.0 and 7.8 and represent three of the four strongest earthquakes ever recorded in the lower 48.

"Strong earthquakes in the New Madrid seismic zone are certain to occur in the future," states a USGS fact sheet. "There is a 9-in-10 chance of a magnitude 6 to 7 temblor occurring in the New Madrid Seismic Zone within the next 50 years."

The New Madrid fault's remarkable spree of shifts devastated the sparsely populated area at the time. Amazingly, the quakes were so strong they were felt in much of the country -- as far away as Boston. Damage was reported as far away as Charleston, South Carolina, and Washington, D.C.

Differences in geology east of the Rockies account for the widespread effects, geologists say.

The strongest of the New Madrid events was 10 times more intense than the 1906 San Francisco earthquake, scientists say. Earthquakes of similar intensity occurred around the year 900 and again in the middle 1400s along the New Madrid fault, named for a small town in Missouri.

Good-sized temblors, the sort that can topple brick facades or bring down poorly designed bridges, rattled the New Madrid seismic zone in 1843 (6.3-magnitude) and 1895 (6.6-magnitude).

All this taken into account, plus the much larger population in the danger zone now, suggests a magnitude 7 quake on the New Madrid fault today "could be far worse than those of the 1989 magnitude 7 Loma Prieta, California, earthquake," according to the USGS. That rattle of the bay, which struck the San Francisco area during the World Series, killed 63 people and caused $6 billion in damage.

Not prepared

In California and other parts of the West, many old buildings and roadways have been retrofitted to largely endure earthquakes in the magnitude 6 to 7 range. But buildings in the New Madrid fault region constructed before modern building codes were put in place typically are not retrofitted, according to a USGS statement.

"This earthquake is an opportunity to gather more knowledge about the region's seismic risk and incorporate it into safer buildings," Groat said.

The regional Center for Community Earthquake Preparedness issued a statement Thursday saying the quake "underscores the need for Mid-South emergency management officials to have a seismic response plan ready." The CCEP is staffed by engineers and geologists from the University of Mississippi.

The Top 10

Here are the Top 10 U.S. earthquakes for all 50 states, according to the USGS:

1. Prince William Sound, Alaska 1964, 9.2
2. Andreanof Islands, Alaska 1957, 9.1
3. Rat Islands, Alaska 1965, 8.7
4. East of Shumagin Islands, Alaska 1938, 8.2
5. New Madrid, Missouri 1811, 8.1
6. Yakutat Bay, Alaska 1899, 8.0
7. Andreanof Islands, Alaska 1986, 8.0
8. New Madrid, Missouri 1812, 8.0
9. Near Cape Yakataga, Alaska 1899, 7.9
10. Fort Tejon, California 1857, 7.9

The largest earthquake in the world since measurements have been made was a 9.5-magnitude event that shook Chile in 1960. The 1964 Alaskan quake had held the No. 2 spot globally until this week, when scientists provided an updated estimate of the Dec. 26, 2004 tsunami-causing Sumatran earthquake. That subsea event has now been pegged at 9.3.

Scientists note that all of the magnitude numbers are estimates, especially the historical temblors for which there exist little or no reliable instrumented measurements.




Comment on this Article


Billion Dollar Weather Disasters

By Michael Schirber
LiveScience Staff Writer
30 January 2005



One way to track climate trends is to look at disasters above a given threshold. The National Climatic Data Center (NCDC) released last week its list of U.S. weather and climate disasters that have cost more than a billion dollars.

During the period between 1980 and 2004, there were 62 events in the U.S. that exceeded a billion dollars in costs and damages. These disasters include storms, droughts, forest fires and flooding. New to the list are the four hurricanes - Charley, Frances, Ivan and Jeanne - that hit the country last summer.

Although there has been a rise in the number of these costly events in the last decade or so, some of the most damaging catastrophes occurred in the 1980s.

It is important to note that there is no adjustment made for inflation when determining what events initially qualify for the list -- they had to cost $1 billion at the time they occurred. This results in a slightly greater probability that a more recent event will make the list.

However, in comparing the total cost from a year's disasters once they've made the list, the dollar amounts are normalized to reflect inflation. The total damages for all 62 events combined are over $390 billion in 2002 dollars.

Beach property

In an accompanying report, NCDC researchers Tom Ross and Neal Lott comment on one noticeable trend in the data: an increase in losses due to hurricanes.

Accounting for almost a third of the billion-dollar list, tropical storms and hurricanes are the most frequent type of disaster in the years studied. This is partly due to an apparent upswing recently in the frequency of major hurricanes, which are defined by sustained wind speeds above 110 mph. The frequency of hurricanes is thought to ebb and flow in long-term cycles related to global climate factors.

The thirty years between 1961 and 1990 saw very few major hurricanes make landfall on the United States. This is in contrast to the 18 major hurricanes that struck between 1941 and 1960.

Starting with Hurricanes Hugo (1989) and Andrew (1992), there now appears to be a return to the active hurricane seasons of the '40s and '50s.

But in assessing the damages that these storms wrought, Ross and Lott stress that other factors must be included, such as population changes.

Americans have been moving to the coastlines in droves. Between 1940 and 1990, the coastal population of Florida has grown four times faster than the rate of the nation as a whole. The 426 counties along the Atlantic Ocean and Gulf of Mexico comprise 11 percent of the land in the continental U.S., but account for 45 percent of the population.

If a hurricane hits, there is more now to destroy. This is also true for other disasters, like flooding.

Heat danger

As dramatic as the recent hurricanes have been, it is perhaps surprising that droughts and heat waves cause the most damage and deaths.

In both 1980 and 1988, severe drought and heat ravaged the central and eastern parts of the country. They were the only billion dollar events on the list for those two years, yet they alone made 1980 and 1988 the two costliest years on the list - $48 and $62 billion, respectively, in 2002 dollars.

These heat waves also were the deadliest weather or climate events of the study period - with estimated deaths due to heat stress approaching 10,000 in each case.

In comparison, 1998 saw the most events - seven - but it was not an especially high year in total damages, with just over $20 billion in 2002 dollars.



Comment on this Article


A Chronology of U.S. Billion Dollar Disasters

By LiveScience Staff
31 January, 2004

How good is your weather memory? In what year did the so-called "Storm of the Century" sweep the country and pound the entire Eastern Seaboard? How many tornadoes struck the Midwest in a record-setting one-week period of May, 2003? And do you remember the thousands of deaths caused by heat waves in 1980 and 1988?

Along with the deaths came significant financial costs.

The United States sustained 62 weather-related disasters between 1980 and 2004 in which overall damages and costs were $1 billion or more at the time of the event. Any event under that amount is not on the list, even if it would be based on an inflation adjustment. That means some earlier events that might have been as financially severe in relative terms may not be represented here.

Some inflation adjusting has been done for events that initially met the billion dollar threshold. Two cost figures are given for events prior to 2002: the first represents actual dollar costs at the time of the event; the second value in parenthesis (if given) is the dollar cost normalized to 2002 dollars, allowing for more accurate comparison of damage figures over time.

The total normalized losses from the 62 events exceed $390 billion.

2004

Hurricane Jeanne September 2004. Category 3 hurricane makes landfall in east-central Florida, causing considerable wind, storm surge, and flooding damage in FL, with some flood damage also in the states of GA, SC, NC, VA, MD, DE, NJ, PA, and NY. Puerto Rico also affected. Preliminary estimate of over $6.5 billion in damage/costs; at least 28 deaths.

Hurricane Ivan September 2004. Category 3 hurricane makes landfall on Gulf coast of Alabama, with significant wind, storm surge, and flooding damage in coastal AL and FL panhandle, along with wind/flood damage in the states of GA, SC, NC, VA, LA, MS, WV, MD, TN, KY, OH, DE, NJ, PA, and NY. Preliminary estimate of over $12 billion in damage/costs; at least 52 deaths.

Hurricane Frances September 2004. Category 2 hurricane makes landfall in east-central Florida, causing significant wind, storm surge, and flooding damage in FL, along with considerable flood damage in the states of GA, SC, NC, and NY due to 5-15 inch rains. Preliminary estimate of over $9 billion in damage/costs; at least 38 deaths.

Hurricane Charley August 2004. Category 4 hurricane makes landfall in southwest Florida, resulting in major wind and some storm surge damage in FL, along with some damage in the states of SC and NC. Preliminary estimate of over $14 billion in damage/costs; at least 34 deaths.

2003

Southern California Wildfires Late October to early November 2003. Dry weather, high winds, and resulting wildfires in Southern California. More than 743,000 acres of brush and timber burned, over 3700 homes destroyed; over $2.5 billion damage/costs; 22 deaths. October and November.

Hurricane Isabel September 2003. Category 2 hurricane makes landfall in eastern North Carolina, causing considerable storm surge damage along the coasts of NC, VA, and MD, with wind damage and some flooding due to 4-12 inch rains in NC, VA, MD, DE, WV, NJ, NY, and PA; estimate of approximately $5 billion in damages/costs; at least 55 deaths.

Severe Storms and Tornadoes Early May 2003. Numerous tornadoes over the midwest, MS valley, OH/TN valleys and portions of the southeast, with a modern record one-week total of approximately 400 tornadoes reported; over $3.4 billion in damages/costs; 51 deaths.

Storms and Hail Early April 2003. Severe storms and large hail over the southern plains and lower MS valley, with Texas hardest hit, and much of the monetary losses due to hail; over $ 1.6 billion in damages/costs: 3 deaths.

2002

Widespread Drought Spring through early Fall 2002. Moderate to Extreme drought over large portions of 30 states, including the western states, the Great Plains, and much of the eastern U.S.; estimate of over $ 10.0 billion in damages/costs; no deaths.

Western Fire Season Spring through Fall 2002. Major fires over 11 western states from the Rockies to the west coast, due to drought and periodic high winds, with over 7.1 million acres burned; over $ 2.0 billion in damages/costs; 21 deaths.

2001

Tropical Storm Allison June 2001. The persistent remnants of Tropical Storm Allison produces rainfall amounts of 30-40 inches in portions of coastal Texas and Louisiana, causing severe flooding especially in the Houston area, then moves slowly northeastward; fatalities and significant damage reported in TX, LA, MS, FL, VA, and PA; estimate of approximately $5.0 (5.1) billion in damage/costs; at least 43 deaths.

Midwest and Ohio Valley Hail and Tornadoes April 2001. Storms, tornadoes, and hail in the states of TX, OK, KS, NE, IA, MO, IL, IN, WI, MI, OH, KY, WV, and PA, over a 6-day period; over $1.9 billion in damage/costs, with the most significant losses due to hail; at least 3 deaths.

2000

Drought/Heat Wave Spring-Summer 2000. Severe drought and persistent heat over south-central and southeastern states causing significant losses to agriculture and related industries; estimate of over $4.0 (4.2) billion in damage/costs; estimated 140 deaths nationwide.

Western Fire Season Spring-Summer 2000. Severe fire season in western states due to drought and frequent winds, with nearly 7 million acres burned; estimate of over $2.0 (2.1) billion in damage/costs (includes fire suppression); no deaths reported.

1999

Hurricane Floyd September 1999. Large category 2 hurricane makes landfall in eastern NC, causing 10-20 inch rains in 2 days, with severe flooding in NC and some flooding in SC, VA, MD, PA, NY, NJ, DE, RI, CT, MA, NH, and VT; estimate of at least $6.0 (6.5) billion damage/costs; 77 deaths.

Eastern Drought/Heat Wave Summer 1999. Very dry summer and high temperatures, mainly in eastern U.S., with extensive agricultural losses; over $1.0 (1.1) billion damage/costs; estimated 502 deaths.

Oklahoma-Kansas Tornadoes May 1999. Outbreak of F4-F5 tornadoes hit the states of Oklahoma and Kansas, along with Texas and Tennessee, Oklahoma City area hardest hit; over $1.6 (1.7) billion damage/costs; 55 deaths.

Arkansas-Tennessee Tornadoes January 1999. Two outbreaks of tornadoes in 6-day period strike Arkansas and Tennessee; approximately $1.3 (1.4) billion damage/costs; 17 deaths.

1998

Texas Flooding October-November 1998. Severe flooding in southeast Texas from 2 heavy rain events, with 10-20 inch rainfall totals; approximately $1.0 (1.1) billion damage/costs; 31 deaths.

Hurricane Georges September 1998. Category 2 hurricane strikes Puerto Rico, Florida Keys, and Gulf coasts of Louisiana, Mississippi, Alabama, and Florida panhandle, 15-30 inch 2-day rain totals in parts of AL/FL; estimated $5.9 (6.5) billion damage/costs; 16 deaths.

Hurricane Bonnie August 1998. Category 3 hurricane strikes eastern North Carolina and Virginia, extensive agricultural damage due to winds and flooding, with 10-inch rains in 2 days in some locations; approximately $1.0 (1.1) billion damage/costs; 3 deaths.

Southern Drought/Heat Wave Summer 1998. Severe drought and heat wave from Texas/Oklahoma eastward to the Carolinas; $6.0-$9.0 billion (6.6-9.9) damage/costs to agriculture and ranching; at least 200 deaths.

Minnesota Severe Storms/Hail May 1998. Very damaging severe thunderstorms with large hail over wide areas of Minnesota; over $1.5 (1.7) billion damage/costs; 1 death.

Southeast Severe Weather Winter-Spring 1998. Tornadoes and flooding related to El Nino in southeastern states; over $1.0 (1.1) billion damage/costs; at least 132 deaths.

Northeast Ice Storm January 1998. Intense ice storm hits Maine, New Hampshire, Vermont, and New York, with extensive forestry losses; over $1.4 (1.5) billion damage/costs; 16 deaths.

1997

Northern Plains Flooding April-May 1997. Severe flooding in Dakotas and Minnesota due to heavy spring snowmelt; approximately $3.7 (4.1) billion damage/costs; 11 deaths.

MS and OH Valleys Flooding and Tornadoes March 1997. Tornadoes and severe flooding hit the states of AR, MO, MS, TN, IL, IN, KY, OH, and WV, with over 10 inches in 24 hours in Louisville; estimated $1.0 (1.1) billion damage/costs; 67 deaths.

West Coast Flooding December 1996-January 1997. Torrential rains (10-40 inches in 2 weeks) and snowmelt produce severe flooding over portions of California, Washington, Oregon, Idaho, Nevada, and Montana; approximately $3.0 (3.4) billion damage/costs; 36 deaths.

1996

Hurricane Fran September 1996. Category 3 hurricane strikes North Carolina and Virginia, over 10-inch 24-hour rains in some locations and extensive agricultural and other losses; over $5.0 (5.8) billion damage/costs; 37 deaths.

Southern Plains Severe Drought Fall 1995 through Summer 1996. Severe drought in agricultural regions of southern plains--Texas and Oklahoma most severely affected; approximately $5.0 (6.0) billion damage/costs; no deaths.

Pacific Northwest Severe Flooding February 1996. Very heavy, persistent rains (10-30 inches) and melting snow over Oregon, Washington, Idaho, and western Montana; approximately $1.0 (1.2) billion damage/costs; 9 deaths.

Blizzard of '96 Followed by Flooding January 1996. Very heavy snowstorm (1-4 feet) over Appalachians, Mid-Atlantic, and Northeast; followed by severe flooding in parts of same area due to rain and snowmelt; approximately $3.0 (3.5) billion damage/costs; 187 deaths.

1995

Hurricane Opal October 1995. Category 3 hurricane strikes Florida panhandle, Alabama, western Georgia, eastern Tennessee, and the western Carolinas, causing storm surge, wind, and flooding damage; over $3.0 (3.6) billion damage/costs; 27 deaths.

Hurricane Marilyn September 1995. Category 2 hurricane devastates U.S. Virgin Islands; estimated $2.1 (2.5) billion damage/costs; 13 deaths.

Texas/Oklahoma/Louisiana/Mississippi Severe Weather and Flooding May 1995. Torrential rains, hail, and tornadoes across Texas - Oklahoma and southeast Louisiana - southern Mississippi, with Dallas and New Orleans areas (10-25 inches in 5 days) hardest hit; $5.0-$6.0 (6.5-7.1) billion damage/costs; 32 deaths.

California Flooding January-March 1995. Frequent winter storms cause 20-70 inches rainfall and periodic flooding across much of California; over $3.0 (3.6) billion damage/costs; 27 deaths.

1994

Western Fire Season Summer-Fall 1994. Severe fire season in western states due to dry weather; approximately $1.0 (1.2) billion damage/costs; death toll undetermined.

Texas Flooding October 1994. Torrential rain (10-25 inches in 5 days) and thunderstorms cause flooding across much of southeast Texas; approximately $1.0 (1.2) billion damage/costs; 19 deaths.

Tropical Storm Alberto July 1994. Remnants of slow-moving Alberto brought torrential 10-25 inch rains in 3 days, widespread flooding, and agricultural damage in parts of Georgia, Alabama, and panhandle of Florida; approximately $1.0 (1.2) billion damage/costs; 32 deaths.

Southeast Ice Storm February 1994. Intense ice storm with extensive damage in portions of TX, OK, AR, LA, MS, AL, TN, GA, SC, NC, and VA; approximately $3.0 (3.7) billion damage/costs; 9 deaths.

1993

California Wildfires Fall 1993. Dry weather, high winds, and wildfires in southern California; approximately $1.0 (1.3) billion damage/costs; 4 deaths.

Midwest Flooding Summer 1993. Severe, widespread flooding in central U.S. due to persistent heavy rains and thunderstorms; approximately $21.0 (26.7) billion damage/costs; 48 deaths.

Drought/Heat Wave Summer 1993. Southeastern U.S.; about $1.0 (1.3) billion damage/costs to agriculture; at least 16 deaths.

Storm/Blizzard March 1993. "Storm of the Century" hits entire eastern seaboard with tornadoes, high winds, and heavy snows (2-4 feet); $5.0-$6.0 (6.3-7.6) billion damage/costs; approximately 270 deaths.

1992

Nor'easter of 1992 December 1992. Slow-moving storm batters northeast U.S. coast, New England hardest hit; $1.0-$2.0 (1.3-2.6) billion damage/costs; 19 deaths.

Hurricane Iniki September 1992. Category 4 hurricane hits Hawaiian island of Kauai; about $1.8 (2.4) billion damage/costs; 7 deaths.

Hurricane Andrew August 1992. Category 5 hurricane hits Florida and Louisiana, high winds damage or destroy over 125,000 homes; approximately $27.0 (35.6) billion damage/costs; 61 deaths.

1991

Oakland Firestorm October 1991. Oakland, California firestorm due to low humidities and high winds; approximately $2.5 (3.5) billion damage/costs; 25 deaths.

Hurricane Bob August 1991. Category 2 hurricane--Mainly coastal North Carolina, Long Island, and New England; $1.5 (2.1) billion damage/costs; 18 deaths.

1990

Texas/Oklahoma/Louisiana/Arkansas Flooding May 1990. Torrential rains cause flooding along the Trinity, Red, and Arkansas Rivers in TX, OK, LA, and AR; over $1.0 (1.4) billion damage/costs; 13 deaths.

1989

Hurricane Hugo September 1989. Category 4 hurricane devastates South and North Carolina with ~ 20-foot storm surge and severe wind damage after hitting Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin Islands; over $9.0 (13.9) billion damage/costs (about $7.1 (10.9) billion in Carolinas); 86 deaths (57--U.S. mainland, 29--U.S. Islands).

Northern Plains Drought Summer 1989. Severe summer drought over much of the northern plains with significant losses to agriculture; at least $1.0 (1.5) billion in damage/costs; no deaths reported.

1988

Drought/Heat Wave Summer 1988. 1988 drought in central and eastern U.S. with very severe losses to agriculture and related industries; estimated $40.0 (61.6) billion damage/costs; estimated 5,000 to 10,000 deaths (includes heat stress-related).

1986

Southeast Drought/Heat Wave Summer 1986. Severe summer drought in parts of the southeastern U.S. with severe losses to agriculture; $1.0-$1.5 (1.8-2.6) billion in damage/costs; estimated 100 deaths.

1985

Hurricane Juan October-November 1985. Category 1 hurricane--Louisiana and Southeast U.S.--severe flooding; $1.5 (2.8) billion damage/costs; 63 deaths.

Hurricane Elena August-September 1985. Category 3 hurricane--Florida to Louisiana; $1.3 (2.4) billion damage/costs; 4 deaths.

Florida Freeze January 1985. Severe freeze central/northern Florida; about $1.2 (2.2) billion damage to citrus industry; no deaths.

1983

Florida Freeze December 1983. Severe freeze central/northern Florida; about $2.0 (4.0) billion damage to citrus industry; no deaths.

Hurricane Alicia August 1983. Category 3 hurricane--Texas; $3.0 (5.9) billion damage/costs; 21 deaths.

Western Storms and Flooding 1982 - Early 1983. Storms and flooding related to El Nino, especially in the states of WA, OR, CA, AZ, NV, ID, UT, and MT; approximately $1.1 (2.2) billion in damage/costs; at least 45 deaths.

Gulf States Storms and Flooding 1982 - Early 1983. Storms and flooding related to El Nino, especially in the states of TX, AR, LA, MS, AL, GA, and FL; approximately $1.1 (2.2) billion in damage/costs; at least 50 deaths.

1980

Drought/Heat Wave June-September 1980. Central and eastern U.S.; estimated $20.0 (48.4) billion damage/costs to agriculture and related industries; estimated 10,000 deaths (includes heat stress-related).



Comment on this Article


Catch the Wave: Asteroid-driven Tsunami in U.S. Eastern Seaboard's Future

By Tariq Malik
02 June 2003

A giant, 40 stories tall wave could one day drench the eastern United States, the result of an asteroid-driven tsunami. However seaside dwellers need not move just yet, the asteroid isn't due for another eight centuries.

Researchers in California have developed a computer simulation depicting the ocean impact of the asteroid 1950 DA, a half-mile wide (1.1-kilometer) space rock that swings uncomfortably close to Earth in 2880. Although the probability of such an impact is remote to say the least -- astronomers estimate it to be somewhere around 0.3 percent -- the computer model does give researchers insight into the destructive power of tsunamis caused by near-earth objects.
"You'd want to first decide how far away [from impact] the effects are going to be felt," Steven Ward, a research geophysicist at the University of California Santa Cruz (UCSC), said in a telephone interview. "And once you know that, maybe you could set up a zone of evacuation." According to Ward's research, about 120 million people live in coastal areas at elevations within 65 feet (20 meters) of sea level and just over a mile (two kilometers) of the ocean.

Ward is the lead author of the simulation study, which will appear in the June issue of the Geophysical Journal International.

Ward and co-author Erik Asphaug, an associate professor of earth sciences at UCSC, used 1950 DA as the asteroid in their simulation because of its history. Astronomers first discovered the asteroid in 1950 and tracked it for 17 days. The object was seen again in 2000, when researchers determined its radius and other characteristics. Its most recent Earth flyby last year led researchers to determine its future paths up through 2880, when it crosses the planet's orbit.

Asteroids are fascinating objects because they're the only disasters that you can prepare for, not like volcano eruptions, earthquakes or major storms," Asphaug told SPACE.com.

On March 16, 2880 the Earth's Atlantic Ocean is turned toward 1950 DA, and with 70-percent of the Earth covered in water an ocean impact would be the most likely to model.

In the simulation, 1950 DA slams into the Atlantic Ocean about 360 miles (579 kilometer) off the eastern coast of the United States. The asteroid, traveling at 38,000 miles an hour (61,155 kilometers per hour), is vaporized in the impact's 60,000-megaton blast and blows a hole in the ocean straight to the seafloor.

Seawater rushes into the cavity, which spans 11 miles in diameter and three miles deep (about 17 kilometers wide and five deep), and a halo of waves begin their journey outward from the impact site like overgrown ripples from a pond. Two hours after impact, waves 400 feet (121 meters) high hit the coastline from Cape Cod in Massachusetts to Cape Hatteras in North Carolina, and could ultimately penetrate more than two miles (about four kilometers) inland.

1950 DA is one of the larger asteroids that astronomers worry might hit the Earth. On the average, space rocks its size strike the earth every 100,000 years or so. Smaller asteroids up to 300 meters wide do so more frequently, about every 5,000 years, and so pose a larger tsunami danger for coastal residents, Ward said.

Asphaug, who led a NASA-sponsored workshop on asteroid hazards in September 2002, said that while not a lot can be done about larger, kilometer-sized objects that can cause global devastation, some action could be taken for smaller rocks. Observations, for example, could be fed into the already existing Pacific Tsunami Warning Center to track potential impacts.

"It takes time for these tsunamis to reach coastlines from the point of impact," Asphaug said, adding that once a satellite spots the flash of an impact, there will be a period of hours before the first big waves hit the shore. "It's possible to think that in 800 years, we might have enough technology to pinpoint which areas to evacuate and then do it."



Comment on this Article


New Warning: U.S. Gulf Coast Faces High Tsunami Risk

By Michael Schirber
LiveScience
16 March 2005

Scientists issued a fresh warning today: The northern Caribbean may be at a high risk for a major tsunami, based on historical records that date back to Columbus' arrival in 1492.

A tsunami in this region could affect more than 35 million people on the islands of the Greater and Lesser Antilles and along the east and Gulf coasts of the United States. The danger has been highlighted in previous research.
The major source for past tsunamis in the northern Caribbean has been movement along the boundary between the North American and Caribbean tectonic plates. This fault line stretches 2,000 miles (3,200 kilometers) from Central America to the Lesser Antilles, brushing up against the north coast of Hispaniola (the island of Haiti and the Dominican Republic).

Nancy Grindlay and Meghan Hearne of the University of North Carolina and Paul Mann of the University of Texas identified 10 significant tsunamis that have resulted from movement along this plate boundary. Six of these caused loss of life.

In 1692, a tsunami destroyed Port Royal, Jamaica; another killed at least 10 Jamaicans on the island's south coast in 1780. The most recent tsunami in 1946 was triggered by a magnitude 8.1 earthquake in the Dominican Republic. It killed around 1,800 people.

Jian Lin of the Woods Hole Oceanographic Institution believes that this sort of historical analysis can indicate how frequent big tsunamis are in a geographic region. It also gives an estimate of how large such events can potentially be.

"The tectonic setting of the northern Caribbean is very similar to the Indian Ocean - except that the subduction zone is not as long," Lin told LiveScience in a telephone interview.

The subduction zone is where one plate dips below another. Lin, who was not involved in the recent research, explained that the longer a subduction zone is, the larger the earthquake that the zone is capable of producing.

"The [historical analysis] shows that the Caribbean zone is long enough to have greater than a magnitude 8.0 earthquake," Lin said.

In comparison, the Sumatra earthquake that unleashed last year's tsunami in the Indian Ocean had a magnitude of 9.3.

Besides the direct threat from plate movement, other research has shown that underwater landslides in the region - or even in the middle of the Atlantic - could trigger a giant tsunami.

"The recent devastating tsunami in the Indian Ocean has raised public awareness of tsunami hazard and the need for early warning systems in high-risk areas such as the Caribbean," Grindlay said in a statement.

There are meetings scheduled later this year to implement an Intra-Americas Sea Tsunami Warning Project, as approved by the Intergovernmental Oceanographic Commission. Such a warning system has been set up in the Pacific Ocean, and one is planned for the Indian Ocean. The United States has also proposed a global warning system.

A report by Grindlay and her colleagues will appear in the March 22 issue of Eos, the newspaper of the American Geophysical Union.

The research was supported by the National Science Foundation and the University of Puerto Rico SeaGrant program.



Comment on this Article


Tsunamis in History

By LiveScience Staff

A sampling of the biggest, most destructive and deadliest tsunamis on record:

Nov. 1, 1755: After a colossal earthquake destroyed Lisbon, Portugal and rocked much of Europe, people took refuge by boat. A tsunami ensued, as did great fires. Altogether, the event killed more than 60,000 people.

Aug. 27, 1883: Eruptions from the Krakatoa volcano fueled a tsunami that drowned 36,000 people in the Indonesian Islands of western Java and southern Sumatra. The strength of the waves pushed coral blocks as large as 600 tons onto the shore.

Cont...

June 15, 1896:
Waves as high as 100 feet (30 meters), spawned by an earthquake, swept the east coast of Japan. Some 27,000 people died.

April 1, 1946:
The April Fools tsunami, triggered by an earthquake in Alaska, killed 159 people, mostly in Hawaii.

July 9, 1958: Regarded as the largest recorded in modern times, the tsunami in Lituya Bay, Alaska was caused by a landslide triggered by an 8.3 magnitude earthquake. Waves reached a height of 1,720 feet (576 meters) in the bay, but because the area is relatively isolated and in a unique geologic setting the tsunami did not cause much damage elsewhere. It sank a single boat, killing two fishermen.

May 22, 1960: The largest recorded earthquake, magnitude 8.6 in Chile, created a tsunami that hit the Chilean coast within 15 minutes. The surge, up to 75 feet (25 meters) high, killed an estimated 1,500 people in Chile and Hawaii.

March 27, 1964: The Alaskan Good Friday earthquake, magnitude between 8.4, spawned a 201-foot (67-meter) tsunami in the Valdez Inlet. It traveled at over 400 mph, killing more than 120 people. Ten of the deaths occurred in Crescent City, in northern California, which saw waves as high as 20 feet (6.3 meters).

Aug. 23, 1976: A tsunami in the southwest Philippines killed 8,000 on the heels of an earthquake.

July 17, 1998: A magnitude 7.1 earthquake generated a tsunami in Papua New Guinea that quickly killed 2,200.



Comment on this Article


March is Earthquake Month, and Other Shaky 'Facts'

By Michael Schirber
LiveScience
09 March 2005

A glance at geologic statistics might lead one to believe March is earthquake month. After all, the two strongest recorded earthquakes in U.S. history occurred in this month.

A deeper look reveals the true randomness of the events, dispelling also myths about "earthquake weather" and early morning quake frequency. Location, however, is another story.

On March 28, 1964, Prince William Sound, Alaska, experienced a 9.2 magnitude event that killed 125 people and caused $311 million in property loss. On March 9, 1957, the Andreanof Islands, Alaska, felt a 9.1 temblor.

But the next three biggest U.S. earthquakes occurred in February, November, and December.
The largest earthquake ever measured globally - a magnitude 9.5 in Chile - was on May 22, 1960. And the recent tsunami-causing earthquake off the coast of Sumatra happened the day after Christmas last year. It was first put at magnitude 9.0 but later raised to 9.3.

"Earthquakes occur randomly throughout the world, as well as the U.S.," said Waverly Person, a spokesman for the U.S. Geological Survey's National Earthquake Information Center.

Earthquake weather


There are claims that more earthquakes happen on hot, dry days - so-called "earthquake weather." But studies that have shown no tie between seismic activity and months or seasons.

The forces that drive weather are not likely to have much of an effect on the movement of continental plates several miles below the surface, geologists say.

Even the tide-causing gravity of the Moon and Sun apparently play no role in the onset of an earthquake. Scientists have looked for a seismic relationship to the tides, but nothing has been seen except for a small correlation with aftershocks in some volcanic regions.

Morning madness


Another misconception is that most rumblings occur in the morning. Although the likelihood of an earthquake is unrelated to the time of day, an earthquake could be more deadly - and therefore more memorable - at certain hours.

"In the early morning, most people are in their beds sleeping. You might have higher casualties with a lot of people in one place," Person told LiveScience.

As opposed to times, there are, of course, places that are more earthquake-prone than others. Alaska is one of the most seismically active regions in the world - experiencing a major earthquake (magnitude 7.0 or greater) almost every year, whereas no earthquakes of more than moderate intensity have occurred within the borders of North Dakota during historical times.



Comment on this Article


Ominous Rumbling Under San Andreas Fault

By Michael Schirber
LiveScience
09 December, 2004

A continuous shaking from deep in the San Andreas Fault may foretell of future earthquakes, scientists announced today.

The tremors -- not really normal earthquakes, last for more than four minutes. They are "a kind of chatter" coming from depths of 12 to 24 miles below the surface, said Robert Nadeau, from the Berkeley Seismological Laboratory of the University of California.

Over a three-year period, Nadeau and his graduate student, David Dolenc, detected 114 of the events beneath the town of Cholame, CA. These faint rumblings originate up to five times deeper than the average earthquake on this section of the fault.


The geologists have observed a possible correlation between the tremors and the rate of small microquakes in the region.

"This is new information from an area deep down under the fault we have not been able to look at before," Nadeau said. "If these tremors are precursory to earthquakes, there is potential here for earthquake forecasting and prediction."

The town of Cholame is thought to have been the origin of the magnitude 8 Fort Tejon Earthquake of 1857. This was the last big quake to hit southern California, and some seismologists think the area is due for another, since the average time between big quakes is 140 years.

Although the study was no longer running at the time, a moderate, magnitude 6 earthquake erupted on Sept. 28, 2004, outside the city of Parkfield, which is 15 miles northwest of Cholame. Because this quake was near the tremor region, Nadeau believes it supports the tremor-quake relationship.


Parkfield describes itself as the "Earthquake Capital of the World" because for 20 years seismologists have been studying the fault-line that cuts through the city. Between the quakes in 1887 and 2004, the area has been hit by five other large events in 1881, 1901, 1922 and 1934.

Earthquake magnitudes are measured with seismographs and rated on the Richter scale:

* 2.5 or less: Usually not felt, but can be recorded by seismograph. 900,000 per year worldwide.
* 2.5 to 5.4: Often felt, but only causes minor damage. 30,000 per year.
* 5.5 to 6.0: Slight damage to buildings and other structures. 500 per year.
* 6.1 to 6.9: May cause a lot of damage in very populated areas. 100 per year.
* 7.0 to 7.9: Major earthquake. Serious damage. 20 per year.
* 8.0 or greater: Great earthquake. Can totally destroy communities near the epicenter. One every 5 to 10 years.


Small tremors have typically been ignored by seismologists, who are more interested in short bursts of activity rather than a sustained rumbling.

But tremors have been observed under volcanoes, and recently led to predictions of the eruption of Mount St. Helens in Washington State. They have also been discovered in Japan and the Pacific Northwest at sites called subduction zones, where one of the Earth's plates dips underneath another.

Nadeau and Dolenc's tremors are the first detected underneath a transform fault, which is where two plates scrape against each other in a horizontal direction. It had been thought that tremors result from fluids flowing deep underground, but Nadeau said that his findings challenge this theory.

"Transform faults like the San Andreas have no obvious source of fluid, so it's not clear what's causing the tremors," he said. "Either tremors don't need fluid, or there is another, unknown source of fluid, perhaps from the Earth's mantle."

By understanding this mechanism better, the researchers hope to uncover whether tremors really can predict earthquakes.

Nadeau and Dolenc describe their work today in the online version of the journal Science.




Comment on this Article


2001: September 11


2001: January - Opposition believes Saddam footage is bogus

TCM News Archive
6 January 2001

12:25:06 PM - An Iraqi opposition group has claimed that Saddam Hussein's televised address to the nation used doctored and pre-recorded film.

A spokesman for the London-based dissidents said they still believed the president was unwell and the footage was made before he was taken ill.

He said it was a normal government ploy to broadcast the same footage repeatedly and said he suspected from the Iraqi leader's clothes and the appearance of his face that the clip was old.
"There are many speeches that are recorded and used whenever the government wants," the spokesman said.

The broadcast - which went out on TV, radio and the internet - is being seen as an attempt to scotch rumours that the president recently suffered a stroke or heart attack. But there was little to indicate that the speech marking the 80th anniversary of Iraq's armed forces was delivered live.

The entire Iraqi political and military leadership - except Saddam - had earlier gathered in their olive green military uniforms for a wreath-laying ceremony at the Tomb of the Unknown Soldier in central Baghdad to mark Iraq's Army Day.
Saddam made no reference in his broadcast to the rumours about his health. Instead, it was stuffed with rhetoric in which the president praised the Iraqi Army for being "brave, heroic, loyal, trustworthy and great" and praised Palestinians for their uprising against Israel.

He did not mention the election of George W Bush, whose father led the US during the Gulf War, or the continuing UN sanctions against Iraq.

Television footage of the president which was aired earlier this week - showing Saddam at a cabinet meeting and chatting to Egyptian actors - met with scepticism. Foreign Office Minister John Battle said: "The regime has a reputation for manipulating TV images, as we have seen before, and it's in the nature of this closed regime that the information to confirm otherwise is not available."

Dr Mowaffak Al'Rubaie, an Iraqi dissident based in the UK, told the BBC he had seen the cabinet meeting footage a fortnight earlier on Iraqi satellite TV and said Saddam was rumoured to have body doubles for making such appearances.



Comment on this Article


2001: January - US faces 'Pearl Harbour in space'

TCM News Archive
12 Jan 2001

The next US Defence Secretary says the country faces another Pearl Harbour-style attack but this time on its space satellites.

Donald Rumsfeld believes Nasa should take the threat of an attack on its satellite communications more seriously and that its interests in space should be protected.

The warnings are made in a report just published by a government commission he headed.
The report says: "If the US is to avoid a 'space Pearl Harbour,' it needs to take seriously the possibility of an attack on US space systems."

The 1941 Japanese attack on US naval forces in Hawaii outraged the US and drew it into World War II. The commission stops short of recommending a fifth armed service dedicated to space security.




Comment on this Article


2001: Plane crashes into World Trade Centre

TCM News Archive
11 Sept 2001

1:48:59 PM

There are unconfirmed reports that a jet plane has crashed into the World Trade Centre Tower in New York.

There is a large plume of black smoke coming from the tower.

It is not yet clear if there are any casualties.




Comment on this Article


2001: Explosion at World Trade Centre

TCM News Archive
11 Sept 2001

1:55:33 PM

The top of the World Trade Centre has just exploded after a plane crashed into it.

There are flames billowing from the top of the tower and debris is falling to the streets below.

There is speculation that the fuselage of the plane has exploded in the building.




Comment on this Article


2001: Second plane crashes into World Trade Centre

TCM News Archive
11 Sept 2001

2:08:48 PM

A second plane has crashed into the second tower at World Trade Centre just minutes after another passenger plane had already crashed into the tower.

An explosion occurred as the plane crashed into the tower.




Comment on this Article


2001: Third explosion at World Trade Centre

TCM News Archive
11 Sept 2001

2:59:08 PM

A huge explosion has occurred at the second of the two twin towers hit by planes in New York.

The tower is now covered in smoke.




Comment on this Article


2001: Pentagon evacuated due to fire

TCM
Breaking News
11 September 2001

2:41:05 PM

The Pentagon is being evacuated in expectation of a terrorist attack.

It is believed a fire has broken out in the building.

The White House has also been evacuated.

It is believed six people have died in the two crashes at the World Trade Centre and that the number will rise.

Thopusands of pieces of office paper was drifting over Brooklyn, three miles from the twin towers.




Comment on this Article


2001: Reports of helicopter crashing into Pentagon

TCM
Breaking News Archive
11 Sept 2001

2:47:43 PM

There are reports that a helicopter has crashed into the Pentagon.

An eyewitness said that they saw the helicopter circle the building and after it disappeared behind it, an explosion occured.




Comment on this Article


2001: Terrorist threats made against the White House

TCM Breaking News Archive
11 Sept 2001

2:52:26 PM

The FBI has evacuated the White House after they received what they said were "creditable threats" against the White House.

All airports across the US have been shut down.

Paul Begala, a Democratic consultant, said he witnessed a explosion near the Pentagon shortly after two planes crashed into World Trade Centre.

"It was a huge fireball, a huge, orange fireball," Begala said.

He said another witness told him a helicopter exploded.

Later a DFLP official denied responsibility for the attack.

The Chicago Stock Exchange has been evacuated.

Office paper from the damaged buildings has been found drifting over three
miles away in Brooklyn

Last terrorism attack on Feb. 26, 1993, killing six people and injured more
than 1,000 others.

In 1945, an Army Air Corps B-25, a twin-engine bomber, crashed into the 79th
floor of the Empire State Building in dense fog.

In Sarasota, Fla., President Bush was reading to children in a classroom at
9:05 a.m. when his chief of staff, Andrew Card, whispered into his ear.

The president briefly turned somber before he resumed reading.

Asked what he knew about the planes, Bush replied, "I'll talk about it
later."

There was no immediate word on injuries or fatalities in the twin disasters,
which happened shortly before 9 a.m. and then right around 9 a.m.




Comment on this Article


2001: Fighter jets patrolling skies after Pentagon attack

TCM News Archive
11 Sept 2001

6:40:29 PM

Fighter jets are patrolling the skies above Washington after a jet hijacked by terrorists struck the Pentagon.

The West Wing of White House was evacuated after the attack on the Pentagon.

An aircraft has crashed on a helicopter landing pad near the Pentagon, and the White House.

The Pentagon has taken a direct hit from an aircraft.

The nerve centre of the US military burst into flames and a portion of one side of the five-sided structure collapsed when the plane struck.

Secondary explosions were reported in the aftermath of the attack and great billows of smoke drifted skyward towards the Potomac River. Authorities immediately began deploying troops, including a regiment of light infantry.

Meanwhile, in Pennsylvania, a large plane, believed to be a Boeing 747, has crashed about 80 miles (130 kilometres) southeast of Pittsburgh.

The fate of those aboard is not immediately known and it is not clear if the crash is related to the disasters elsewhere.

General Richard Myers, vice chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff, says that prior to the crash into the Pentagon, military officials had been notified that another hijacked plane had been heading from the New York area to Washington.

He says he assumed that hijacked plane was the one that hit the Pentagon, though he could not be sure.




Comment on this Article


2001: Car bombing outside of State Department

TCM News Archive
11 Sept 2001

4:03:06 PM

The State Department was evacuated Tuesday due to a possible explosion or
fire amid a rash of explosions in New York and Washington.

A senior government official, speaking on condition of anonymity, said the incident appeared connected with the two plane crashes at the World Trade Center, an explosion at the Pentagon and the evacuation of the White House.

"Something has happened at the State Department," the source said. "We don't know what yet. We hear it might have been a plane."




Comment on this Article


2001: Car bomb explodes in Washington - Fifth Explosion in One Hour and a Half

TCM News Archive
11 Sept 2001

3:42:43 PM

There are reports that a car bomb has exploded outside the US State Department in Washington.

This is the fifth explosion in an hour and a half in a spate of major terrorist attacks on the United States.

Tony Blair postponed his TUC speech in Brighton and spoke of the mass terrorism, saying it is "the greatest evil in our midst today".

He also expressed sympathy for President Bush and the American people.

Palestinians in the West Bank and Gaza Strip have phoned news headquarters in Jerusalem, strenuously denying responsibility for the attack.




Comment on this Article


2001: Second aircraft hits Pentagon

TCM News Archive
11 Sept 2001

4:05:16 PM

A second aircraft has crashed into the Pentagon building.

It is not known whether this plane was that which was hijacked from Boston airport a short time ago, the fourth such plane to be used in this major attack on the US.

Earlier, a small plane had slammed into the building and set it ablaze.

It is not yet possible to ascertain the number of dead or injured in the various attacks in America's biggest cities.

All flights to and from the US have been grounded, as have all transatlantic flights to and from Canada.




Comment on this Article


2001:Pentagon in state of collapse - Hit by Two Planes

TCM News Archive
11 Sept 2001

4:17:03 PM

Part of the Pentagon building outside Washington has collapsed.

It had been hit by two planes apparently hijacked by terrorists in Boston earlier today.

It is understood the building is evacuated.




Comment on this Article


2001: September 11 - Part 2


2001: Fears plane crashes were acts of terrorism

TCM News Archive
11 Sept 2001

2:27:35 PM

FBI investigating reports of plane hijacking before World Trade Centre crashes.
The FBI told CNN that they have not yet established if it was a terrorist act.

The FBI told CNN that they have not yet established if it was a terrorist act.

A US Official has said that the crashes " appear to be acts of terrorism".

Two jet airliners crashed into the World Trade Centre in New York within minutes of each other today.
Witnesses were just describing the horror of the first impact when another passenger plane crashed into building, on the other side and below the first impact.

An eyewitness said the first plane appeared to hit one of the skyscraper's twin towers about 20 floors from the top.

He said he thought the plane was still embedded in the smashed and burning building.

Another he said it appeared that the first plane lined up on the tower before crashing.

Jeanne Yurman, told CNN she was watching TV when she heard what she thought was a sonic boom. "I thought it was Concorde," she said.
There was no immediate word on injuries or fatalities in the twin disasters, which happened shortly before 9 am (1300 BST) and then right around 9 am

The towers were struck by bombers in February 1993.

"The plane was coming in low and it looked like it hit at a slight angle," said Sean Murtagh, a CNN vice president.

Large holes were visible in sides of the 110 storey buildings, landmark twin towers.

The tops of the twin towers were obscured by the smoke.

Thousands of pieces of what appeared to be office paper came drifting over Brooklyn, about three miles from the tower, one witness said.

The centre bombing in February 1993, killing six people and injured more than 1,000 others.

In 1945, an Army Air Corps B-25, a twin-engine bomber, crashed into the 79th floor of the Empire State Building in dense fog.



Comment on this Article


2001: Up to 800 possibly dead at Pentagon - "It was like a Cruise Missile" says witness

CNN
September 12, 2001

WASHINGTON (CNN) -- Up to 800 people may have died Tuesday when a hijacked commercial airliner was crashed into the Pentagon, officials said.

Firefighters were still battling a fire on the west side of the 29-acre, 6 million-square-foot building late Tuesday, more than 12 hours after the crash. Washington hospitals reported 71 people injured, some severely, and another 100 to 800 were still listed as missing and possibly dead late Tuesday.

Despite the serious damage caused by the attack, the headquarters of the U.S. military will reopen Wednesday, Secretary of Defense Donald Rumsfeld said.

"The Pentagon is functioning. It will be in business tomorrow," Rumsfeld said late Tuesday from a Pentagon briefing room.
An American Airlines flight from Washington to Los Angeles crashed into the Pentagon with 64 passengers and crew aboard. The fuel-laden jet, which had just taken off from Washington's Dulles Airport, set the world's largest office building ablaze and forced thousands of employees to evacuate.

The attack occurred shortly after two other commercial jetliners were hijacked and flown into the twin towers of the World Trade Center in New York. A fourth plane that was hijacked crashed in a wooded area in Pennsylvania.

Casualties were expected to be high, but Rumsfeld released no estimates Tuesday.

In addition to the "many dozens in the aircraft," he said, "there are a number of people that they have not identified by name, but have identified as being dead, and there are a number of casualties. The number has yet to be calculated, and it will not be a few."

The Pentagon suffered widespread damage on the building's fourth, fifth and sixth corridors, and the impact tore a gaping hole in one side of the building. Firefighters continued to battle the blaze on the building's west side Tuesday night, describing it as "contained" but not yet under control.

Rumsfeld was joined by Gen. Hugh Shelton, chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff; the chairman of the Senate Armed Services Committee, Michigan Democrat Carl Levin; and Virginia Sen. John Warner, the committee's ranking Republican.

Shelton called the attacks "barbaric terrorism carried out by fanatics."

"I would tell you up front, I have no intentions of discussing today what comes next, but make no mistake about it, your armed forces are ready," Shelton said.

U.S. intelligence officials told CNN there were "good indications" that persons linked to Osama bin Laden -- the Saudi millionaire suspected in a number of anti-U.S. terror attacks -- may be responsible for these attacks.

Taliban officials in Afghanistan, where bin Laden is believed to be hiding, said they doubted he was capable of coordinating attacks of such magnitude and pledged to conduct their own investigation.

Debbie Weirerman, public information officer of the FBI office in Boston, said she couldn't confirm or deny a report in Wednesday's Boston Herald newspaper that authorities have identified at least five Arab men as suspects in the attacks launched from Logan International Airport.

But Peter Judge, public information officer at the Massachusetts Emergency Management Agency, said the FBI seized a vehicle at the airport with "a lot of suspicious materials in it."

The Herald report also said that Arabic-language flight training manuals were found in a car in the airport's parking garage and said the two of the men were brothers, one a trained pilot. The Herald reported that at least two other suspects flew to Logan on Tuesday from Portland, Maine.

President Bush issued a brief statement Tuesday night, vowing, "We will find these people and they will suffer for taking on this nation." Bush, who was in Florida at the time of the attack, said the nation's military had been placed on "high-alert status." Rumsfeld would not disclose Tuesday whether U.S. military officials had any kind of warning of an attack.

The jet struck a section of the Pentagon that housed U.S. Army offices about 9:40 a.m. Tuesday. Among those aboard the jet was Barbara Olson, a conservative commentator who appeared frequently on CNN and the wife of U.S. Solicitor General Theodore Olson.

"It was like a cruise missile with wings, went right there and slammed into the Pentagon," Mike Walter, an eyewitness, told CNN. "Huge explosion, great ball of fire, smoke started billowing out, and then it was just chaos on the highway as people either tried to move around the traffic and go down either forward or backwards."
20,000 Pentagon staff evacuated

The more than 20,000 civilians and military men and women who work in the Pentagon streamed into the surrounding parking lots, driven by blue and white strobe alarm lights and wailing sirens. All federal office buildings were ordered closed.

Rumsfeld was uninjured. After the crash, he ran from his office and assisted some victims onto stretchers.

One witness told CNN she saw a commercial jet flying "too fast, too low" and then she saw an explosion at the building.

Lisa Burgess, a reporter for the Army newspaper Stars and Stripes, said she was walking in a corridor near the blast site and was thrown to the ground by the force of the blast.

Pentagon officials said the national military command center deep inside the building remained intact.
Navy deploys ships off both coasts

In the aftermath, helicopters patrolled the air space over the nation's capital. At one point, fighter jets scrambled to intercept what was reported to be a second aircraft headed toward the area. The second aircraft never appeared.

All U.S. military sites around the world have gone to ThreatCon Delta, which means that a terrorist attack has occurred or an attack at a specific location is likely, Pentagon officials said.

Two aircraft carriers left the Navy base in Norfolk, Virginia, to boost air defense for New York and Washington.

The Navy's Pacific Fleet has deployed an aircraft carrier, two guided missile cruisers, five destroyers and five frigates armed with missiles to protect the West Coast and Hawaii, according to a Navy official, who asked not to be identified.

And in the Persian Gulf, the aircraft carrier USS Enterprise -- which had been stationed in the Persian Gulf recently and relieved by the USS Carl Vinson -- has been told to stay in the region, Pentagon officials told CNN.

-- CNN Military Affairs Correspondent Jamie McIntyre and CNN.com writer Matt Smith contributed to this report.



Comment on this Article


2001: America reeling in horror and shock

TCM News Archive
11 Sept 2001

"The memory of Pearl Harbor was offered up again and again, with all its images of sneak attacks, national honor and war.

"This is our second Pearl Harbor, right here in the nation's capital and New York City," a somber Sen. John W. Warner, R-Va., said as he stood in a capitol park after his office building was evacuated."
7:27:57 PM

The American nation reeled in horror and security measures spun into effect as the work day began with a series of plane crashes that tore through the World Trade Center and left smoke billowing from the Pentagon.

"I'm very afraid. I don't feel safe," said Charlin Sims, taking a cigarette break outside her office in downtown Columbus, Ohio. "I want to hug my son."

Bells at Trinity Episcopal Church in Columbus rang for the victims, and flags were lowered to half-staff in many states. Nationwide, crowds gathered around television sets in airports, bars, hotel lounges. The space station commander could see the smoke rising above New York.

"My whole family's from Boston, and two are always flying," said Diane Morse, dialing her cell phone in tears in downtown Cleveland. "We always fly American." Relatives and friends worked at the twin towers, she said.

Government offices from coast to coast launched emergency preparedness operations, even as questions were raised about how what appeared to be a well-coordinated terrorist attack could be carried out.

"It's sort of like a terrorism movie you see on television," said terrorism expert Michael Gunter at Tennessee Technological University in Cookeville.

Other planes were apparently hijacked and crashed, including one that crashed near Pittsburgh.

The memory of Pearl Harbor was offered up again and again, with all its images of sneak attacks, national honor and war.

"This is our second Pearl Harbor, right here in the nation's capital and New York City," a somber Sen. John W. Warner, R-Va., said as he stood in a capitol park after his office building was evacuated.

Also speaking of Pearl Harbor were an airplane passenger stranded in Orlando, military veterans, a Wall Street worker fleeing the smoke and debris of the attack itself.

"Someone is trying to make a serious statement and I hope we do likewise," said Scott Gilmore at the Dallas-Fort Worth International Airport.

A World War II veteran in Nashville for a reunion of the U.S.S. Intrepid aircraft carrier was incensed. "I feel like going to war again. No mercy," said Felix Novelli, a New Yorker with friends who work at the World Trade Center. "We have to come together like '41, go after them."

"We're like everyone else, in shock," said Carol Windham, a spokeswoman at Birmingham International Airport in Alabama. Planes were grounded nationwide.

Heightened security went into effect at government and corporate offices - at the Army's main germ warfare defense laboratory in Frederick, Md., city offices in Colorado and oil refineries in Louisiana.

Monuments like the Gateway Arch in St. Louis were closed.

"I don't think there's any place in America right now that's not at risk," said Andrew Hudson, a city spokesman in Denver, where emergency preparedness officials gathered in the basement of City Hall.

Students at Kansas State University in Manhattan skipped class to gather at television sets, sometimes with professors' blessing.

"It seems ridiculous that I would stand in front of my class talking about Plato when something this important is going on," said Laurie Bagby, an associate professor of political science.

In a Philadelphia hotel lounge, where dozens of people gathered to watch television coverage, a visitor from Texas wept.

"I can't believe what I'm seeing. I never thought I would see anything like this in my lifetime," said 20-year-old Beverly Evans of Dallas. "How can we stop something like this from happening?"




Comment on this Article


2001: Explosions in Kabul not US retaliation strike

TCM News Archive
11 Sept 2001

11:26:32 PM

It has been reported that the explosions in Kabul, Afghanistan, were not part of an United States retaliation.

The explosions have rocked Kabul for the last hour.

Reports say the attacks in Kabul are a part of on-going civil war in Afghanistan.




Comment on this Article


2001: Location of second United Airlines plane unknown

TCM News Archive
11 Sept 2001

6:42:54 PM

Two United Airlines jetliners crashed this morning, one in western Pennsylvania and the second at a location the airline did not immediately disclose.

A total of 110 people were aboard the two planes, the airline said.

One plane, United Flight 93, crashed north of the Somerset County airport, a small airport about 80 miles southeast of Pittsburgh.

The Pennsylvania crash followed the crash of two planes into the World Trade Center in New York City.

American Airlines initially said its planes crashed into the twin towers but later said that was unconfirmed.

"It shook the whole station," said Bruce Grine, owner of Grine's Service Center in Shanksville, about 2½ miles from the crash.

"Everybody ran outside, and by that time the fire whistle was blowing."




Comment on this Article


2001: World Trade Centre building number seven collapses

TCM News Archive
11 Sept 2001

10:29:51 PM

The World Trade Centre building number seven has just collapsed. It was 47 stories high.

Two planes crashed into the twin towers of the trade centre around 2pm Irish time. Since then, fires and explosions have ripped through the complex.

Fire crews are still not entering the centre of the explosions site due to the continuing structural instability.

More than eight hours after the explosions, there are still no firmer estimates as to the number of victims. It is known however that some 50,000 people worked in the World Trade Centre and tens of thousands more visit it every day.

A further 266 passengers on board the four crashed passenger planes are presumed dead.





Comment on this Article


2001: United Airlines concerned about fourth plane

TCM News Archive
11 Sept 2001

4:59:51 PM

American Airlines issued a statement saying it had "lost" two aircraft - Flight 11, with 92 people aboard, and Flight 77 from Washington to Los Angeles, carrying 64 people.

In Pennsylvania, United Airlines Flight 93, a Boeing 757 en route from Newark, N.J., to San Francisco, crashed about 80 miles southeast of Pittsburgh.

The fate of those aboard was not immediately known and it was not clear if the crash was related to the disasters elsewhere.

In a statement, the airline also said it was deeply concerned about another plane, Flight 175, a Boeing 767 bound from Boston to Los Angeles.




Comment on this Article


2001: Hijack passenger Barbara Olsen rang husband from plane

TCM News Archive
11 Sept 2001

10:05:04 PM

One of the passengers on the airplanes hijacked and crashed by terrorists in the US today phoned her husband to tell him her flight had been hijacked.

Barbara Olsen, wife of US Solicitor General Theodore Olsen, rang him on her mobile phone twice to say hijackers wielding knives had taken control of the plane.

The hijackers, she said, forced passengers and crew to the back of the plane.

Ms Olsen was on her way to meet her husband to celebrate his birthday when the flight was hijacked.

She and all 266 passengers on board the four hijacked flights are presumed dead.




Comment on this Article


2001: Pittsburgh plane may have been shot down

TCM News Archive
11 Sept 2001

4:28:14 PM

A Boeing 767 has crashed near Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania.

It is not known if this air crash is related to the three other jets used in today's spate of terrorist attacks on the US.

The plane came down just north of the Somerset county airport, about 80 miles south east of Pittsburgh.

US anti-aircraft fighters are in place - unconfirmed reports say this plane was shot out of the sky by US defence.

It remains unclear whether this aircraft was the fourth to be hijacked in Boston earlier today.




Comment on this Article


2001: Spectre of 'World War Three' raised

TCM News Archive
11 Sept 2001

8:57:19 PM

Concern that the US could "over-react" to the outrage was voiced by a British terrorism expert.

Mike Yardley raised the spectre of "World War Three" in the worst-case scenario.

He said: "If the US discovers that a state was in some way supporting this group of radicals, it could unleash a terrible retaliation that would play right into the hands of the terrorists."

That state could then be supported by others, such as Iraq, he said, precipitating a world war.

"They are probably planning on the Americans over-reacting and George W Bush is exactly the man to do that," said Mr Yardley. "It could be World War Three."




Comment on this Article


2001: Taliban rulers condemn attacks on US

TCM News Archive
11 Sept 2001

6:46:49 PM

Afghanistan's hardline Taliban rulers condemned the devastating terrorist attacks in New York and Washington on Tuesday and rejected suggestions that Osama bin Laden could be behind them.

"We never support terrorism. We too are targets of terrorism," Abdul Hai Muttmain, the Taliban's spokesman in the southern city of Kandahar, told The Associated Press in a telephone interview.

After the attacks, a London-based Arab journalist said followers of bin Laden warned three weeks ago that they would carry out a "huge and unprecedented attack" on U.S. interests.
Abdel-Bari Atwan, editor of the Al-Quds al-Arabi newspaper, said he received a warning from Islamic fundamentalists close to bin Laden, but did not take the threat seriously.

"They said it would be a huge and unprecedented attack but they did not specify," Atwan said in a telephone interview in London.

"We usually receive this kind of thing. At the time we did not take the warnings seriously as they had happened several times in the past and nothing happened. "This time it seems his people were accurate and meant every word they said."

Atwan, who interviewed bin Laden in 1996 and has since maintained contacts with his followers, said he believed the attack on the World Trade Center in New York was the work of "an Islamic fundamentalist group" close to bin Laden.

But Muttmain, who is the spokesman for the Taliban's reclusive leader Mullah Mohammed Omar and one of the most senior Taliban officials, dismissed allegations that bin Laden could be behind the attacks in the United States.

"Such a big conspiracy, to have infiltrated in such a major way is impossible for Osama," said Muttmain. He said bin Laden does not have the facilities to orchestrate such a major assault within the United States.

Afghanistan's Taliban rulers, who espouse a harsh brand of Islamic law, have resisted U.S. demands to hand over bin Laden, indicted in the United States on charges of masterminding the bombings of two U.S. Embassies in East Africa in 1998 that killed 224 people, including 12 Americans.

After the attacks in East Africa, Washington retaliated with a blistering missile attack in August 1998, sending more than 70 Tomahawk cruise missiles into eastern Afghanistan apparently targeting training camps operated by bin Laden.

The attacks killed about 20 followers of bin Laden's but the exiled Saudi millionaire escaped unhurt. Since then he has been forced by the Taliban rulers to stop giving interviews and making statements.



Comment on this Article


2001: Bush resolves to 'hunt down' terrorists

TCM News Archive
11 Sept 2001

6:07:57 PM

President George Bush has said that the United States will "hunt down those responsible for these cowardly attacks"

"I want to reassure the American people that the full resources of the Federal Government are working to assist local authorities to save lives and to help the victims of this horrible act. The resolve of the United States is being tested. Make no mistake - we will pass this test."

"The US will hunt down those reponsible for these cowardly acts."




Comment on this Article


2001: Pentagon Crash Highlights a Radar Gap - Limited System in One Area Made Flight 77 Invisible to Controllers for Half-Hour

By Don Phillips
Washington Post Staff Writer
Saturday, November 3, 2001

The airliner that slammed into the Pentagon on Sept. 11 disappeared from controllers' radar screens for at least 30 minutes -- in part because it was hijacked in an area of limited radar coverage. That gap cost military and aviation officials valuable warning time, according to officials and other sources.

Investigators are still piecing together the facts in the hijacking of American Airlines Flight 77. But the sector of limited radar coverage at an Indianapolis "en route center" helps explain one of its mysteries: Why did the Boeing 757 simply disappear from radar screens for a half-hour or more, turn aroundover southern Ohio and get back into Washington airspace before anyone noticed it or knew that it had been hijacked?
It's an especially intriguing question because controllers in New York, Boston and Cleveland suspected or knew quickly that three other airliners had been hijacked. They tracked two of them on a backup radar system as one slammed into the World Trade Center and another crashed in Pennsylvania.

They searched, without success, for the third, which also plowed into the World Trade Center.

In the case of American Flight 77, it is unclear whether additional warning time would have changed anything. Military jets were scrambled after controllers became aware of the hijacked aircraft, but the fighters could not get to the Washington area in time.

Thirty minutes' extra warning would have allowed the jets to arrive in Washington before Flight 77, but it is unclear what action they were prepared to take.

The aircraft, traveling from Dulles International Airport to Los Angeles, was hijacked sometime between 8:50 a.m. -- when air traffic controllers made their last routine contact with the pilot -- and 8:56, when hijackers turned off the transponder, which reports the plane's identity, altitude and speed to controllers' radar screens.

The airliner crashed into the Pentagon at 9:41 a.m., about 12 minutes after controllers at Dulles sounded an alert that an unidentified aircraft was headed toward Washington at high speed.

The answers to the mystery of the aircraft's disappearance begin with the fact that the hijacking took place in an area served by only one type of radar, FAA officials confirmed.

Although this radar is called a "secondary" system, it is the type used almost exclusively today in air traffic control. It takes an aircraft's identification, destination, speed and altitude from the plane's transponder and displays it on a controller's radar screen.

"Primary" radar is an older system. It bounces a beam off an aircraft and tells a controller only that a plane is aloft -- but does not display its type or altitude. The two systems are usually mounted on the same tower.

Primary radar is normally used only as a backup, and is usually turned off by controllers handling aircraft at altitudes above 18,000 feet because it clutters their screens. All aircraft flying above 18,000 feet are required to have working transponders.

If a plane simply disappears from radar screens, most controllers can quickly switch on the primary system, which should display a small plus sign at the plane's location, even if the aircraft's transponder is not working.

But the radar installation near Parkersburg, W. Va., was built with only secondary radar -- called "beacon-only" radar. That left the controller monitoring Flight 77 at the Indianapolis center blind when the hijackers apparently switched off the aircraft's transponder, sources said.

The airspace controlled by each of the FAA's 20 "en route" centers is further divided into a number of sectors, with separate controllers handling each sector. Flight 77 was flying through a sector in the eastern portion of Indianapolis's airspace when it was hijacked.

Sources said the location of the hijacking is likely just a coincidence, although there is a remote possibility that the hijackers knew where to turn off the transponder.

There are a number of locations across the interior of the United States that operate solely with secondary radars. Until Sept. 11, it was the written policy of the FAA to begin turning off some older primary radars as they broke down or came due for expensive maintenance.

The more modern secondary radar was considered sufficient for high-altitude navigation as the FAA began switching to satellite-based navigation systems over the coming decades. FAA officials said no primary radars had been turned off yet, and the events of Sept. 11 have reversed the policy.

Officials acknowledged that several other factors contributed to the lack of information about Flight 77, which killed 189 people when it hit the Pentagon.

- Unlike at least two of the other aircraft, whose pilots apparently held radios open so controllers could hear the hijackers, there was only silence from Flight 77.

- In the case of the two planes that hit the World Trade Center, the Boston en route center handed off the climbing planes to the New York Terminal Radar Approach Control (TRACON) facility, an FAA official said. TRACONs control lower-altitude airspace, and controllers in them routinely monitor both primary and secondary radar.

Also, as soon as it became known that airliners were disappearing from radar screens, controllers in the New York and Boston "en route" sectors turned on their primary radar. That left the Northeast blanketed with both types of radar.

- Alerts and groundings of aircraft on Sept. 11 came minutes too late to help find Flight 77. The aircraft disappeared just nine minutes after the FAA was notified that a plane had hit the World Trade Center, and 12 minutes before the second plane struck, a period of general confusion.

An alert to controllers to watch for planes disappearing from radar or changing to unauthorized courses did not go out until 22 minutes after Flight 77 disappeared, when it was at least halfway back to Washington.

- When they reconstructed Flight 77's path, investigators determined that it was picked up by some distant radars, but none that were available to the Indianapolis controller, FAA officials said.

As the airliner sped east, controllers handling other sectors of high-altitude airspace in the Indianapolis center and the Washington center, at Leesburg, did not notice it, sources said. As usual, they were not monitoring primary radar, either. The two centers cover large areas of the Ohio Valley and Mid-Atlantic areas.

With no signal on their radar screens, controllers did not realize that Flight 77 had reversed direction. At 9:09 a.m., unable to reach the plane by radio, the Indianapolis controller reported a possible crash, sources said.

The first time that anyone became aware an aircraft was headed at high speed toward Washington was when the hijacked flight began descending and entered airspace controlled by the Dulles International Airport TRACON facility, an aviation source said.

The first Dulles controller noticed the fast-moving plane at 9:25 a.m. Moments later, controllers sounded an alert that an aircraft appeared to be headed directly toward the White House. It later turned and hit the Pentagon.

FAA spokeswoman Laura Brown noted that the Indianapolis controller properly followed all procedures in effect before Sept. 11. He or she assumed an electrical power failure and made every possible attempt to contact the plane. In the meantime, the controller cleared other aircraft from the plane's presumed flight path.

Those procedures changed, effectively, 22 minutes after Flight 77 disappeared from radar, when the FAA Command Center -- reacting to the World Trade Center crashes -- told controllers nationwide to be alert for planes dropping from radar or making unauthorized course changes.

Today, controllers would alert supervisors, who likely would call for military aircraft to search for the missing plane.



Comment on this Article


2001: Andrey Kosyakov: "Sequential acts of terrorism in THE USA will be carried out by Wednesday or Thursday of next week."

By Sterkin, Philipp
on 14 September 2001

Acts of terrorism carried out on 11 September in America, and their consequences are commented upon in an interview with Andrey Kosyakov, former assistant to the chairman of the Russian Congress, a specialist in International Security.


What suggests that terrorism in THE USA was planned well in advance?

First, the conspirators possessed the professional skill to fly an aircraft. There had to be at least four of them with substitutes on hand in the event one of them failed. There is a high probability that the hijacking of an aircraft will fail, thus there had to be stand-by hijackers and/or pilots in this eventuality.

In the second place, all participants in the operation were ready to sacrifice themselves, and such individuals are not easy to find.

Finally, the departure times of the aircraft from four different points were coordinated minute by minute. This means that the routes and timing were known well in advance, and these particular flights were selected specifically for their routes and schedule.

All of this is sufficiently complicated to necessitate a long period of planning.

And how long, in your opinion, would it take to plan something like this? How large an organization would it require? Could, for example, the Red Army carry out such an operation? Some analysts say that only a National organization could do this.

As far as the time of preparation is concerned, it would require months. And such an organization must be very powerful. But, the participation of a National organization, such as a government of a country, is very doubtful.

I assure you that National resources have not been used here. No secret service would risk their operatives in this way. They spend a lot of time and money training their agents. However, if President Bush had been the target, then one would suspect a secret service of some organization. But here, the target was different: civilians.

As for the Red Army, it doesn't fit for one simple reason: it consists of mainly orientals and it is too easy to distinguish Japanese from Americans.

So, what do you conclude from all this?


You see, analyzing this situation, I was struck by one significant fact: it is known that there were telephone calls from the plane. One of the calling persons was a professional journalist. And yet, not one of the calling individuals said that they were being hijacked by "moslem terrorists." There was, apparently, nothing unusual about the appearance of the hijackers. There was no attempt to describe them. No one said: "Moslem terrorists have hijacked the plane," which would have logically been the first comment by this journalist IF it was apparent that the hijackers were "foreign." There was obviously nothing unusual about them in terms of appearance, accent, pronunciation, or other similar factors.

But, secret organizations could hide these things, couldn't they?


All these calls were private. And even the FBI was not able to suppress the fact that these calls took place. So, the conclusion which comes to mind, is that the external appearance of the hijackers was in no way different from the other passengers. Only in such cases would the communicants indentify the hijackers in a shorthand way. This suggests that the hijackers were European in appearance.

There is also the suspicious fact that the conspirators left a huge "clue" in the leased automobile at the airport with a copy of the Koran and instructions for flying a plane in Arabic.

Now look, not one organization claimed responsibility. This means that the terrorists want to hide their identity. With every other aspect of total control and professionalism, how could they make such a mistake? This does not compute with all the rest of the perfection of the operation.

All this says that the criminals want to create a false track. In this way, the secret services have been induced very cleverly to look for "Moslem terrorists. "

But indeed the practice of self-sacrifice is typical to the Moslem culture?


You are completely right. But who told you that those who died were not Moslems? This way we can narrow the radius of our search. On the basis of this information which we have, by analysis, we may come to the consclusion that those who did it were Americans or Europeans who were followers of radical Islam. They were manipulated so that the true criminals will be thus spared for follow-up actions. It is completely clear that this is a multi-phase operation.

That means that you do think that there will be new terrorist acts?


Unfortunately, it seems to me, it is necessary to be prepared for more terrorism, in another form, but with equal effectiveness. According to the clues that we have, ships can be used to ram dams. Imagine, if you will, a passenger ship or a tanker with 200,000 tons of oil hijacked and rammed into a dam? It will flood the cities downriver with populations in the millions, with burning oil floating on a flood.

Another variant: There are railroad crossings under the Hudson river. This can be exploded from above or below, which would flood the subway.

Are you saying that these actions will take place in America?

Yes. In the first place, the terrorists will want to confirm their superiority. In the second place, remember that, besides the use of the aircraft as weapons, there was also a car bomb. So, what would prevent the terrorists from blowing up a few more cars in Europe if they intend to act globally?

No, it seems that the target is precisely America; precisely civilians.

But, we remember that some analysts were claiming that if George Bush was in the White House on September 11, then the aircraft would have been aimed at the White House instead of the Pentagon.

This is highly improbable. In that case the White House or the Pentagon, but not peaceful population would be the first targets. Indeed after a first successful terrorist act, the chances of success for the rest fall. You see that the last action did fail in the crash of the aircraft in Pittsburgh. It was most certainly shot down. However hard it is to admit, this was the correct thing to do.

So it is clear that the main targets are civilians. There is this formula that is part of the mentality of terrorists: the civilian population in the democratic countries are responsible for the actions of their government. The terrorists accept and use this formula. Therefore, the next terrorist acts will follow the same pattern. Obviously, they will occur on Wednesday or Thursday of next week. Why? I don't want to explain the terrorist's logic. But it is based on a certain sense of the "rightness" of the thing.

But I would like to repeat this: the fact that no terrorists are claiming responsibility, tells us that they will kill again and again until the next stage of global conflict is achieved. This is precisely the goal of these actions. Only then will they reveal their identity in order to get followers.

How could the special services OF THE USA fail to detect such a terrorist act?


I will give two examples. Half a year ago Israeli reconnaissance carried out studies through the use of aerial targets for conducting terrorism. It is certain that the Americans had access to these studies. But it seems to not have entered their minds to apply this information in defensive ways.

And other - in March of 1991 in our office sat Korzhakov, and we told him about the situation leading to the September government coup. We predicted that everything would occur in September. Everything actually occurred, exactly following our scenario, only it happend one month earlier: August. No one paid any attention. This means that when there are predictions of scenarios that seem to be improbable, no one takes them seriously, especially the secret services. That is why Putin says that what is needed is a union of all secret services of all nations.

What is the probability that the American secret services will succeed in finding the leader of this operation, or that they simply will present to society a fake?

Very high. There are people, there are apartments where they were located, which means, there are traces, certainly. Following these traces, one may find the leader.

And who this? Ben Laden?

Hardly. Yes, there was the interception of his conversation with someone, where they reported to him the destruction of two targets.This was seen as indirect confirmation of his participation. But he is not an ideologist. He is too well known. And the one who organized all of this is too smart to be noticed. Ever.



Comment on this Article



Remember, we need your help to collect information on what is going on in your part of the world!
Send your article suggestions to: sott(at)signs-of-the-times.org